You are on page 1of 525

Reference manual

Trademark & Copyright Notice


Program copyright 2006, e frontier America, Inc. and e frontier, Inc. All rights reserved. e frontier
America, Inc. and e frontier are trademarks and Amapi, Amapi Pro, Shade designer LE, Shade standard
and Shade professional are registered trademarks of e frontier America, Inc. and e frontier, Inc. All other
trademarks or registered trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.
“Macintosh” is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. “Windows” is a registered trademark of
Microsoft Corporation. “Pentium” is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. All other product names
mentioned in the manual and other documentation are used for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Registered and unregistered
trademarks used herein are the exclusive property of their respective owners. e frontier, Inc. makes no
claim to any such marks, nor willingly or knowingly misused or misapplied such marks.
This manual as well as the software described herein is furnished under license and may only be used or
copied in accordance with the terms of such license. Program copyright 2006 e frontier America, Inc. and
e frontier, Inc., including the look and feel of the product. Amapi Pro User Guide copyright 2006 by e
frontier America, Inc. and e frontier, Inc. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by
any means without prior written permission of e frontier America, Inc. or e frontier, Inc.

5615 Scotts Valley Drive


Suite 210
Scotts Valley, CA 95066,
USA
Phone; 831.480.2000
Fax: 831.480.2010
www.e-frontier.com
Contribution

The Amapi Pro documentation was written by Sylvie Gateuil


The Amapi Pro documentation add-on was written by Thomas Roussel and Pascal Doux

The translation has been made by Blaise Zapparata, Laurent Billy and Pascal Doux.

Amapi Pro development team:

Pascal Doux, Xavier Durand, Mickael Gasrel, Maxime Rouca, Thomas Roussel.

Thanks to those who have participated to the Amapi Pro development:

Laurent Billy, Emmanuel Rémia, Thierry Duvignac, Olivier Gardinetti, Fabrice Sadaune.

Thanks

This manual would not have existed without the help and support of Philip Staiger and Blaise Zapparata.

We would like to express our gratitude for the active involvement that Pierre Bretagnolle and
Richard Enjalbert gave us in the formal and functional specifications of the program and for the graphical
user interface graphic design.
Pierre and Richard took part in the program validation phase and the design of the 3D objects supplied
with Amapi Pro.

Many thanks to Emmanuel Rémia who created the model for the cover.

Many thanks to Valérie Berth, Lori Izabelle and Matthew Schultz


for the validation of the English translation of this manual.

Thanks also to all the beta-testers who helped us enthusiastically during the program validation phase
and particularly to Olivier Drion!
Table of Contents

Introduction

Ch 1 Welcome..............................................................................................................................3

Ch 2 How to use the Reference Manual? ..................................................5

Ch 3 Installation ........................................................................................................................7
PC..................................................................................................................................................7
• Minimum system requirements ...................................................................................7
• Recommended system requirements .......................................................................7
• Installation .............................................................................................................................8
Macintosh .................................................................................................................................9
• Minimum system requirements ...................................................................................9
• Recommended system requirements .......................................................................9
• Installation ............................................................................................................................9

Amapi ProT M i
Getting started

Ch 4 Quick Tour ...................................................................................................................... 13

Ergonomics ............................................................................................................................. 13
Screen Layout ....................................................................................................................... 18
Rooms ........................................................................................................................................ 19
3D window, views and navigation ............................................................................ 20
Objects and 3D entities ................................................................................................... 22
Selections ................................................................................................................................ 24
Working plane and ruler ................................................................................................. 24
Using tools ............................................................................................................................... 26
Scene management .......................................................................................................... 27
Dynamic Geometry (DG)................................................................................................ 28
Entering values ..................................................................................................................... 29
Modeling room tools palette ......................................................................................... 29

Ch 5 Modeling tools description.......................................................................... 31


Toolkit ......................................................................................................................................... 32
Construction palette .......................................................................................................... 33
Modeling palette .................................................................................................................. 34
Assembly Palette ................................................................................................................ 35

Ch 6 Tutorials .............................................................................................................................. 37
A sphere, a 3D tube and a parallelepiped........................................................... 38
Creating an ashtray ........................................................................................................... 50
Creating a bottle .................................................................................................................. 59
Modeling a mouse .............................................................................................................. 68

Rooms common principles

Ch 7 The Rooms, Palettes and Tools............................................................. 77


The Rooms.............................................................................................................................. 77
The Tools palettes .............................................................................................................. 78
• Three Tools palettes and a “Basic toolkit” .............................................................. 78

ii Reference Manual
• Two interfaces ....................................................................................................................79
Using tools ...............................................................................................................................80

Ch 8 The tools options and accessories ...................................................83


The tool options ....................................................................................................................84
• What is a tool option? ......................................................................................................84
• Selecting an option ...........................................................................................................85
Tool accessories ..................................................................................................................85

Ch 9 The graphic environment ...............................................................................87


The orthonormal base ......................................................................................................88
• The origin ..............................................................................................................................88
• The gradations ...................................................................................................................88
• The constraints ...................................................................................................................88
• The coordinates .................................................................................................................89
The working plane...............................................................................................................89
The orthogonal planes .....................................................................................................90

Ch 10 The objects ......................................................................................................................91


The Types of objects .........................................................................................................91
• Curves ....................................................................................................................................91
• Surfaces / Volumes ...........................................................................................................92
Object names .........................................................................................................................92
• Default name .......................................................................................................................92
• Changing the object name ............................................................................................92
Open / closed objects .......................................................................................................94
Entity ............................................................................................................................................94
Displaying the objects.......................................................................................................95
Polygonal or NURBS Models.......................................................................................96
• Change the construction mode ...................................................................................96
• The Polyhedral models ....................................................................................................97
• The NURBS models ..........................................................................................................98
The objects with a grid-structure (Quad mesh) ................................................106
The clones ...............................................................................................................................107

Ch 11 Dynamic Geometry (DG) .................................................................................109


The concept ............................................................................................................................109
The DG Tree ...........................................................................................................................111
• The shapes hierarchy ......................................................................................................111
• The notion of path and current shape ......................................................................112

Amapi ProT M iii


Manipulating DG .................................................................................................................. 115
• The DG palette .................................................................................................................. 115
• Browsing the palette ........................................................................................................ 116
• Selecting the working level ........................................................................................... 116
• Renaming a shape ........................................................................................................... 116
• Showing/Hiding a level ................................................................................................... 117
• Collapsing the DG ............................................................................................................ 118
• Editing a DG level .............................................................................................................. 123
• Deleting the highest DG level ...................................................................................... 125
• Displaying the result in interactive / delayed mode ............................................. 125
• The different levels of completion ............................................................................... 126
• Behavior of the tools regarding the DG ................................................................... 128

Ch 12 The Navigation ............................................................................................................ 135


The Navigation Palette .................................................................................................... 136
• Viewpoint ............................................................................................................................... 137
• View All ................................................................................................................................. 139
• View Detail ........................................................................................................................... 140
• Zoom In / Out ..................................................................................................................... 140
• Pan the scene .................................................................................................................... 141
• Rotate around the scene ............................................................................................... 141
The keyboard navigation ................................................................................................ 142
• Make a direct viewpoint change ................................................................................. 142
• Progressive viewpoint tuning ........................................................................................ 143

Ch 13 Selection............................................................................................................................. 147
The concept of selection ................................................................................................ 147
The selection accessories ............................................................................................. 148
• The selectable entities ..................................................................................................... 149
• The selection methods .................................................................................................... 150
• Default selection mode ................................................................................................... 157
Memo-Select .......................................................................................................................... 158
The selection cursors ....................................................................................................... 159

Ch 14 The Parameters .......................................................................................................... 161


To check the parameters ............................................................................................... 161
Editing the parameters .................................................................................................... 162
• From the graphic workspace ....................................................................................... 162
• In the parameter palette ................................................................................................. 163

iv Reference Manual
Ch 15 The Control panel ....................................................................................................167
Manage the optional palettes display .....................................................................168
Working in the view plane ..............................................................................................169
Scene / orthonormal base toggling ..........................................................................171
• Restore the conventional orthonormal base ...........................................................172
• Toggle the orthonormal base ........................................................................................172
• Toggle the scene and the orthonormal base ..........................................................172
Orthonormal base origin .................................................................................................173
Snapping ...................................................................................................................................174
Alignment Guides ................................................................................................................175
Perspective ..............................................................................................................................176
Simplified display ...............................................................................................................177
Simple-view / Multi-view ..................................................................................................178
Enable/Disable the backface display ......................................................................179
Objects display ......................................................................................................................180
• The display modes ...........................................................................................................180
• Transparency of the selected object .........................................................................181
Polygonal / NURBS ............................................................................................................182
Working with or without Dynamic Geometry ......................................................183
Hide, Show ..............................................................................................................................184
• Hide .........................................................................................................................................184
• Show .......................................................................................................................................184
Isolate .........................................................................................................................................185
Group, Ungroup ....................................................................................................................186
• Group .....................................................................................................................................186
• Ungroup ................................................................................................................................186
Information ...............................................................................................................................187
• Information ...........................................................................................................................187
• Functions ..............................................................................................................................188
• Dynamic Geometry tree...................................................................................................189

Ch 16 The constraints...........................................................................................................191
Snapping ...................................................................................................................................192
• Snapping on ruler gradation .........................................................................................192
• Snapping on particular points ......................................................................................192
Axis toggling ...........................................................................................................................193
Advanced constraints .......................................................................................................194
Alignment guides .................................................................................................................196

Amapi ProT M v
Ch 17 Scene management .............................................................................................. 197
The Layers .............................................................................................................................. 198
• Select the receiving layer .............................................................................................. 199
• Add a layer .......................................................................................................................... 199
• Delete a layer of its contents ....................................................................................... 199
• Merge two layers .............................................................................................................. 199
• Show / Hide a layer .......................................................................................................... 199
• Lock / Unlock a layer ....................................................................................................... 200
• Move one object to another layer .............................................................................. 200
The Scene graph................................................................................................................. 201
• Browse the scene graph ................................................................................................ 201
• Selection using the scene graph ................................................................................ 202
• Operations on the scene graph selection ............................................................... 202
• Change the group, layer or material ......................................................................... 204

Ch 18 The Help .............................................................................................................................. 205


The assistant palette......................................................................................................... 206
The contextual help ........................................................................................................... 207
The tooltips.............................................................................................................................. 208
The cursor................................................................................................................................ 208

Ch 19 The Menus ........................................................................................................................ 209


File ................................................................................................................................................ 210
• Opening/ Closing .............................................................................................................. 210
• Saving files .......................................................................................................................... 211
• Import-Export ...................................................................................................................... 212
• Printing .................................................................................................................................. 212
• Opening recent files ......................................................................................................... 213
• Leaving the program ....................................................................................................... 213
Edit ............................................................................................................................................... 214
• Basic commands .............................................................................................................. 214
• Copy ....................................................................................................................................... 215
• Deletion ................................................................................................................................. 216
• Selection ............................................................................................................................... 216
• The editing windows ........................................................................................................ 216
Scene.......................................................................................................................................... 218
• Graphic display .................................................................................................................. 218
• The objects .......................................................................................................................... 219
• Rulers, working plane ..................................................................................................... 220
• Constraints .......................................................................................................................... 221
• Construction mode ........................................................................................................... 222

vi Reference Manual
Views ...........................................................................................................................................223
Tools ............................................................................................................................................225
• Advanced tools ...................................................................................................................225
• Peripherals ..........................................................................................................................226
Window ......................................................................................................................................227
Rooms ........................................................................................................................................228

Ch 20 Import / Export .............................................................................................................229


Import ..........................................................................................................................................229
Export ..........................................................................................................................................231

Ch 21 3D Digitizing ...................................................................................................................233
MicroScribe .............................................................................................................................233
Calibration ................................................................................................................................234
The tools which allow you to digitize .......................................................................234
AutoPlot Mode and Scaling factor ............................................................................235

Modeling room

Ch 22 Basic toolkit ..................................................................................................................241

Move ............................................................................................................................................242
• The move tool .....................................................................................................................242
• Moving when no tool is selected ..................................................................................243
• Additional information ......................................................................................................243
Rotate .........................................................................................................................................244
• Methods of rotation ...........................................................................................................244
• Rotation axis orientation .................................................................................................245
• Rotation reference point repositioning .....................................................................245
• Global / Local options ......................................................................................................246
• Tuning the gradation accuracy ....................................................................................246
• Magnetizing the rotation circle gradations ..............................................................246
• Additional information ......................................................................................................247
Scale ............................................................................................................................................248
• Center / base reference point........................................................................................249
• Customizing the reference point .................................................................................249
• The constraints ....................................................................................................................250
• Global / Local options ......................................................................................................250

Amapi ProT M vii


• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 251
Stretch ...................................................................................................................................... 252
• The selection ...................................................................................................................... 252
• Movement modes options .............................................................................................. 253
• Stretch NURBS objects .................................................................................................. 254
• Stretch an object having a Deformer control box ................................................ 255
• Control of the depth of a cut ......................................................................................... 255
• Editing the tangents of the NURBS curves ............................................................ 255
• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 256

Ch 23 Construction Palette ............................................................................................ 257


Surface and volume primitives ................................................................................... 258
• Cube ........................................................................................................................................ 260
• Sphere .................................................................................................................................... 263
• Cone ........................................................................................................................................ 266
• Cylinder .................................................................................................................................. 267
• Tetrahedron .......................................................................................................................... 268
• Octahedron .......................................................................................................................... 268
• Icosahedron ........................................................................................................................ 268
• Dodecahedron ..................................................................................................................... 269
• Height-Fields ........................................................................................................................ 272
• Grid .......................................................................................................................................... 273
• Text .......................................................................................................................................... 274
Line drawing ........................................................................................................................... 277
• Rectangle / Square ........................................................................................................... 279
• Circle ....................................................................................................................................... 281
• Arc ............................................................................................................................................ 284
• Polyline ................................................................................................................................... 286
• Interpolated curve .............................................................................................................. 289
• Curve ....................................................................................................................................... 292
• Helix ......................................................................................................................................... 295
• Symmetry .............................................................................................................................. 298
• Reverse curve points ...................................................................................................... 299
Extract Lines .......................................................................................................................... 300
• Creation methods ............................................................................................................. 300
• Generation of NURBS or Polygonal lines .............................................................. 302
• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 303
Extract Facets ....................................................................................................................... 304
• Creation methods ............................................................................................................. 304
• NURBS or Polyhedral facets generation ................................................................ 306
• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 306
Sweep ........................................................................................................................................ 307

viii Reference Manual


• Section and Profile ...........................................................................................................308
• Sweeping with the profile already drawn ................................................................311
• Freehand sweeping ........................................................................................................314
• Progressive scaling of the sections ...........................................................................317
• Close the openings ...........................................................................................................318
• Simplified display ...............................................................................................................318
• Display the graduated axis ............................................................................................318
• Sweep by Block .................................................................................................................318
• Sweeping from an edge of a NURBS surface ......................................................319
• Additional information ......................................................................................................320
Double-Sweep .......................................................................................................................321
• Use ..........................................................................................................................................322
• Base orientation options .................................................................................................322
• Additional information ......................................................................................................323
Ruled Surface ........................................................................................................................324
• Creating “Ruled Surface” ...............................................................................................325
• Tangential connection .....................................................................................................326
• Closing the surface on itself .........................................................................................330
• Curve Inversion ..................................................................................................................330
• Align the first border points ...........................................................................................330
• Additional information ......................................................................................................330
Coons Surface .......................................................................................................................331
• Surface creation .................................................................................................................332
• Tangential connection .....................................................................................................333
• Additional information ......................................................................................................333
Gordon surface .....................................................................................................................334
• Surface creation .................................................................................................................334
• Additional information .......................................................................................................335
Manifold .....................................................................................................................................336

Ch 24 Modeling palette ........................................................................................................339


Smooth .......................................................................................................................................340
• Smoothing options .............................................................................................................341
• Tension control ...................................................................................................................343
• Break control .......................................................................................................................344
• Partial smoothing ...............................................................................................................345
• Making convex surfaces .................................................................................................345
• Additional information ......................................................................................................346
Chamfer .....................................................................................................................................347
• Chamfer a volume ............................................................................................................347
• Chamfer a polygonal line ...............................................................................................348
• Radius Global setting ......................................................................................................348

Amapi ProT M ix
• Radius local setting on polyhedral objects ............................................................. 349
• Range global setting on polyhedral objects ........................................................... 349
• Shape of the chamfer for NURBS edges ............................................................... 350
• Apply to all ........................................................................................................................... 350
• Additional Information ..................................................................................................... 350
Thickness/Offset .................................................................................................................. 351
• “Thickness/Offset” options ............................................................................................ 351
• Changing the position of the thickness .................................................................... 352
• Surface options .................................................................................................................. 353
• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 353
Cut ................................................................................................................................................ 354
• Cutting methods ................................................................................................................. 355
• Additional information....................................................................................................... 363
Delete ......................................................................................................................................... 364
• The current selection is a curve ................................................................................... 365
• The current selection is a surface ............................................................................... 366
• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 366
Tesselate .................................................................................................................................. 367
• Tesselate a polygonal volume or surface ............................................................... 367
• Tesselate a polygonal curve ........................................................................................ 369
• Tesselate a NURBS object ............................................................................................ 370
Deform ....................................................................................................................................... 374
• The options ........................................................................................................................... 375
• The meshed control box editing accessories ....................................................... 376
• Action orientation options .............................................................................................. 377
• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 378
Bend ............................................................................................................................................ 379
• Bending along an existing profile ............................................................................... 379
• Bending along a profile drawn with the tool ........................................................... 379
• Additional information .................................................................................................... 380
Mold ............................................................................................................................................. 382
• Selection to pull ................................................................................................................. 382
• Influence area .................................................................................................................... 383
• Inertia ...................................................................................................................................... 384
• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 384
Bump/Soften .......................................................................................................................... 385
• Bump ....................................................................................................................................... 385
• Soften-Stress “Relax” method ...................................................................................... 385
• Soften-Stress “Mid-mid” method ................................................................................. 385

Ch 25 Assembly palette ..................................................................................................... 387


Duplicate................................................................................................................................... 388

x Reference Manual
• The methods .......................................................................................................................388
• Additional information ......................................................................................................397
Symmetry .................................................................................................................................398
• Symmetry from an orthogonal plane .........................................................................398
• From an orthogonal plane passing by a point to be selected .........................398
• Clone the generated objects ........................................................................................399
• Additional information ......................................................................................................399
Close ...........................................................................................................................................400
• Close a polygonal surface .............................................................................................400
• Edit the polylines closings .............................................................................................400
• Edit the joint and opening of a grid-structure object ...........................................401
• Additional information ....................................................................................................402
Weld .............................................................................................................................................403
• The options .........................................................................................................................403
• Weld objects .........................................................................................................................403
• Weld points onto an object .............................................................................................403
• Weld points close to each other ...................................................................................403
• Weld points of distant objects .......................................................................................404
• Point selection when using weld points ...................................................................404
• Weld NURBS objects ......................................................................................................404
• Additional information ......................................................................................................405
Snap/Align ................................................................................................................................406
• Use ..........................................................................................................................................406
• Align ........................................................................................................................................406
• Some illustrated examples ............................................................................................407
• Additional information ......................................................................................................407
Lay on .........................................................................................................................................408
Unfold ..........................................................................................................................................409
• Select the cutting edges .................................................................................................410
• Select the starting facet ..................................................................................................411
• Unfold .....................................................................................................................................412
• Additional Information .....................................................................................................412
Wrap ............................................................................................................................................413
• Options ..................................................................................................................................413
• Spread management .......................................................................................................414
• The Threshold accessory ..............................................................................................414
• Additional information ......................................................................................................414
Measurements.......................................................................................................................415
• The measurement tools ...................................................................................................416
• The dimensions-manipulating accessories ............................................................418
• Additional information ......................................................................................................419
Decimate ...................................................................................................................................420

Amapi ProT M xi
Rendering Room

Ch 26 Previewing and rendering............................................................................. 425


The rendering commands ............................................................................................. 426
Additional functions ........................................................................................................... 426

Ch 27 Materials............................................................................................................................ 427
Material catalog .................................................................................................................... 428
• Open a directory ................................................................................................................ 429
• Browsing the pages of the catalog ............................................................................ 429
• Deleting a file from the catalog ................................................................................... 429
• Applying a material .......................................................................................................... 430
• Saving a new material in the catalog ....................................................................... 430
• Organizing the catalog ................................................................................................... 430
• Managing the favorites directory ................................................................................ 431
Material editor........................................................................................................................ 432
• The editable material ....................................................................................................... 432
• Editing ..................................................................................................................................... 433

Ch 28 Lighting ................................................................................................................................ 435


The different light sources ............................................................................................. 436
• Sun ......................................................................................................................................... 436
• Bulb ........................................................................................................................................ 436
• Spot ........................................................................................................................................ 436
Create a light source......................................................................................................... 436
Select a light source .......................................................................................................... 437
Set a light source ................................................................................................................ 437
• Diffuse color ........................................................................................................................ 437
• Shadow ................................................................................................................................. 437
• Cut-off .................................................................................................................................... 438
• Attenuation (dimming) .................................................................................................... 438
• Repositioning ...................................................................................................................... 438
• Orientation ........................................................................................................................... 438
Delete a light source ......................................................................................................... 438

Ch 29 Rendering parameters....................................................................................... 439


Anti-aliasing ............................................................................................................................ 439
Shadows ................................................................................................................................... 439
Background............................................................................................................................. 439

xii Reference Manual


Environment ............................................................................................................................440
Fog ................................................................................................................................................440
Image format ..........................................................................................................................440

Catalog room

Ch 30 The Catalog .....................................................................................................................443


Open a directory...................................................................................................................444
Browsing the pages of the catalog ...........................................................................444
Edit the information of a file ..........................................................................................445
Deleting a file from the catalog ...................................................................................445
Deleting the entire scene ................................................................................................445
Importing a file from the catalog into the scene ...............................................446
Saving the scene in the catalog .................................................................................446
Organizing the catalog .....................................................................................................446
Managing the favorites directory ...............................................................................447
Rebuilding the catalog ......................................................................................................448
Import ..........................................................................................................................................448
Export ..........................................................................................................................................448

Preferences

Ch 31 Preferences....................................................................................................................451
Preferences editor...............................................................................................................451
• User interface .......................................................................................................................452
• Graphic environment.........................................................................................................459
• Scene display .......................................................................................................................465
• Printing preferences ..........................................................................................................474
• Import / Export ....................................................................................................................474
• Units ........................................................................................................................................474
• NURBS preferences ..........................................................................................................476
Shortcuts Editor ....................................................................................................................478

Amapi ProT M xiii


Appendix

Ch 32 Glossary.............................................................................................................................. 481

Ch 33 Index ........................................................................................................................................ 489

xiv Reference Manual


Introduction
1
Welcome

Amapi Pro is the creative tool par excellence for the design and realization of models and
3D scenes for Product Design, Architecture and the creation of advanced 3D models. Inte-
grating all the technologies of NURBS surface modeling, complete with an interface entirely
dedicated to creation yet preserving the legendary creativity of the Amapi product,
Amapi Pro is the first software package that offers such a high level of functionality, making
it a complete and unique tool in its category.

Amapi Pro is a complete modeler at the leading edge of current performances, offering
advanced functions such as the construction and editing of NURBS surfaces and volumes
(multiple profiles, constrained volumes, cutting, boolean operators, surface joints, chamfers,
thicknesses, etc.), and a full tools palette for polygonal modeling.

The second variation in the New Generation of the Amapi products, Amapi Pro is based on
the concepts and structures already implemented in Amapi Designer. Its resolutely creative
approach and exceptional ergonomics give it an unequalled short training time and flexibil-
ity of use. The perfect tool for Creative Designers, it is well suited for free-form research and
ideal for the precise execution and the finalization of projects.

All modeling can be realized with NURBS surfaces, the models created with Amapi Pro are
precise and directly manufacturable. Amapi Pro communicates easily with all CAD/CAM
tools, through native imports/exports such as DWG (AutoCAD), IGES and STL.
All other standard interchange formats are also supported: DXF, OBJ, VRML, EPS, etc.
You will be able to communicate directly with other tools for the creation of images and 3D
animations, such as Shade, as well as with all the other high-level rendering and animation
software.

Amapi ProT M 3
Previous Amapi users will reach an unequalled working capacity with Amapi Pro.
What is more, all your models can now be flawlessly exported to dedicated manufacturing
solutions.
If you are new to Amapi Pro, this powerful modeling product will let you discover how to
create exact high-end models while remaining highly intuitive and flexible, in short, a genu-
ine tool for creation.

For all of the above reasons, you can be pleased with your choice and Amapi Pro wishes you
a warm welcome into the world of creative modeling in 3 Dimensions.

Do not forget to register, by filling out and sending the Registration card included with this
manual, or by filling out our on-line registration form at the http://www.e-frontier.com/go/
support/registration ‘Registration’ section.

Lastly, do not hesitate to contact us for any suggestions you may have or to forward us
images of your achievements!

4 Reference Manual
2
How to use the Reference Manual?

It will not take you more than a few hours of training to become acquainted with the philos-
ophy of this new software and only a few days for you to become a proficient user.

Initially, it is recommended to consult the first chapters of the manual for a quick and effi-
cient start. You will find:

• The chapter #3 gives you detailed information to install and start the program (see
details on page 7).

• In chapter #4, an Amapi Pro quicktour is designed for a better understanding of the
spirit and the power of the software (see details on page 13).

• The chapter #5 presents a table summarizing the different modeling tools (see details
on page 31).

• The chapter #6 offers several exercises designed for progressive learning (see details on
page 37).

Once used to the program, you will be able to create your own models.

The following chapters will give you full details about each program function. The sequen-
tial reading of this manual will appear superfluous if the suggested training has been
respected. Indeed, you will already know what you can do with Amapi Designer and will
only have to refer to the reference manual corresponding to what you are trying to do.

Amapi ProT M 5
Each note is symbolized by a pictograph which allows you to quickly understand the kind of
information.

Additional information

Tips and tricks

Warning note

Restrictions

Note

Reminder

This documentation refers to the PC keyboard only.


Macintosh users need to replace each instance of “Control” (Ctrl) with “Command”.

6 Reference Manual
3
Installation

3.1 PC
Amapi Pro works on any PC-compatible computer with at least the following configuration:

3.1.1 Minimum system requirements


• Pentium III or Celeron 500 MHz or latest computer with a minimum of 128 MB RAM.
• Microsoft Windows 98, ME, 2000 or XP.
• 65 MB hard drive space.
• 3D Graphics Accelerator card supporting OpenGL.
• CD-ROM drive.

3.1.2 Recommended system requirements


• Pentium III 1 GHz or latest computer with a minimum of 256 MB RAM (more
recommended).
• Microsoft Windows XP.
• 65 MB hard drive space.
• 3D Graphics Accelerator card supporting OpenGL.
• CD-ROM drive.

Amapi ProT M 7
3.1.3 Installation
When inserting the Amapi Pro CD-ROM into any PC running Windows, an Autorun
window automatically appears. You can choose to install your Amapi Pro software or to
explore the other files on the CD-ROM.
Alternatively, you can install Amapi Pro without using Autorun. Choose Start menu >
Control Panels. Then double-click Add/Remove Programs from the Control Panel and
follow the instructions.
To install Amapi Pro:
1) Start Windows.
2) No other application should be running during installation.
3) Insert the Amapi Pro CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive and click the Install button.
Windows locates the Amapi Pro installation program on the CD-ROM
4) Follow the instructions on the screen. Click Next to confirm each option and to move to
the next screen.
You have the option to run a Typical, Compact, or Custom installation. Typical will
install your software in a standard configuration appropriate for most users. Compact
installs a minimum configuration.
Choose Custom if you want to select individual files for installation.
The installer proposes an installation directory and Program Folder.
5) Once you’ve made these selections you’ll be able to confirm your installation settings.
Then click Start to install.
6) Once Amapi Pro has finished installing, click Finish.
Follow the instructions on screen for electronic registration.

8 Reference Manual
3.2 Macintosh
Amapi Pro works on any Power Macintosh with at least the following configuration.

3.2.1 Minimum system requirements


• G3 or G4 400 MHz or compatible model running system X.
Microscribe support does not allow the use of the program with OS 9.2.
• 128 Mb of Physical RAM.
• 65 MB hard drive space.
• 3D Graphics Accelerator card supporting OpenGL.
• CD-ROM drive.
• To use your Amapi Pro software with Type, you must have TrueType™ fonts.

3.2.2 Recommended system requirements


• G4 1-GHz or compatible model running system X.
• 256 Mb (or more) of Physical RAM.
• 65 MB hard drive space.
• 3D Graphics Accelerator card supporting OpenGL.
• CD-ROM drive.
• To use Amapi Pro with Type, you must have TrueType™ fonts.

3.2.3 Installation
1) Turn off any virus protection and compression programs and close any other applications
currently open.
2) Insert the Amapi Pro CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
3) Double-click the Installer icon from the CD-ROM and follow the instructions on the
screen. The installer gives you the option of performing an Easy or Custom installation.
Easy Install will install your software in a standard configuration appropriate for most
users. Choose Custom if you want to select individual files for installation.
4) Choose the Install Location for the Amapi Pro folder and click Install.
5) Once Amapi Pro has finished installing, click Quit to quit the Installer.
6) Follow the instructions on the screen for electronic registration.
This documentation refers to the PC keyboard only.
Macintosh users must read “Command” each time “Control” (Ctrl) is called upon.

Amapi ProT M 9
10 Reference Manual
Getting started
4
Quick Tour

4.1 Ergonomics
Amapi Pro is a 3D NURBS and POLYHEDRAL modeling package. This tool allows you to
draw, build, and assemble scenes in 3 dimensions.
The ergonomics of Amapi Designer have been designed and tuned to give you the best
comfort and productivity while working on your projects.
The understanding of volumes in space, the manipulation of 3D graphic objects, the tools
options and accessory accessibility have been designed to reduce as much as possible the
number of manipulations and to maintain the consistency of the application.
You, undoubtedly, are accustomed to using many applications other than Amapi Pro and
you acquire specific ways of using these applications: window positions, keyboard
shortcuts, and user interface colors.
To allow you to integrate Amapi Pro into your working environment without having to
change your practices, we offer you an completely configurable environment.
You can easily choose the position of the palettes, the color of each element, the function of
a key, all the way through the application’s operating mode. But, if you so desire, you can
also use Amapi Pro in the traditional Amapi mode - the one that has created the product’s
reputation since its very first version.: an immersive framework where the tools palettes
change by means of sweeping the cursor out of edge of the principal window and back.
The configurations of the interfaces are accessible in the Amapi Pro preferences. You can
also use interface themes presets such as the "Pro" theme selected with first startup or the
"With color gradient" theme which is Amapi Designer’s default theme or the "Immersive"
theme which again uses specifics from the previous versions of Amapi.
These themes represent sets of preset preferences. You can easily modify the adjustments by
changing your desired preferences.

Amapi ProT M 13
(See “Preferences editor” on page 451).

The Pro theme proposes an


interface in which all the
tools are visible in fixed
palettes located on the right
hand side of the screen
(“tool box” interface). The
palettes on the left hand side
can be hidden or moved.
The colors were studied to
cohabit as well as possible
with other applications.

Pro interface theme

The Classic theme places


the 3D window in the center
of a fixed frame, with the
graphic accesses to the
functions and the working
tools. This theme is closer
to interfaces that you will
find in other creative
graphic software. This inter-
face remains of the “tool
box” type.

Classic interface theme

14 Reference Manual
The Gradient theme is
similar to the Classic theme
but displays the icons on a
color gradient background.

Gradient interface theme

The Immersive theme


gives a maximum of space
to the working window. The
background is black by
default, but you will be
able, at any moment to
change its color. All the pal-
ettes are floating.
The interface remains of the
“tool box” type.

Immersive interface theme

Amapi ProT M 15
The Classic with tools pal-
ettes theme is the theme
which is closest to the well-
known and appreciated-by
former-users interface.
Like the “Immersive”
theme, this theme gives a
maximum of space to the
working window but dis-
plays only one tools palette
at once (“tool box” inter-
face). Switching from one
palette to another is done by
“sweeping” the cursor out
to the right hand side of the
window and back.
(See “Two interfaces” on Classic with tools palettes interface theme
page 79).

The various possible presentations for the tools and accessories make it possible to adapt
the use of Amapi Pro to your practices.
For example, Amapi Pro proposes two possible interfaces to display the tools of the
modeling room :
With the “tool box” type interface, you will easily find the tool that you need in one of the
four tools palettes but you will need make sure to click on the correct icon because of their
small size.
With the “tools palette” type interface, the tool icons are larger and only one of the three
palettes is displayed (the fourth, corresponding to the basic toolkit, is always visible). You
will pick up tools without losing sight of your 3D models. This mode is particularly
appropriate to users working with matter as a sculptor would.
You will quickly be able to customize your own working environment by moving or closing
the different panels.

For instance, the help windows or the viewing tools are generally used only during the
learning steps. When beginning, you will make the Viewing manipulations by using the
navigation palette. Then, you will prefer to use shortcuts (the keyboard arrow keys and
number pad keys).

16 Reference Manual
The keyboard is an essential component that gives direct access to the most commonly used
functions. It helps to save time and allows you to work more efficiently.
Amapi Pro uses (as much as possible) the most accessible keys: “Space bar”, “Escape”,
“Enter”, “+/-”, arrow keys, numerical pad, “Shift”, “Control”, “Alt”. Keyboard shortcuts can
be set for most tools to accelerate their launching when they are often used. You are
probably already familiar with other software products that have standard shortcuts on
common features like Cut, Paste, Undo and Open. Amapi Pro is set up by default to accept
these standard shortcuts.

Finally, you are also able to


work in single view or in
multi-view mode.

Immersive theme with 4 views

Amapi ProT M 17
4.2 Screen Layout
Access to
Menu bar Assistant palette Rooms

Options and Tool


Optional Current tool icon accessories
palettes Graphic workspace

Tools palettes
Control panel

One view interface, default theme

We have seen that Amapi Pro proposes several different interface themes corresponding to
different user profiles. Testing and adopting one of them will save you invaluable time
through using the interface the most suited to your work.
It will always be possible to manually modify all the preferences by means of the
preferences editor.
The 3D graphic workspace appears in a large window. It can be split into two, three or four
views of the same scene. The different panels are located around this area.
The control panel is located under this graphic workspace. It contains some generic tools
and accessories that can be useful during the modeling steps. (see details on page 167). The
control panel can be hidden to have a larger workspace area.

18 Reference Manual
The tools palette window appears on the right-hand side of the screen. There are two
possible interfaces (See “The Tools palettes” on page 78).
On the left-hand side of the screen, a set of optional panels are displayed. There, you can
find the help panel, the viewing panel, Dynamic Geometry panel, the parameter panel and
the selection panel. A set of small icons located in the left-hand side of the control panel
allow you to show or hide these panels.
If you have selected the Pro or immersive Interface theme, these panels are floating panels.
They are displayed on top of the graphic workspace. If you have selected the Classic theme,
these panels are located in a window on the left-hand side of the graphic workspace. You
can choose to hide this window from the preference dialog in order to increase the size of the
graphic workspace (See “Preferences editor” on page 451).
When launching the application, the area located just above the graphic workspace. is
empty. When a tool is being used, this area will contain the current tool options (on the
right) and the current tool accessories (on the left) (see details on page 83).
The user can, on request, choose to display these options with a floating, mobile and
removable palette (See “Preferences editor” on page 451).
The Room icons are located at the top right-hand corner of the screen.
As in many other applications, the menu bar is located on the top left-hand side of the
screen.

4.3 Rooms
Amapi Pro splits the features into three rooms. This splitting helps to
reduce the number of tool icons displayed and to organize your
working process.
Click on the room icon to enter the room:
The Modeling room allows you to build, model, and assemble your objects (See
“Modeling room” on page 237).
The Rendering room contains the tools to set up your materials and to render objects
(See “Rendering Room” on page 421).
The Catalog room is useful to organize your files and save objects (See “The
Catalog” on page 443).
All rooms are built to the same layout but some areas are not displayed in all rooms. For
instance, some rooms have several tools palettes, but others have no tools palette at all.

Amapi ProT M 19
4.4 3D window, views and navigation
The graphic workspace displays the current scene. A scene is made up of objects created in
the same working space. Inside each view, the ground is symbolized by a grid. A small
trihedron displays the current orientation. The grid and the trihedron are useful for
localizing the objects in the 3D space. However, they can be turned off (See “The graphic
environment” on page 87).

Two additional grids can be added to


visualize the main planes of the 3D
space. On each plane, you can display
an image that can be used as a support
for modeling.

The 3D space dimensions are set in


the preferences. The dimension, scale
factor and units can be selected there.

Building an object from an image projected onto the grid


planes.

The 3D window can contain up to four views of the same scene. A control panel icon allows
you to select one of the view layouts. When in multi-view mode, a view is activated by
clicking on it. Every action takes place in the active view.

Single view 3 views 4 views

20 Reference Manual
The navigation palette contains several icons allowing
you to manipulate the active view. Some predefined views
lock the navigation in the active view, allowing you to
stay in the left view for instance. (See “The Navigation”
on page 135)

Amapi Pro displays the objects in perspective projection by default. This type of projection
simulates human sight. It is possible to switch to orthographic projection by clicking on
one of the control panel icon. This type of projection does not deform objects far from the
point of view. (See “Perspective” on page 176).

Even in perspective mode, the screen of your . : Zoom out


computer does not give you the stereoscopic 0: View All
1: View Detail
view our eyes give us. Thus it is more difficult 2: Front view
to understand the object shape on the screen 3: Zoom in
4: Left view
than in the real life. To limit this drawback, it 5: Top view
is very important to be able to «move» around 6: Right view
7: Viewpoint customizing
the objects at any time, even during the 8: Rear view
creation steps or while holding a mouse 9: Bottom view
button for stretching a point on a surface. Use the right, left, up, and down
arrow keys to turn around the
To do that, Amapi Pro uses the keyboard scene.
arrow keys to move around the point of view
and the number pad keys to zoom in/out, etc.
To have a panoramic
without stopping the action in progress. view of the scene,
press and hold the
For a better understanding of the object Control key and press
shapes, moving from one singular viewpoint on an arrow key.
to another is made in animation mode. This
improves the feeling of moving smoothly
while viewing the object.
If the “shift” key is held
Amapi Pro allows you to record up to ten down when using the
arrow keys, the
custom viewpoints. You can then choose to viewpoint will be
look at the scene from these viewpoints. (See successively switched
to each main viewpoint,
“The Navigation” on page 135) in the direction
indicated by the arrow.

Amapi ProT M 21
4.5 Objects and 3D entities
Amapi Pro is a 3D NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) and polygonal modeler. This
implies that according to the mode you working in or according to the tool you use, you will
handle NURBS types or polyhedral entities. By default, Amapi Pro works in NURBS mode,
the mode best adapted to object design.
While modeling in polyhedral mode or when importing 3D object files, you will manipulate
basic entities that do not exist in real objects: the points, edges, lines, and facets. Amapi Pro
is a surface modeler. Every object is made up of a set of facets. This set can be opened or
closed. Each facet defines a planar surface delimited by a set of edges, each edge having one
3D point at each end.

Object Facets Edges Points

Creating objects consists of creating points, lines and facets in the 3D space to define the
outlines of the final polyhedron.
It is also possible to create parametric surfaces called NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-
Spline) and to assemble them to obtain exact surfaces useful for advanced design projects.
NURBS are displayed as lines or surfaces, however their editable construction points are not
located on the surface but are a kind of magnet that attract the resulting surface.

Simple curve Simple Surface

22 Reference Manual
NURBS curve NURBS Surface
and its control shape and its control shape

Displaying 3D objects consists of selecting the combination of point, edge and facet entities
to be visualized as well as the specific parameters allowing to obtain a more or less realistic
visual effect.
The object display mode can be changed at any time The «Wireframe» mode
from the control panel. The wireframe mode allows
The «Lit Wireframe» mode
perfect manipulation of edges and points. The solid
The «Flat Solid» mode
facetted mode gives a more realistic aspect. Edges can
be added to this mode. Finally, the smoothed mode is The «WireShade Flat Solid» mode

the mode that gives the most realistic effect. Switching The «Smooth Solid» mode
from one mode to another allows the user to model in The «WireShade Smooth Solid» mode
wireframe mode and then to select the solid mode to
see the final result.
NURBS lines and surfaces are not displayed the same
way as polyhedral lines and surfaces. The points on NURBS lines are not displayed and the
edges on surfaces are limited to singular edges.
(See “The objects” on page 91).

Amapi ProT M 23
4.6 Selections
Amapi Pro allows you to precisely select the entities
you want to work on. The current selection mode lets
you work on points, edges, facets or objects. A set of
selection tools are available to make the selection
process easier. You can select entities one by one or
you can use the lasso or selection rectangle tool. You
can select according to an angular criteria and extend
the selection to neighboring entities. The current
selection can be saved to be used again later. The Shift
and Alt keys are used to add and suppress entities to/from the current selection. When
entities are selected, most tools restrict their action to that selection. You will then be able to
manipulate sub-selections of objects with tools like “Rotate” or “Stretch”.
It is also possible to change the current selection from within a tool without leaving that tool.
(see details on page 147).

4.7 Working plane and ruler


During most of the actions in the 3D space, you will see a plane made up of two ruler axis
taken from the trihedron axis: X (red), Y (green) and Z (blue). Each plane represents one of
the three orthogonal planes.
These planes are used to simplify the 3D input operations. To enter 3D points, you usually
have a 2D device: the mouse. As setting three values with this type of device is impossible,
it is better to limit the input to predefined planes. By default, modeling is made in one of
these planes. (See “The graphic environment” on page 87).
Amapi Pro selects the orthogonal plane which is the most perpendicular to the current point
of view to be used as working plane.

24 Reference Manual
While using a tool, you will be able y working plane
to change the working plane by
turning around your model.
It is sometimes necessary to model in
a plane that is different from the
orthogonal planes. The control panel
contains an icon allowing to select a
new working plane. (See “Scene /
orthonormal base toggling” on
x
page 171). z
Finally, it may be useful to model in
the projection plane of the current working plane y
view. Although this method is less
accurate, it gives much versatility to
some complex positioning operations.
(See “Working in the view plane” on
page 169).
The origin of the rulers can be set
z
using a control panel tool. (See
“Orthonormal base origin” on
page 173). x
The ruler axis displayed in the
working plane allows you to
accurately align points and to set simple constraints. The ruler accuracy can be tuned using
the +/- keys. It is also possible to control the snap to the ruler grid from the control panel.
Finally the space bar allows you to constrain the mouse movements along the currently
displayed axis.

Amapi ProT M 25
4.8 Using tools
Tools are operators allowing you create, manipulate, assemble, objects but also to manage
views, import files,...etc. Although they are very different, they are all built to the same
common architecture. A tool is made up of a sequence of operations called steps.
Each step requires setting up one or several parameters (3D position, angle,...) in the
parameter palette or directly in the 3D window.
A set of current options and accessories can be viewed in a panel located just under the
menu bar. An option is, for example, the construction method for a sphere (From the base or
from the center). An accessory lets you perform a particular operation in the current tool
such as changing the rotation point of an object when using rotate tool. At each step, a help
message is displayed in the help window.

Current tool icon Tool options

Tool accessory

Selection
accessory
palette

Navigation
palette

Help
palette

Parameters
palette

Graphic workspace

Useful elements when manipulating a tool

26 Reference Manual
The tool operation stops at the end of the last step or/and when the user clicks on the
assistant palette validation icon or/and presses the Enter key. The selection of another tool
will validate the current tool before initializing the new tool. It is always possible to stop a
tool execution by pressing on the cancel button in the assistant palette or by pressing the
Escape key.
Some accessories are in fact real tools. They contain several steps and achieve complex
operations but when they have completed, they restore the parent tool to the state it was
before launching the accessory. For instance, to punch a hole in a surface, one can use the
Cut tool and create a circle from within the Cut tool as an accessory. Once the circle is
created, the Cut tool automatically starts the cut action.
(See “Using tools” on page 80)

4.9 Scene management


Amapi Pro has several scene management tools.
The Layers allow you to group a set of objects by family, to lock them so that they cannot
be changed or to hide them completely. A layer is a very appropriate way to manage large
lists of objects.
The hide and show tools allow you to make objects visible or invisible.
(See “The Layers” on page 198)
The scene tree view represents the current scene as a tree. Objects can be selected in the tree
and moved into layers. A contextual menu makes it possible to carry out all possible basic
operations on objects such as hiding, showing, blocking, renaming or grouping...
The object information panel displays the object characteristics: type, name, number of
points, size... but can also perform cleaning operations such as suppressing coplanar faces or
removing overlapping points.
(See “The Scene graph” on page 202)
The Catalog, is a native file manager allowing you to preview objects as thumbnails. It can
also read, write, delete or rename files. Folders of favorites can be created. The catalog is a
room than can be accessible from the room icons located at the top right-hand side of the
screen.
(See “The Catalog” on page 443)

Amapi ProT M 27
4.10 Dynamic Geometry (DG)
Dynamic geometry is a concept that allows Amapi Pro to memorize the construction steps of
objects.
For instance, a curve extruded along a profile will create an object made up of two curves
and will have the extruded surface as the resulting shape.
Such objects can be edited afterwards. Manipulating their entities (points, edges or facets)
means manipulating the basic shapes they contain (called the control shapes). The resulting
shapes are automatically updated.

Stretched
Profile Point

Section

Step #1: Step #2: Step #3: Step #4:


Draw two construction Extrude the section Smooth the object. If the result is not satisfying,
curves. along the profile. Amapi Pro keeps the modify the shape of the profile
Amapi Pro keeps the extruded object. curve. This modification
construction curves. automatically and interactively
updates the extrusion and the
smoothing.

This concept allows a quick modification of the basic shapes without having to repeat the
intermediate construction steps. One will be able to create several versions of a same object
by modifying a single construction point.
The Dynamic Geometry palette helps to manage
Dynamic Geometry, to select and to suppress levels. 3. Smoothing 1
Its simplified presentation gives you a quick 2. Sweep 1
preview of the current selection as an object list.
1. Polyline 2
Most tools handle the dynamic geometry. However,
when using a tool that converts a model to
polygons, the dynamic geometry is not able to retain
the construction history of the model.
A global switch located in the control panel let you turn off dynamic geometry completely.
Work without dynamic geometry
Work with dynamic geometry
(see details on page 135)

28 Reference Manual
4.11 Entering values
At each step of object construction, it is important to be able
to enter exact values. Amapi Pro allows you to edit
numerical values by clicking on the parameter palette or by
hitting the Tab key.
(see details on page 161) Parameter palette

4.12 Modeling room tools palette


The modeling room contains three tools palettes and a “Basic toolkit”.
Amapi Pro gives you the choice between two tools palette representations (See “Toolbox”
on page 456).
The “Tool box” interface displays the four palettes in one.
The “Tools palette” interface displays the “Basic toolkit” and only one tools palette. To
toggle from one palette to another, just hit the right-hand side of the graphic workspace with
the mouse cursor.

The basic toolkit The construction The modeling The assembly


palette palette palette
This palette This palette This palette This palette
is always contains contains contains
visible. It basic line modification tools to carry
contains the and surface tools that can out complex
“Move”, drawing edit existing assemblies
“Rotate”, tools as well objects. and a few
“Scale” and as advanced generic tools
“Stretch” surface
tools. creation
tools.

Amapi ProT M 29
30 Reference Manual
5
Modeling tools description

In the modeling room, Amapi Pro displays only the tools likely to be necessary to
each step of modeling.

That is why they are divided in palettes:

• The “Basic toolkit”” (see details on page 32)

• The “Construction palette” (see details on page 33)

• The “Modeling palette” (see details on page 34)

• The “Assembly Palette” (see details on page 35)

Each tool is described in the following paragraphs. For detailed information, see the
Reference Manual.

Amapi ProT M 31
5.1 Toolkit
Above each main tools palette, a “Toolkit” is displayed. It contains tools which are always
available even while using a tool from the main palettes.

Icon Tool name Description See

“Move” Use this tool to change the position of the current object. page 242

“Rotate” Use this tool to rotate the current object. page 244

This tool changes the size of the current object, either


“Scale” keeping its original proportions, or distorting it vertically or page 248
horizontally.

The “Stretch” tool is used to move the current selection


“Stretch” (facets, edges and/or points). The selected objects will be page 252
deformed according to the cursor movement.

(See “Basic toolkit” on page 241)

32 Reference Manual
5.2 Construction palette
This tools palette contains the tools used to draw the shapes that will be the basis for your
models.

Icon Tool name Description See

This tool displays a sub-tools palette to quickly draw numerous 3D


“Surface and volume shapes.
page 258
primitives”

This tool displays a sub-tools palette to quickly draw numerous 2D or 3D


lines.
“Line drawing” page 277

This tool creates curve(s) from points selected on the current object or
“Extract Lines” existing objects of the scene.
page 300

“Extract Facets” This tool creates an object made up of several facets. page 304

The basic use of this tool is to create sweeped shapes from curves.
“Sweep” However, it can also extrude facets, edges or points
page 307

“Double-Sweep” This tool creates a surface from a section and two profiles. page 321

This tool lets you create a “skin” tightened between two or more 2D or
“Ruled Surface” 3D curves.
page 324

This tool generates a surface from connected curves drawing a closed


“Coons Surface” perimeter.
page 331

This tool creates a surface using a network of 3D curves. The surface is


“Gordon surface” generated along the longitudinal and latitudinal curves
page 334

This tool creates a volume from NURBS surfaces which will define the
“Manifold” future volume
page 336

(See “Construction Palette” on page 257)

Amapi ProT M 33
5.3 Modeling palette
This tools palette contains the tools used to model the objects.

Icon Tool name Description See

This tool is used to control the number of facets defining a surface and the
“Smooth” number of points defining a curve and to give them a smoother aspect.
page 340

This tool allows you to create internal or external bevels, depending on


“Chamfer” the orientation of the model edges
page 347

This tool offers two different options:


“Thickness/Offset” - Creates a clone object parallel to the current object. page 351
- Gives a thickness to a curve, a surface or a volume

“Cut” Proposes several methods to cut one or several objects at the same time. page 354

This tool allows you to delete one or several elements (facet, edge or
“Delete” point) from the selected objects.
page 364

This tool subdivides the segments of a curve or the facets of a surface or a


“Tesselate” volume.
page 367

This tool lets you apply several kinds of deformations to the current
“Deform” selection proposed as options.
page 374

“Bend” This tool deforms the selection along a profile curve. page 379

This tool allows you to pull on the current selection so that to the points
“Mold” located in the influence area are moved with an inertia effect.
page 382

“Bump/Soften” This tool allows you to work on the surface bump of the current selection. page 385

(See “Modeling palette” on page 339)

34 Reference Manual
5.4 Assembly Palette
This tools palette contains the tools used to place and orient objects:

Icon Tool name Description See

Allows you to create one or several copies of the current selection.


“Duplicate” Amapi Pro proposes several methods of duplication.
page 388

“Symmetry” Creates a mirror image of the current selection. page 398

“Close” Lets you close the current selection, such as a curve or an opened surface. page 400

This tool proposes several options to weld objects or points. If these


“Weld” options generate overlapping points, Amapi Pro keeps only one of them page 403
(other points are deleted).

This tool is used to apply a translation to the current selection along a


“Snap/Align” vector, the ends of which are defined by the user.
page 406

Use this tool to lay a facet of the selected object onto a facet of another
“Lay on” object (center on center). page 408

“Unfold” Use this tool to create a 2D flat unfolded version of a 3D model. page 409

Allows you the deformation of an object by mapping it onto a surface


“Wrap” (grid, cylinder or sphere).
page 413

Displays the dimensions of an object. Amapi Pro allows you to display


“Measurements” three types of dimensions: length, angle and volume/surface/ page 415
circumference.

“Decimate” Allows a reduction in the complexity of an object. page 420

(See “Assembly palette” on page 387)

Amapi ProT M 35
36 Reference Manual
6
Tutorials

These tutorials have been designed to quickly introduce the user to most of the navigation
and manipulation principles that apply to Amapi Pro. It is advised to do these exercises in
their chronological order.

Once familiar with the software, the user will be able to create his own models and will only
occasionally need to refer to the Reference Manual. This chapter explains in detail how each
tool operates.

Of course, these exercises represent only some of the main functions of Amapi. You will
find detailed illustrations of modeling techniques and case studies on the www.e-
frontier.com web site.

Amapi ProT M 37
6.1 A sphere, a 3D
tube and a
parallelepiped
Here you are, comfortably seated in front of the
screen. You are going to begin by familiarizing
yourself with the program interface. Let’s start by
building a sphere, a 3D tube and a parallelepiped.
These shapes will be often used as the basis for
future creations.
At the end of this exercise, you will know how to:
• Select a display mode,
• Change the construction mode (Polyhedral or
NURBS),
• Navigate in the scene,
• Change the working plane,
• Toggle from one Room to another,
• Change palettes,
• Pick up and release a tool,
• Edit a parameter in the graphic workspace and
in the parameter palette,
• Control the precision of an action,
• Apply a constraint to the cursor movement,
• Use the “Sphere”, “Cube”, “Polyline” and
“Thickness/Offset” tools.

The graphic workspace


Entering the program:
The software is now launched. The organization
of the screen has been explained in the “Quick
Tour” chapter (see details on page 13).
The graphic workspace is still empty. Only a grid
showing the ground is displayed.

38 Reference Manual
Building a sphere
Select the room:
In order to reduce the number of tools visible at
Modeling Rendering File Manager Room
the same time on the screen, Amapi Pro splits the Room Room (The Catalog)
main functions into three groups called “Rooms”.
These are represented by a group of icons at the
top right of the screen. To toggle from one to the
other, click on the icon showing the desired room.
As a general rule, you will usually start working
in the modeling room. To start this exercise,
“Basic toolkit”
make sure you are in the modeling room .

Select the palette:


The modeling tools are divided in palettes; “Construction
Palette”
• “Basic toolkit”

• “Construction Palette”,

• “Modeling palette”,
“Modeling
palette”
• “Assembly palette”

They are displayed on the right side of the screen.


You will chose the tools from one of these
palettes.
“Assembly
palette”
Select the Polyhedral or NURBS construction
mode:
Amapi Pro works indifferently in polyhedral
mode or in NURBS mode. An icon of the control
panel displays the current mode. The NURBS
mode is the default mode.
We will start this exercise by using the polyhedral
mode. We will use the NURBS mode in the next Control panel extract
step.
Click on the icon (in the control panel) to
work in polyhedral construction mode .

Amapi ProT M 39
Select the “Surface and volume primitives” in
the “Construction Palette” :
Click on the icon showing the “Surface and
volume primitives” tool in the “Construction
Palette” .

“Construction
Palette”
Select the “Sphere” tool in the “Surface and
volume primitives” palette:
The primitives construction palette is displayed; “Surface and volume primitives”
click on the “Sphere” tool . palette

Select the construction method:


Amapi Pro proposes two “Sphere”. construction
methods.
Click on the icon corresponding to the desired
“From the center” option or press both the “Sphere” sub-tool
options
“Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one
option to the other.

The gradated axis:


The gradated axis X (red) and Y (green) of the
orthonormal base are displayed. To increase or
decrease the gradation steps, click on the Assistant Palette

icons of the assistant palette (help palette for


beginners). This palette appears centered at the
top of the graphic workspace. Most users usually
prefer using the keyboard shortcuts: instead of
clicking on the icons, use the “+/-” keys.

Setting the sphere’s center:


1) Move the cursor in the graphic workspace.
The cursor position is interactively displayed
in the parameter palette at the bottom left
hand side of the screen. Parameter palette

40 Reference Manual
2) Click on the icon located in the control
panel at the bottom of the screen. This will set
the cursor free from snapping to the grid
gradations.
Control panel extract
3) Move the cursor again, the parameter palette
Free cursor movement.
displays the cursor position with an accuracy
of 1/1000. Cursor snapped to grid

4) Click as soon as the position is suitable.

Setting the radius:


Move the cursor again. This time, the parameter
palette displays the value of the sphere radius
while it is being constructed.
Click as soon as the value is suitable.

Determine the number of points defining the


sphere:
This (optional) step consists of modifying the
number of sections defining the sphere. The
Tuner indicates that a quick modification is
possible by clicking on the icons or
pressing on the “+/-” keys.
# of Points =7 # of Points=8 # of Points=9
Validate the operation:
The beginner will validate the sphere creation by
clicking on the validation icon of the assistant
palette (help palette for beginners).
The user will probably quickly prefer to press the
“Enter” key or to use an efficient feature of
Amapi Pro interface: the tool will be released by
sweeping (moving) the cursor out the right side of
the screen. The user will be able to continue his
work with another tool in the “Surface and
volume primitives” palette.

Amapi ProT M 41
Release the “Surface and volume primitives”
tool:
The tool will be released by moving the cursor
out the right side of the screen. Work can then be
continued with another selection and/or another
tool.

The display mode


When modeling, different entities can be handled,
including points, edges, facets or objects.
Amapi Pro has several display modes for the
objects in a scene in order highlight more or less
these entities.
Depending on the kind of manipulation to be Control panel extract
done, a specific display mode will be more
appropriate to identify the entities you are
working on. It is possible to change the display
mode at any time. The “Wireframe” mode

The control panel (at the bottom of the screen) The “Lit Wireframe” mode
displays the icon showing the current display The “Flat Solid” mode
mode. Click on it to display the entire list of the The “WireShade Flat Solid” mode
proposed modes, then click on the suitable one.
The “Smooth Solid” mode
Try all of them, then choose the “WireShade Flat
The “WireShade Smooth Solid” mode
Solid” mode .

Navigation
The navigation palette:
Amapi Pro allows you to work on a model from
any viewpoint. The user will appreciate how easy
it is to move around, towards or away from a
viewpoint.

Amapi Pro proposes several kinds of interfaces to


access the navigational functions: Navigation palette
• “The Navigation Palette”
• “The keyboard or the mouse-keyboard
navigation (the quickest)”

42 Reference Manual
For your first creations, it is probably better to
use the navigation palette icons.
To continue this exercise, use the keyboard
shortcuts in order to see just how efficient they
are.

The main viewpoints


Press the “0” key to see the entire scene. . : Zoom out
0: View All
Press the “5” key to view the scene from the top. 1: View Detail
Press the “4” key to view the scene from the left 2: Front view
3: Zoom in
side. 4: Left view
5: Top view
6: Right view
Zoom In / Out: 7: Viewpoint customizing
8: Rear view
Press the “.” key to zoom out of the scene, then 9: Bottom view
on the “3” key to zoom in.

Rotate around the scene:


Use the right, left, up, and down arrow keys to Use the right, left, up, and down
arrow keys to move around the
move around the scene. scene.

Pan the scene:


To have a panoramic
To have a panoramic view of the scene, press and view of the scene,
hold the Control key and press on an arrow key. press and hold the
Control key and press
on an arrow key.
View a detail of the scene:
1) Click on the “View detail” icon (or press
the “1” key).
2) Move the cursor to the center of the area of
interest, then click.
3) Move the cursor and click as soon as the area
of interest is surrounded.
Note: If the mouse has a wheel, you can use this
wheel to zoom in/out of the scene.

Front view all:


Press the “2” key, then on the “0” key to see the
entire scene from the front view.

Amapi ProT M 43
Drawing a 3D tube
With Amapi Pro, the construction of a tube is
done in two steps. We will first create the profile
of the tube and then add a thickness to it.
In this exercise, we will use the NURBS
construction mode. It allows you to draw exact
parametric surfaces ideal for exchanging data
with CAO/CFOAO software.

Select the NURBS construction mode:


Click on the icon in the control panel to go
into the NURBS construction mode .
Control panel extract
Positioning in the scene:
Zoom out (“.” key) and move the view toward the
right side of the screen (“Ctrl”+ “right arrow”
keys) so that the sphere is on the left side of the
screen, and the right side is free to draw the
profile of the tube.

Select the “Line drawing” tool in the


“Construction Palette”:
Click on the “Line drawing” tool icon in the
“Construction Palette”.

Construction
palette
Select the “Curve” sub-tool in the “Line
drawing” palette:
A construction primitives sub-tools palette is
displayed, click on the “Curve” . sub-tool. “Line drawing”
palette
This tool will be used to create the tube profile.

44 Reference Manual
Begin drawing the first segment of the profile:
1) Move the cursor; its position is interactively
displayed in the parameter palette.
2) Click when the position is suitable.
3) Move the cursor to draw the curve’s first
segment.

Changing the working plane when drawing:


Because the mouse movement is restricted to a
single plane, working in three dimensions will be
easier if changing the working plane is fast and
intuitive. For this reason, Amapi Pro uses the
concept of a “Working plane” which evolves
according to the active plane you are working in.
To fully make use of the all the capabilities of
your software, it is fundamental to understand
how this works.
The “working plane” is the plane the cursor is
moving in. Thus it changes with the observer’s
position in the scene. The current working plane
is the orthogonal plane which orientation is the
closest from the current view plane (the screen
plane).
So now, if the current view plane is the front
view, the (x,y) plane is the orthogonal plane the
closest from the screen plane. That will be the
working plane. The x axis is red and the y axis is
green.
1) Move the cursor; its position is interactively
displayed in the parameter palette. Only the x
and y coordinates are modified because the
cursor doesn’t move in z.
2) Click when the cursor position is suitable, the
first segment is now drawn in the (x,y) plane.
3) Move the cursor to draw the second segment
in the same plane.
4) Press on the “up” arrow several times to move
progressively to a top view. Stop as the axis

Amapi ProT M 45
turns to blue: now the x axis (red) and the z
axis (blue) are displayed. This indicates that
the working plane has changed.
5) Move the cursor; its position is interactively
displayed in the parameter palette. Only the x
and z coordinates are modified because the
cursor doesn’t move in y.
6) Click when the cursor position is suitable. The
second segment is now drawn in the (x,z)
plane.
7) Move to a side view (“6” key) to work on the
(y,z) plane. Now, only the y and z coordinates
are modified because the cursor doesn’t move
in x.
8) Click when the cursor position is suitable The
third segment is now drawn in the (y,z) plane.
9) Now, press the “2” key to see the entire scene
in the front view.

Constraining the cursor movement:


The cursor moves again on the (x,y) plane.
To draw a perfectly horizontal segment:
1) Click on the icon located in the assistant
palette (beginners help palette). It forces the
cursor movement to the horizontal axis.
Check this by moving the cursor in the
graphic workspace.
2) Click to validate this fourth segment.
3) To draw a perfectly vertical segment: Click
on the icon located in the assistant palette.
It forces the cursor movement to the vertical
axis. Check this by moving the cursor in the
graphic workspace.
4) Click to validate this fifth segment.
5) Click on the icon to free the cursor
movement on the working plane.

46 Reference Manual
6) Click to validate this sixth segment.
Instead of clicking on one of these three
constraint icons, it is faster to use the
“Space-Bar” shortcut to toggle from one
movement constraint to another. Press the
“Space-Bar” several times and move the cursor to
see the constrained movement.

Validate the polyline drawing:


Amapi Pro proposes drawing a seventh curve
segment. But since we only want six points,
validate the drawing by pressing the “Enter” key.

Navigate to view the 3D line:


Use the navigation keys to circulate around the
scene and see that the profile has been drawn in
three dimensions.

Release the “Curve” tool:


The tool will be released by sweeping the right
side of the screen with the cursor. The user will
be able to continue his work with another
selection and/or another tool.

Give a thickness to the tube:


1) Click on the icon showing the “Thickness/
Offset” tool in the “Modeling palette”.

“Modeling
palette”
2) This tool has several options. Click on the
“Thickness/Offset”
“Give a thickness” option. tool options
The curve is transformed into a tube.

Amapi ProT M 47
3) The tuner indicates that the + or - keys
can be used to quickly set the “Thickness”
parameter corresponding to the tube diameter.
4) Validate the operation and release the tool by
pressing on the “Enter” key.

Navigate to view the 3D tube:


Use the navigation keys to circulate around the
scene and view the tube that has been drawn in
three dimensions.

Building a parallelepiped
Select the “Surface and volume primitives”
tool in the “Construction Palette”:
Click on the “Surface and volume primitives” “Construction
Palette”
icon in the “Construction Palette”.
Select the “Cube” subtool in the “Construction
Palette”:
“Surface and volume primitives”
Click on the “Cube” tool. palette

Move to a front view:


Press the “2” key to go to the front view.

Select the construction method:


Just like with the sphere, Amapi Pro offers two
“Cube” construction methods.
Click on the icon corresponding to the “From the
center” option .

48 Reference Manual
Set the center of the cube:
1) Move the cursor in the graphic workspace.
The cursor position is interactively displayed
in the parameter palette at the bottom left side
of the screen. This time, the coordinates will
be entered from the keyboard.
2) Press the “Tab” key to activate the parameters
edit mode.
3) Enter a value for x, y and z (use the arrow
keys to move from one field to another).
4) Validate the operation by pressing the “Enter”
key.

Set the size of the parallelepiped:


1) Move the cursor again. The parameter palette
displays the same value for x, y and z for the
cube currently in construction.
2) Press the “Space-Bar” once (shortcut to
toggle from one movement constraint to
another). This forces the cursor movement
onto the horizontal axis. The cube is
transformed into a parallelepiped and the
cursor movement controls the width (radius
x). The parameter palette now displays three
values (x,y and z).
3) Press the “Space-Bar” once again. This now
forces the cursor movement onto the vertical
axis. The cursor movement now controls the
height (y) of the parallelepiped. The
parameter palette still displays three
dimensions (x,y and z).
4) Enter three values, directly in the parameter
palette, as for the center setting.
5) Validate the dimensions by pressing the
“Enter” key. This will automatically release
the “Cube” tool.

Amapi ProT M 49
6.2 Creating an
ashtray
In this exercise, we will see that with only a few
clicks, everyday objects such as a ashtray can be
created.
This tutorial is designed to learn how to quickly
work with Amapi Pro and to demonstrate its
versatility. It is therefore possible to work in
single-view or multi-view.
We consider here that the previous exercise have
already been done. Basic explanations will
therefore be skipped.
At the end of this exercise, the user will know
how to:
• Work in single-view or multi-view.
• Use the “Cube”, “Chamfer”, “Cut”, “Rotate”,
“Move” tools.
• Save the current scene in the catalog.

Preparing the scene


Check the default application modes:
• the operating mode is already set to NURBS
(Control panel)
• snap to grid is on (Control panel)

Make sure the scene is empty:


If there are any objects in the scene, delete all of
them by pressing the “Ctrl-Del” keys.

50 Reference Manual
Disable Dynamic Geometry :
Dynamic Geometry” is a fundamental concept we
will see in the next exercise, but in this one we
will switch Dynamic Geometry off. Click on the
Control panel extract
toggle-icon located in the control panel to toggle
from one working mode to the other. The icon
must show that Dynamic Geometry is
Work without Dynamic Geometry
disabled
Work with Dynamic Geometry

Setting a strategy:
There are always several methods available to
make the same model when working with
Amapi Pro. Determine a strategy before
beginning the model. Some methods will be more
appropriate, depending on the work method or
the application domain. Very quickly, you will be
able to use your own experience to define a
strategy
The first modeling step generally consists of
drawing curves or volumes as a construction
basis.
When looking at an ashtray, we can see that the
shape is based on a parallelepiped. So, let’s start
by building a parallelepiped.

Building a parallelepiped
Select the “Cube” tool:
1) Select the “Surface and volume
primitives” in the construction palette.

2) Click on the “Cube” tool .

Select the construction method:


Amapi Pro uses the last selected tool option for
the tool. Click on the icon corresponding to the
“From the base” option .

Amapi ProT M 51
Set the base of the cube:
1) Move the cursor to set the base of the cube.
Enter the x, y, z values as (0,1,0).

Set the size of the parallelepiped:


1) Move the cursor again. The parameter palette
displays the same value for x, y and z for the
cube currently in construction.
2) Press the “Space-Bar” once (shortcut to
toggle from one movement constraint to
another).
3) Enter three values directly in the parameter
palette (x=20 ; y=5 ; z=20).
4) Validate the dimensions by pressing the
“Enter” key. This automatically releases the
“Cube” tool.

Creating the hole in the


center of the ashtray
We will create a sphere and cut the cube with this
sphere to create the hole.

Creation and placement of a sphere:


1) Click on the “Sphere” tool icon in the
“Surface and volume primitives” palette.
2) Make sure that the “From the base”
option is selected.
3) Move the cursor to set the base of the sphere
inside the cube just above the center of the top
face (x=0 ; y=2 ; z=0).
4) Click to validate the position of the base.

Set the sphere size:


1) Move the cursor vertically to define the
diameter of the sphere at 14 cm.

52 Reference Manual
2) Click to validate the size.
3) The tuner indicates that you can refine the
visual appearance of the sphere (see the
preceding exercise). Since we are
manipulating NURBS objects, we don’t need
to be concerned with that step, since the result
of the cut operation will be perfectly smooth.
You can use, if you like, the « + » and « - »
keys to smooth the sphere.
4) Validate the operation by pressing the “Enter”
key.

Cut the cube with the sphere to create the


hole :
We will now cut the cube by removing the sphere
volume from it with the “Cut” tool. “Boolean” option
1) Check that the sphere is the current object. (it
must have the section color).
2) Select the “Cut” tool in the modeling
palette.
3) Select the “Boolean” option.
4) Click on the cube to start the cut operation.
5) Once done, the Boolean operation option
palette appears. This allows you to select Current option
which type of operation you want to perform
among several choices (union, difference,
intersection,...).
In this case, we will use the first option which
gives us the desired result.
Validate the operation and release the tool by
pressing the “Enter” key.

Creating the grooves


We will use this same method for creating the
four grooves. First, we will build a cylinder and
then cut the ashtray with this cylinder.

Amapi ProT M 53
Switch to 4 views:
1) Click on the “single view” icon in the
control panel. The view palette appears.
2) Select the 4 views icon .
Note: only one view is a perspective view.
The others are planar views.
3) Click on the top view to activate it.
4) Use the keyboard numerical keys ’.’ or ’,’ to
zoom out a bit.

First groove
1) Click on the “Cylinder” tool in the
“Surface and volume primitives” palette.
2) Move the cursor to set the center of the base
of the cylinder near the front face of the
ashtray and click or enter the values directly
in the parameters palette (x=0 ; y=0 ; z=13) .
3) Click in order to place the base of the cylinder
and to begin construction.
4) Move the cursor to the right. A small cylinder
appears. The mouse position defines its
diameter.
5) When the diameter is close to 1 cm, click, or
hit Tab and enter 1 in the parameter palette
and hit return to validate.
6) Now that the diameter is defined, moving the
cursor sets the height of the cylinder. Move
the cursor upward. The cylinder grows.
7) Stretch the cylinder so that it completely
crosses the ashtray body and appears on the
other side. The height should be about 26 cm.
Click to validate. .
8) As soon as the height is set, the tuner
appears and the two sides of the cylinder are
highlighted. Since we want to close the

54 Reference Manual
cylinder, simply click on the accessory to
close the two sides.
9) Put aside the tool.

Positioning the groove cylinder


You can see that for now the cylinder is
completely inside the ashtray body. We will
move it to the correct position.
1) Click on the front view.
2) In the “Basic toolkit” palette, choose the
“Move” tool .
3) Hit the “Space-Bar” once: this will limit the
action of several tools (Move, Scale,
Stretch,...) to a single axis. The first time you
hit the “Space-Bar”, the red and green axis
turns to a single horizontal red axis.
4) As we want to move the cylinder upward, hit
the “Space-Bar” again. The green vertical axis
appears and the movement is constrained
vertically.
5) Click on the cylinder and move the cursor
upward. The cylinder follows the cursor.
6) Move the cursor so that it appears partly
outside the ashtray body. The translation is
(x=0 ; y=4 ; z=0). You can either
• Move the cylinder until seeing the correct
value in the parameter palette, then
clicking to validate.
• or hit the Tab key twice (the first edits the
x, the second for y). Type 4 and hit Enter.

Create the second cylinder


We will now create another cylinder
perpendicular to the first one to create the
horizontal grooves. To do that, we will create a
rotated copy of the first cylinder.
1) Switch to an top view by clicking on it.

Amapi ProT M 55
2) Press and hold the « Ctrl » key while clicking
on the “Rotate” tool in the “Basic toolkit”
palette. A gradated circle appears around the
cylinder.
Remark: Holding the « Ctrl » key while
selecting one of the basic tools lets you, on
tools that accept this kind of operation, create
a copy of the selected object before applying
the tool’s action.
3) Click on the highest gradation on the circle.
4) Move the cursor to the right most gradation.
The new cylinder rotates as you move the
cursor.
• Click again when on the right most
gradation. (The new cylinder is
perpendicular to the original one)
Or
• If you prefer, hit Tab and enter 90°. Then
hit Enter to validate
• Hit enter again to leave the tool.

Switch to single-view :
1) Click on the «four-view» icon to open the
view palette.
2) Click on the «single-view» icon .

Group the cylinders:


We shall group the two cylinders to get only one
object.
1) Click on the “Group” tool icon .
2) Click on each cylinder.
3) Put aside the tool.

Cutting the grooves


We will now create the cylinder holes by using
the same method as for the center hole. This is
done using the “Cut” tool.

56 Reference Manual
1) Click on the “Cut” tool in the modeling
palette.
The cylinders must be the selected object.
2) Click on the ashtray to perform the cut
between the current object and the ashtray.
3) Check that the current cut option is in the
option palette: the resulting object is the
ashtray body minus the cylinders.
4) Validate by hitting the enter key.

Chamfering the edges


1) Pick up the “Chamfer” tool from the
modeling tools palette.
2) Click on the edges you want to chamfer. Note
that the edges appear highlighted when close
to the cursor. This allows you to perfectly see
what the editable entities are and to be sure to
select the correct one.
3) The tuner indicates that you can use the +
or - keyboard keys to quickly tune the radius
parameter (select 0,5).
4) Validate by hitting the enter key.
5) The ashtray is finished. You can turn it
around and look at it from different
viewpoints by using the keyboard arrow keys
or the view icons of the view palette.

Rendered display
Set the viewpoint:
1) Use the navigation keys to see the ashtray
from any angle.
2) Find the best viewpoint.

Amapi ProT M 57
Rendering:
Press the “Enter” key to display the rendered
object.

Save the file


Now, save the file in Amapi Pro’s file manager,
called “The Catalog” which quickly and easily
allows you to store and retrieve Amapi Pro
Modeling Rendering File Manager Room
documents just like in a library. Room Room (The Catalog)

1) Click on Catalog room icon .

2) Click on the Catalog icon “Open a


directory”.
3) Select the directory. Amapi Pro displays the
selected directory. Each file can be identified
by a thumbnail which depicts the scene by its
name.
4) Browse the pages of the catalog, using the “+/
-” keys, until finding an “Empty” location.
5) Click on an empty location. Amapi Pro saves
the file. A thumbnail depicting the scene is
displayed in this location.

58 Reference Manual
6.3 Creating a bottle
This new exercise is primarily intended to
familiarize you with the manipulation of objects
using dynamic geometry. Dynamic geometry is
one of the points which contribute to the power
and flexibility of your program.
It works according to the following principles:
Each object of the scene keeps a trace of all the
steps of its construction. You can therefore ask to
rectify a curve or a volume resulting from a
previous step. Amapi Pro will reflect this
modification in all the steps separating it from the
finished model. Here, we will create a profile of
an extrusion and then manipulate this profile after
the surface creation. Each manipulation will be
reflected immediately on the result, thus enabling
us to precisely set the aspect of the bottle.

At the end of this exercise you will know how to:


• Use the gradated axis and the alignment
guides
• Use the selection accessories
• Use the dynamic geometry properties,
• Use the “Circle”, “Curve”, “Scale”, “Sweep”,
“Stretch”, “Tesselate” tools.

Preparing the scene


Make sure the scene is empty:
If you have just carried out the preceding
exercise, objects remain displayed in the graphic
window. Press on the key combination “Ctrl”
“Del” to remove all of them.

Amapi ProT M 59
Work with dynamic geometry:
In this exercise, we will work with Dynamic
Geometry. To work without Dynamic Geometry
Click on the toggle-icon integrated into the
control panel which enables you to switch from To work with Dynamic Geometry
one working method to another. The icon must
show that you are working with Dynamic
Geometry .

Defining a strategy:
Note that a bottle consists of concentric circular
sections more or less dilated. We thus will create
a profile and a circle to use as a section. Then, we
will use the “Sweep” tool to create the surface.

Gradated axis and Alignment


guides
You already used the gradated axis in the
preceding exercises to precisely enter points.
Here we will use alignment guides. These guides
are in fact straight lines passing through the last
point created and forming a preset angle with the
horizontal one. The cursor is automatically
magnetized to these lines. It is possible to add
reference points in order to create intersections
between these alignment guides. We will begin
by setting the values of the angles used for the
alignment guides. Open the “Preferences editor”
from the “Edit” menu or use the “Alt-P”
keyboard shortcut. In the “Graphic environment”
tab, click on “Alignment guides”. Check that the
Alignment Guide mode is enabled and select 30
to 45 in the list of suggested angles. The eight
possible angles are assigned to the corresponding
values. You can also activate the alignment
guides from the Control panel.
Validate.

60 Reference Manual
Drawing the bottle profile
Changing the Viewpoint:
“Line drawing” palette
Remember that the default “working plane” is the
orthogonal plane to which the orientation is
closest to the plane of the screen. You will
therefore need to go to a face view to be able to
draw the profile (press on the key “2”).

Drawing the Profile:


1) Select the “Line drawing” tool in the
construction palette.
2) Select the “Curve”, tool in the “Line
drawing” palette.
Alignment guide at Last point created
3) Enter the first point. Then slowly move the 45 degrees
cursor around this point. You will then see the
alignment guides appear when the position of
the cursor corresponds to one of the selected
angles. The last point entered is surrounded
by a green rectangle.
4) Place the cursor on the horizontal axis going
through the point. The cursor is then guided
by a line of 0 degrees. It becomes very easy to
follow this line. Move the cursor 1 cm to the
left of the first point and click.
5) Move the cursor 1 cm to the left and 1/2 cm
down. You will see a guide appear at 30
degrees. Click on this position.
6) Add a point 1/2 cm on the left.
7) Then go up vertically 8 cm.
8) Create a new point 1 cm above this.
9) Create a point 2 cm up and 1.5 cm to the right.
10)Create a last point 5 cm vertically above the
previous one.
11) The profile is finished. Validate.

Amapi ProT M 61
Draw the base of the circle
Changing the Viewpoint:
Remember that the default “working plane” is the
orthogonal plane to which the orientation is
closest to the plane of the screen. You will
therefore need to go to a top view in order to
draw the circle on the ground plane (press the key
“5”). The circle will be automatically located on
the plane where you created the last point, that is
to say on the top of the bottle. So that the circle
positions correctly compared to the profile, press
the “left arrow” key several times. The profile
can then be seen as a vertical line.

Drawing the Base circle:


1) Select the “Line drawing” tool in the
construction palette.
2) Select the “Circle” tool in the “Line
drawing” palette.
“Line drawing” palette
3) Select the «from the base» option.
Position the center of the circle by clicking at
the center of the gradated axis in the graphic
window or by entering a value of (0,0,0) in
the parameters window.
4) Move the cursor and see the circle being
formed. It must be created along the vertical
axis.
5) Click to validate the radius when it is at 0.75
or enter this value directly in the numeric
window.
6) The tuner-cursor shows that you can press
on the + or - keys of the keyboard to proceed
to set the number of points. As we are
working in NURBS mode, the number of
points is used for visualization only. Leave
the default value. Press «Enter» to validate.

62 Reference Manual
7) End by putting down “Line drawing” tool.
8) Go to a face view (press on the key “2”).

Position the circle with the Snap/Align tool:


It can be necessary to reposition the circle if it
was not created exactly at the right place. To do
this, use the “Snap/Align” tool.
1) Select the circle
2) Select the “Snap/Align” tool
3) Click on a point of the circle nearest to the
profile.
4) Click on the highest point of the profile. The
circle is now placed correctly.
5) Release the tool.

Extruding the bottle


From the profile and the section, you can now
generate the bottle’s surface.
1) Select the circle by simply clicking on it.
2) Select the “Sweep” tool in the
construction palette.
3) This tool offers two options; choose the
“Extruded sweep” option.
4) Click on the profile. The surface is created.
5) Two white circles appear at the two ends of
the surface. If you click on them, you can
close each opening independently.
Click on the bottom circle to close the bottom
of the bottle.
6) Validate by pressing Enter twice. Your
surface is created.

Amapi ProT M 63
Retouching the bottle’s shape
The Dynamic Geometry palette:
Since we are working with the Dynamic
Geometry (DG), Amapi Pro has kept a track of all
the steps of the modeling. You will observe this
by consulting the DG palette located on the left of
the screen:
• Level 1 corresponds to the polylines of
control for the circle and for the NURBS
profile.
• Level 2 corresponds to the NURBS circle and
to the NURBS profile.
• Level 3 corresponds to the sweeping.
1) Click on the icon of the DG palette to
display the polylines of control associated to
this dynamic geometry level. See right.
2) Click on the icon of the DG palette to
display the NURBS curves of the profile and
the circle.
3) Click on the icon of the DG palette to
display the sweeping.

Rectification of the profile:


Let us suppose that you are not completely
satisfied with the results obtained. We can
therefore rectify the profile.
1) Select the “Stretch” tool (on the right-
hand side of the screen).
2) The tool proposes to you to work on the first
DG level by default.
A red frame indicates that this is the
“Working level”. In the graphic window,
Amapi Pro highlights the control shapes (the
circle and the sweeping profile).
3) Click on one of the points defining the
extrusion profile and move the cursor to

64 Reference Manual
deform it. You can see that Amapi Pro
reflects in real time the effects of this
deformation on the extruded final shape.
4) Click again to validate the new drawing.
5) Repeat these two last steps until you are
satisfied with the results obtained.
6) Release the “Stretch” tool.

Retouching the bottle neck


The aspect of the bottle’s neck is not quite
satisfactory. We would therefore like to modify
its shape but we did not define enough points on
the profile for that. We can therefore add control
points to the profile with the “Tesselate” tool.

Add points to the profile:


1) Click on the icon of the DG palette to
display the NURBS profile and the NURBS
circle.
2) Click on the visibility icon on the line
corresponding to the extrusion in the dynamic
geometry palette . This lets you hide the
surface to better see the control curves. This
icon appears only next to levels above the
selected level.
3) Click on the curve profile in the 3D space to
select it. It becomes the active object.
4) Select the “Tesselate” tool in the modeling
palette. This tool, when it is applied to
NURBS objects makes it possible to add
control points or to set the tesselation
parameters. Red and yellow squares appear on
the profile.
5) Click on the profile four times to add
regularly spaced points to make the neck.

Amapi ProT M 65
6) Release the “Tesselate” tool. The profile now
has enough points to be able to modify the
bottle’s neck.
7) Release the tool.
8) Click on the visibility icon on the line
corresponding to the extrusion in the dynamic
geometry palette . This lets you show the
surface.

Modeling the neck:


1) Select the “Stretch” tool
2) While holding the Shift key down, click on
the first point and the third point which you
have just added to the base of the top of the
profile. The two points are displayed in red.
Only these two points will therefore be
affected by the action of the “Stretch” tool.
3) Release the “Shift” key.
4) Press the space bar to force the movement to
the horizontal axis. Click to begin the
modification, the profile becomes deformed
and this deformation is reproduced on the
bottle.
5) Click again when the shape is appropriate for
you.
6) Release the “Stretch” tool. The bottle is
finished!

66 Reference Manual
The selection accessories :
In the preceding action we did a multiple
selection by means of the Shift key in order to
select several of points. This action could have
been done differently by using one of the
selection accessories of the selection palette.
“Select” consists of pointing out the element(s)
concerned by the action you want to undertake.
These elements can be objects, facets, edges or
points.
The Amapi Pro tools act on all of the selected
elements (this is called the “current selection”).
The first line of icons in the selection palette lets
you to indicate the entity you want to select
(object, facet, edge or point).
The second line of icons allows you to indicate
the way in which you want to select: object by
object, with the assistance of the lasso or a
rectangle, 1 on N, by proximity or by angle.

To select the two points in the preceding exercise,


we could have used the object by object selection
accessory, in point mode, validating when the
selection was finished before stretching the points
thus selected.

Display in rendering mode


and save the file
1) Press the “Enter” key to display the object in
rendering mode.
2) To save your new creation, you will use the
catalog , as in the previous exercise.

Amapi ProT M 67
6.4 Modeling a
mouse
This exercise shows the power and the speed
when modeling complex models with Amapi Pro.
This mouse will be made only with NURBS
surfaces, with the assistance of NURBS curves
and the “Sweep”, “Manifold”, “Cut” and
“Chamfer” tools.
This exercise supposes that you are accustomed
to doing basic manipulations with Amapi Pro
such as moving, scaling up or down, or rotating.
At the end of this exercise you will know how to:
• “Sweep”,
• “Manifold”,
• “Cut”,
• “Chamfer”

Preparing the scene


Make sure the scene is empty:
If you just carried out the preceding exercise,
objects remain displayed in the graphic window.
Press on the key combination “Ctrl” and “Del” to
remove them all.

Check that you are in NURBS mode:


Check, in the Control panel that the working
mode is set with NURBS .

Drawing the construction


curves
1) First of all, you will draw the curves which
will help you build your mouse. Curve 2

2) Go to a top view (press on the key “5”) Click


Curve 1
on the “Line drawing” tool.

68 Reference Manual
3) Click on the “Curve” tool.
4) Draw the two first curves, and be careful that Curve 4
they cross close to their ends.
Curve 3
5) Go to a face view (press on the key “2”).
6) Draw the curve 3.
7) Go to a side view (press on the key “6”). Curve 2
8) Draw the curve 4.
Curve 1

Creating the construction


surfaces
Construction of the side surface
1) Click on the first curve to select it.
2) Then, click on the “Sweep” tool in the
modeling palette.
3) Click again on the selected curve to start the
dynamic sweep.
4) Your surface begins to be created, and follows
the cursor’s movement.
5) By briefly pressing the “Space-Bar” once, you
can force your extrusion to one axis or
another. Here, by pressing the “Space-Bar”
once, you will force the extrusion to the axis
y, that is to say the vertical axis.
6) Click to validate the extrusion.
7) Validate by pressing the Enter key three
times.
8) Create the second curve in the same way.

Construction of the upper surface


You now will define the surface of the top of the
mouse, using the two remaining curves.
1) Click curve 3 to select it.

Amapi ProT M 69
2) Then click on the “Sweep” tool .

3) Click on the “Swept tubing” option.


4) Click on the curve 4: your surface is
automatically generated. You should obtain a
result similar to the in our illustration.
5) Validate by pressing the Enter key twice.

Construction of the base surface


1) Select the “Surface and volume primitives”
tools palette, and select “Grid”.
2) Go to a top view (press on the key “5”).
3) Draw the grid.
4) Go to a face view (press on the key “2”).
5) Move the grid by using the “Move” tool .
You should obtain a result similar to the in
our illustration.

Setting up the volume


You might have to move some surfaces. In order
for the “Manifold” tool to work, it is imperative
that the volume enclosed by your surfaces is well
closed. You should therefore obtain something
similar to the illustration on the right.
1) Select the “Manifold” tool.
2) Click on surfaces one after the other. They
will be progressively selected.
3) Validate with the Enter key: your volume is
created!

Rectification
1) Your mouse’s edges are a little sharp. We will
now soften them.

70 Reference Manual
2) Select the “Chamfer” tool .
3) Click on all the edges of your mouse, which
then appear highlighted in red. You also can
use the accessory which applies the
chamfer to all the edges.
4) With the + and - keys of the numeric keypad,
you can modify the radius of your chamfer.
5) When you are satisfied with the general
appearance of your mouse, validate with the
Enter key.

Adding a wheel
The wheel cavity
1) Select the “Surface and volume primitives”,
tool and create a little sphere.
2) Go to a face view (press on the key “2”).
3) With the “Scale” tool, flatten the sphere on
the x axe.
4) Go to a side view (press on the key “4”).
5) With the “Scale” tool, flatten the sphere on
the y axe.
6) With the “Rotate” tool, apply a light rotation
to it.
7) Place the flattened sphere on your mouse, so
that it intersects with the upper surface.
8) Click on the sphere to select it, then choose
the “Cut” (“Boolean”) tool.
9) Then click on the mouse, the sphere will
perforate the surface of the mouse.
10)With the assistance of the + and - keys, you
can alternatively review all the possible
operations between the two surfaces.

Amapi ProT M 71
11)When you get a result similar to the figure to
the right, validate with the Enter key.
12)Select the “Sweep” tool.
13)Click on the ellipse cut out in the surface of
the mouse: this is an edge, it appears in
yellow. In NURBS mode, the extrusion tool
Close up
can detect an edge and extrude it directly. view of the
This is what we will do. As soon as you click wheel
cavity
on this yellow ellipse, the surface is created.

Making the wheel


You then will add the wheel, by means of a
simple sphere.
1) Select the “Surface and volume primitives”,
palette, then “Sphere”.
Close up
2) With the “Scale” and “Move” tools, you will view of the
flatten this sphere and place it in the correct wheel
during
place. construction

Creating the wire connection


Now, you will create the mouse’s wire
connection.
1) Select the “Surface and volume primitives”.
2) Select the “Cylinder”.
3) Create a small cylinder.
4) After having defined the shape of the
cylinder, Amapi Pro highlights the top and
bottom ends of the cylinder. Amapi Pro asks
you if you want an opened or a closed
cylinder. If you click on the ends, you will Close up
view of the
close them, and this is what you will do here. wire
With the “Rotate” and “Scale” tools, place connection
this cylinder in the correct place.

72 Reference Manual
5) With this cylinder selected, pick up the “Cut”
(“Boolean”) tool and click on the body of the
mouse. You will get a cut out as on the right.
6) As you have previously done for the wheel
cavity, pick up the “Sweep” tool and click on Close up
the yellow cercle which appears at the edge of view of the
wire
this hole to create a small surface which goes connection
towards the interior of the mouse. Validate by
pressing the Enter key.

Creating the wire


1) Now, select the “Line drawing” tool.
2) Draw a “Curve” which will be the path for
your wire.
3) Then use the “Thickness/Offset”, tool and
simply determine the thickness of your wire
by pressing on the + and - keys.

Creating the ball cavity


1) You now will create the cavity for the mouse
ball. Pick up the “Surface and volume
primitives” tool again, and create a sphere.
Then place it so that it cuts into the lower part
of the mouse.
2) With the sphere selected, pick up the “Cut”
(“Boolean”) tool and click on the body of the
mouse: the cut-out is made immediately.
3) Just like for the other cavities which we used
on this mouse, pick up the “Sweep” tool and

Amapi ProT M 73
create this part with seven small mouse clicks.
NURBS curves having a natural tendency to
be curved, to obtain sharper edges on this
part, you will need to click twice as many
points that are closer together.
4) The new piece is now in place.
5) A simple sphere is added to make the mouse
ball

Adding feet
To improve this mouse, you may add four little
feet and a spot to stick on the brand.
To do this, 4 small closed and stretched cylinders
will be placed on the mouse body.
This is not necessary to create 4 feet, but only one
and then copy it with the “Duplicate” tool.
1) Now you know how to do this part: drill the
holes of the four feet one by one and the hole
for the brand.
2) In the selection palette click on the edges
selection accessory icon.
3) Select the four yellow edges corresponding to
the holes for the feet.
4) Then pick up the “Sweep” tool and validate
with the enter key. You have created all 4 feet
at the same time.
5) Do the same for the cavity for the brand.
6) Your mouse is finished!

74 Reference Manual
Rooms common principles
7
The Rooms, Palettes and Tools

7.1 The Rooms


In order to reduce the number of tools visible at the same time on the
screen, Amapi Pro divides the main functions into three groups called
“Rooms”.
To toggle from one to the other, click on the icon showing the desired room:

The Modeling room which allows you to build, model and assemble the objects (See
“Modeling room” on page 237).

The Rendering room to set the materials and the lights (See “Rendering Room” on
page 421).

The Catalog room where you can record the objects or the scenes (See “The
Catalog” on page 443).

Amapi ProT M 77
7.2 The Tools palettes
7.2.1 Three Tools palettes and a “Basic toolkit”
Each room offers different functions called “Tools”.
The tools of the modeling room have been dispatched in
specialized groups of tools called “Tools palettes”.
Amapi Pro will display only the tools needed for each
step of work. This is why they have been divided into
three different groups. Each group, called “Palette”, Construction
corresponds to a modeling step: palette

• The “Basic toolkit”


• The Construction palette
• The Modeling palette
• The Assembly palette

Modeling
palette

Assembly
palette

78 Reference Manual
7.2.2 Two interfaces
Amapi Pro proposes two possible interfaces to display the modeling room tools:

The “Toolbox” interface has The “Tools palette” interface is particu-


the advantage of being familiar larly suited for 3D modeling as it closely
as it permanently displays all mirrors the natural movement of the
the tools. designer in front of his table or of the model
maker in front of his workbench.
Amapi Pro displays four pal-
ettes corresponding to the three Amapi Pro will display only one tools
tools palettes and the basic palette at a time, placing at your disposal
toolkit. only the group of tools likely to be useful.
The “Basic toolkit” will be displayed
permanently.
You will have two methods to switch from
a tools palette to the other:
• by simply sweeping the cursor to the right
hand side of the screen out of the window
and then moving it back towards the center
of the screen.
•by clicking on the number sequence of the
tools palette.
“Construction Palette”
“Modeling palette”
“Assembly palette”

You will be able to change this preference in the “Preferences editor”> “User interface”>
“Palettes display”> “Toolbox” (see details on page 456).

By default, Amapi Pro displays the tools palettes on the right side of the screen. It’s also possible
to display them on the left side.
’“Preferences editor”> “User interface”> “Miscellaneous”> “Right-handed palettes display” (see
details on page 456).

Amapi ProT M 79
7.3 Using tools
When to pick up a tool?
A tool works on the current selection or on the selected objects (See “The concept of
selection” on page 147). It is often better to make the selection before picking the tool,
although it is possible to change the selection while using the tool.
To pick up a tool, just click once on the icon which depicts the tool.
You will be able to pick up a tool from a tools palette only if there is not another tool in use.
If a tool is in use, you will have to release this tool (see details on page 80) in order to be
allowed to pick up a new tool.
If you choose the “Toolbox” interface (See “Two interfaces” on page 79):
All the tools of the workshop are permanently at the disposal of the user, you will therefore
be able to pick up a new tool from any one of the four palettes (the three tools palettes and
the basic toolkit) at any moment.
If you choose the “Tools palette” interface (See “Two interfaces” on page 79):
You might have to change the tools palette before picking up a tool.
On the other hand, you will be able to pick up a tool from the basic toolkit at any moment. In
this case, the selection of a tool from the kit will automatically validate the tool in progress.

How to pick up a tool?


Click on the icon showing the tool in the palette.

How to use a tool?


• A tool is organized into a sequence of steps.
At each step, it is possible to tune some parameters (See “The Parameters” on
page 161). After validation, the tool switches to the next step.
• Some tools offer several working methods. They are called tool options (See “The tools
options and accessories” on page 83).
• Accessories are compliments to tools. They allow you specific -but not essential-
operations (See “The tools options and accessories” on page 83).
• Amapi Pro can display a detailed help message explaining how to use the tool (See “The
Help” on page 205).

How to end a tool action?


• By validating the action (“Enter” key)
Press the “Enter” key to validate an action. The tool will be automatically released and the
user will be able to continue his work with another selection and another tool.

80 Reference Manual
• By releasing the tool
The tool will be released by hitting the right side of the screen with the cursor. The user will
be able to continue his work with another selection and another tool.
• By selecting another tool
When selecting another tool, the current tool action is automatically validated.
• By cancelling (“Escape” key)
It is possible to press the “Escape” key at anytime while using a tool. This action releases the
tool and cancels the tool action. The scene will remain the same as before picking up this
tool.

Amapi ProT M 81
82 Reference Manual
8
The tools options and accessories

When a tool is selected, Amapi Pro proposes, in a reserved area, a series of icons showing
the available options and accessories.
These are:

• “The tool options” (see details on page 84).

• “The tools options and accessories” (see details on page 83).

These options and accessories are proposed to the


user as a palette which can be repositioned. The
first icon of this palette depicts the current tool.
Current Group of Accessory
tool icon options

This options and accessories area can be hidden to free up more space for the graphic
workspace.
See’“Preferences editor”> “User interface”> “Palettes display”> “Tools options and accessories
display support area” (see details on page 455).

Amapi ProT M 83
8.1 The tool options
8.1.1 What is a tool option?
Tools are organized as a sequence of steps. Some of these steps allow you to select between
several working methods or computing options. These methods or options are displayed on
the top right of the graphic workspace.

Some options can change the behavior and/or the number of steps:

In the following example, passing from one method-option to the other modifies the
behavior of the tool. The “Sphere” tool proposes two building methods:

“From the base”:


At the first step of this method, the tool asks you to enter the

Diameter
base point of the sphere, the diameter will then be set at the second
step.

base

“From the center”:


At the first step of this method, the tool asks you to enter the
center point of the sphere, the radius will then be set at the second Radius
step. Center

Other options do not change the behavior or the number of steps.


Let's pick up the “Sphere” tool example again:

Pole sphere Geodesic sphere Geodesic sphere Geodesic sphere


(default option) based on a cube based on based on
an icosahedron an octahedron

84 Reference Manual
8.1.2 Selecting an option
For each tool step, there is always a default option. There are several methods for selecting
another option:

• By clicking on the icon showing the desired option.


This operation can be done at any step while using the tool

• It is possible to toggle quickly from one option to the other by pressing both the “Alt”
and “Space-Bar” keys. This operation can be made only when the options group is
highlighted as the current “options group”.

8.2 Tool accessories


Accessories are not essential to the tools but are useful add-ons. They let you perform
particular operations, such as:

Set a reference point


Several tools use a reference point. The rotation center, the reference point in the
scale tool or for a symmetry axis are examples of reference points. Amapi Pro sets
them to a default position. The “reference point” accessory allows the user to set it.

Apply to all
Several tools have an “Apply to all” accessory to apply the current operation to all
elements. You can therefore automatically generate an action to close all facets,
group all displayed entities or apply a chamfer to an entire current object in just one
operation. The shortcut is the “A” key.

Modify a particular parameter


Some tools offer parameter setting accessories, such as the “spread” accessory in the
“Wrap” tool which allows you to spread the projected surface in or out.

Turn off an action


Some tools have accessories that turn off a particular action.

Amapi ProT M 85
86 Reference Manual
9
The graphic environment

The user will work on the orthonormal base visualized as three gradated axis (see details
on page 88).

The working plane, on which the modeling will be done, (see details on page 89) is defined
by the two axis the most parallels to the current view plane (see details on page 137).
To create points in 3D, the user only has the use of a 2D mouse (or equivalent). He or she
will therefore have to change the viewpoint to change the working plane (See “The
Navigation” on page 135).

The orthogonal planes visualization will help for the orientation in the 3D graphic
workspace (See “The orthogonal planes” on page 90).

y Working plane y
Working plane

x
z x

Amapi ProT M 87
9.1 The orthonormal base
Only the two axis of the orthonormal base defining the current working plane are displayed
while using the tools. They let you make precise alignments and simple constraints.
Their color code is as follows: X (red), Y (green) and Z (blue).

9.1.1 The origin


It is possible to move the origin of the orthonormal base at any time during modeling.
This can be done by using the tool “Orthonormal base origin” (see details on page 173)
located in the Control panel.

9.1.2 The gradations


Intervals can be set on the gradated axis of the orthonormal base.
The interval can be increased or decreased by clicking on the assistant palette icons
(keyboard shortcut: “+/-”) keys.
The interval of the gradation can be customized in the preferences menu:
• The interval on the half axis length display (“Preferences editor”> “Graphic
environment”> “Rulers”> “Quarter axis (half-axis)” (see details on page 461).
• Amapi Pro proposes two kinds of axis gradation: the complete or the limited axis
gradation (“Preferences editor”> “Graphic environment”> “Rulers”> “Quarter axis
gradation” (see details on page 461).
• The trihedron is a miniature representation of the orthonormal base to have a better
understanding of the 3D space. A preference allows you to select:
The location where it will be displayed (“Preferences editor”> “Graphic environment”>
“Rulers”> “Axis (Trihedron) size” (see details on page 462).
The trihedron size (“Preferences editor”> “Graphic environment”> “Rulers”> “Display
2D axis (2D Trihedron)”.or “Display 3D axis (3D Trihedron)” (see details on page 461)

9.1.3 The constraints


It is possible to choose to snap or not to snap the cursor on the nodes of the virtual grid of
the axis gradation (See “Snapping” on page 192). The toggling is set by clicking on the
icon in the Control Panel.

88 Reference Manual
While editing, Amapi Pro allows you to set movement constraints along one axis. A
constrained movement allows you to restrict the action of the current tool on one of the two
axis or set the action direction (See “Axis toggling” on page 193).
The toggling is set by clicking on one of the icon in the assistant palette (keyboard
shortcut: “Space-Bar”).
Amapi Pro proposes a series of “Advanced constraints” in a palette that the user can
choose to display or not by clicking on the toggle-icon integrated in the control panel.
(See “Advanced constraints” on page 194)
The “Alignment guides” tool allows you to create temporary alignment guides to
constrain the cursor while building 3D points. These guides are straight lines making
a singular angle (45 degrees, 90 degrees...) with the horizontal plane or a predefined
direction. These guides can be accumulated to allow singular line intersections. They can
also be oriented toward a specified axis. The control of these guides is entirely made with
the mouse. The guides disappear after each point created. The “Alignment guides” are
enabled by clicking on a toggle-icon in “The Control panel”. (See “Alignment guides” on
page 196)

9.1.4 The coordinates


The user can select to work in absolute mode, or in relative mode. (“Preferences editor”>
“Units”> “Relative coordinates” (see details on page 474).
Amapi Pro proposes to display or not to display the cursor coordinates along the axis
(“Preferences editor”> “Graphic environment”> “Rulers”> “Local gradation” (see details on
page 461).
The current parameter value can follow the cursor movement if selected (“Preferences
editor”> “Graphic environment” “Cursor”> “Cursor-parameter display” (see details on
page 463).

9.2 The working plane


The two axis the most parallel to the current view plane define the working plane, where
the modeling will be done. The target is to create points in 3D with a 2D mouse (or
equivalent). The user will have to change the viewpoint to change the working plane (See
“The Navigation” on page 135).

Amapi ProT M 89
Sometimes, it could be necessary to work in a plane other than the standard planes. To do
this, click on the icon in the Control Panel to select a new working plane (See “Scene /
orthonormal base toggling” on page 171).
In some cases, it can be interesting to work on the projection plane of the current view. This
method might make it easier to arrange objects in complex operations. To reach this, click on
the icon in the Control Panel (See “Working in the view plane” on page 169).

9.3 The orthogonal planes


The orthogonal planes displaying (xy), (xz) and (yz) can be useful for a better orientation in
the 3D graphic workspace. Specific preferences allow you to customize the display.
It is also possible to map images in these planes to:

• Make a support for drawing construction curves


It is possible to map an image of the object to be modelled on each plane, taken from two
different angles. Then, one would use the drawing tools to draw the object outlines on
each of the three planes. These curves can then be used to build the object in 3D.
• Place scenery to make an environment for the current scene.
(“Preferences editor”> “Graphic environment”> “Orthogonal planes”).

Construction of an object from its image projected onto the orthogonal planes.

90 Reference Manual
10
The objects

10.1 The Types of objects


There are two kinds of objects: “Curves” and “Surfaces / Volumes”.
Each object created in Amapi Pro is represented graphically by curves or surfaces. This
representation is slightly different whether the object is a polyhedron or a NURBS so that
only the editable elements of the object are shown.

10.1.1 Curves
A curve is an object made up of one or several lines. There are several kinds of lines.
Generally, they are defined by a set of points. But some of them may include one or several
parameters. Lines can be drawn in two or three dimensions. Circles, arcs, rectangles,
polylines, NURBS or interpolated curves are examples of lines (See “Line drawing” on
page 277).
Simple curve: Object made up of only one unique line.
Connected curves: Connected curves are several curves, where a curve has one end exactly
superimposed with one end of another curve.
Composite curve: A composite curve is an object made up of a series of several lines with a
connection linking the ending points.

Amapi ProT M 91
10.1.2 Surfaces / Volumes
A surface is made up of a set of facets. They can be drawn in two or three dimensions. Tubes
and grids are examples of surfaces. Volumes are closed surfaces. Spheres and cubes are
examples of volumes.

10.2 Object names


Amapi Pro gives a default name to each object created by the user. The user can then change
this name at any time.

10.2.1 Default name


The object default name is given by the tool it was built from followed by a creation order
number (See “The different levels of completion” on page 126).
See the following example:

Step #1: Step #2: Step #3: Step #4:


Draw a circle to be used Now, draw a path. The section is extruded Then, the object is
as the section. following the path. smoothed.
The object’s default name The object’s default name The object’s default name The object’s default name
is “Polyline 1” is “Polyline 2” is “Sweeping 1” is “Smoothing 1”

10.2.2 Changing the object name


The user can change the name at anytime during modeling. The name change is done in the
parameter palette when no tool is being used (See “Editing the parameters” on page 162).

92 Reference Manual
Two cases can be defined:

The user works on the renamed object with a multi-operations tool. Some tools work on
several objects (i.e: “Sweep”, “Cut”...).
The generated object gets a default name.
See the following example:

Step #1: Step #2: Step #3: Step #4:


Draw a circle to be used Now, draw a path. The section is extruded Then, the object is
as the section. following the path. smoothed.
The object’s default name The object’s default name The object’s default name The object’s default name
is “Polyline 1”. is “Polyline 2”. is “Sweeping 1” is “Smoothing 1”
It is renamed “Section” It is renamed “Profile” by
by the user. the user.

The user works on the renamed object with a one operand tool (except with dynamic
geometry). This is a tool works on only one object at a time (i.e: “Smooth”, “Chamfer”...):
The renamed object transfers its name to the generated object.
See the following example:

Step #1: Step #2: Step #3: Step #4:


The user draws a circle to Now, he or she draws a The section is extruded Then, the object is
be used as the section. path. following the path. smoothed.
The object’s default name The object’s default name The object’s default name The object’s keeps its
is “Polyline 1” is “Polyline 2” is “Sweeping 1” name “Vase”.
It is renamed “Vase” by
the user.
With Dynamic Geometry, the renamed objects will not transmit their name to the generated
object.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

Amapi ProT M 93
10.3 Open / closed objects
The difference between open objects and closed objects:

Open curve Closed curve

Open volume: an open volume may have Closed volume


one or several openings

10.4 Entity
Amapi Pro can works on the following entities:

object facets edges points

The notion of “group” notion can be added to the


first four notions.
A group is an element made up of 1 to n objects.
A selected group has the same behavior as a
selection of several objects.

In this example there is:


- the “small-cube” object
- the “Cylinder-cube” group made up of two objects
(“Cylinder” and “cube”)
(See “Group, Ungroup” on page 186)

It is possible to customize the display of the entities:


’“Preferences editor”> “Scene display”> “Entities display” (see details on page 465).

94 Reference Manual
10.5 Displaying the objects
Several display modes can be selected from the control panel.

The “Wireframe” mode

The “Lit Wireframe” mode

The “Flat Solid” mode

The “WireShade Flat Solid” mode

The “Smooth Solid” mode

The “WireShade Smooth Solid” mode

Display with transparency effect

Display without transparency

For more details, see “Objects display” (see details on page 180).

The display mode of NURBS is different whether the application NURBS mode is set to
polyhedral or NURBS. “Polygonal or NURBS Models” (see details on page 96):
When NURBS mode is on, points and edges cannot be edited, thus they are not
displayed.
A NURBS curve will be represented as a continuous curve.
Isoparametric curves, contours and trimming curves will appear on NURBS surfaces.
When NURBS mode is off, points and edges are displayed on NURBS curves and
surfaces. They can be used as reference points or edges for building new objects.
However, they are not fully editable.
(See “The NURBS models” on page 98)

Amapi ProT M 95
10.6 Polygonal or NURBS Models
Amapi Pro allows you to build curves, surfaces or volumes with either a polygonal or a
NURBS method.
It is important to understand the fundamental difference between these two kinds of models
in order to select the construction mode which best fits the project.
Polygonal modeling is fast and well adapted to modeling low resolution organic shapes used
for illustration, video games, architecture.
NURBS modeling allows you to create mathematically exact curves or surfaces independent
of resolution. Although NURBS surfaces are more difficult to manipulate than polyhedral
shapes, NURBS provide the accuracy necessary to the CAD or even CAM process.
Most of Amapi Pro’s tools work in both modes almost transparently.
• “The Polyhedral models” (see details on page 97).
• “The NURBS models” (see details on page 98).
Amapi Pro allows you to transform models NURBS to Polygons and inversely (see details
on page 105).

10.6.1 Change the construction mode


The construction mode defines:
•The type of model to build (“Polygonal or NURBS Models”).
•The display mode (see details on page 95)
•The entity selection mode (See “Selection” on page 147)
The default working mode is the global construction mode (for all objects and tools).
The user can change the construction mode while using a tool. This will be a local construc-
tion mode.
• Local switching will be done by clicking on the toggle-icon displayed in the tool option
panel of the tool that propose this option.
• Global switching can be done:
• By clicking on the construction mode icon in the control panel. “Polygonal or
NURBS Models” (see details on page 96).
• From the Tools menu.
• By using the “Crtl-B” shortcut.
A global switch while using a tool also forces the switch of the local mode.
Some tools create objects from existing objects. The result of such tools will be a NURBS only if
the original objects are NURBS and if the construction mode is NURBS.

96 Reference Manual
10.6.2 The Polyhedral models

10.6.2.1 What is a polyhedral model?


A Polyhedral model is defined by a set of editable points, depicting the object topology.
A polygonal curve is defined by a set of points connected by edges.
A polyhedral surface is a set of adjacent planar polygonal facets. Each facet is delimited by
its edges. Each edge is defined by its two points.
An edge cannot belong to more than two facets. In such a case, the object is called
“degenerated”.
Each entity (point, edge or facet) can be edited directly. They can be moved, removed or
split (edges and facets).

Polygonal curve Polygonal Surface

10.6.2.2 Create a polygonal model


The user will select the polygonal mode when starting to draw curves or to build
surfaces or volumes (See “Change the construction mode” on page 96).
The tool will generate only one Dynamic Geometry level (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)”
on page 109).

10.6.2.3 Edit a polygonal model


In edit mode, the user will work directly on the points, edges or facets describing the object.

Amapi ProT M 97
10.6.3 The NURBS models

10.6.3.1 What is a NURBS model?


A NURBS (Non Uniform Rational B-Spline) model is a parametric curve or surface defined
by control points, a nodal sequence and a degree. The curve or surface is automatically
tesselated to give a smoothed shape. This shape is not editable. While moving the points of
the “control” shape, the smoothed curve or surface aspect will change. This kind of model is
very often used in CAD/CAM because it allows you to create exact surfaces.

The tesselation is an operation consisting in creating a polygonal or polyhedral


representation of the theoretical NURBS model. This operation is performed automatically
in two cases: during display (because graphic languages are not able to display NURBS) and
during export to file formats which do not support NURBS. A tesselation occurs also when a
NURBS model is converted to a polyhedral model by hand.

NURBS curve and its control line NURBS surface and its control grid

98 Reference Manual
10.6.3.2 NURBS Curve
A NURBS curve is defined by its control points, a degree and a nodal sequence.
Control points are a set of 3D points created Control points (user defined)
by the curve creation tool. They act like mag- control polyline
nets on the curve, but the curve does not pass NURBS curve
though these points (except for the first and
last points and when the degree is 1). The
curve’s shape can be changed by moving the
control points.

The degree of a NURBS curve is linked to


the number of control points having an effect
on the curve at a given position. It defines the Control points (user defined)
NURBS curve of degree 1
number of nodal points. A degree of 1 gives a NURBS of degree2
broken line going through the control points. NURBS of degree 3
A degree of 3 gives a smoother curve moving
slightly away from each control point. The
higher the degree, the lower the influence of
each control point. The curve will therefore be
smoother as it moves away from the control
points.
The nodal sequence defines the influence of each control point on the curve. During the
curve creation, all points have the same influence except the first and last points. By adding
a nodal point to the sequence, the curve can be adjusted locally or breaks can be added. Add-
ing nodal points can be done using the “Polygonal or NURBS Models” (see details on
page 96) tool..
Control points Control points
Curve with 4 nodal knots Curve with 5 nodal knots
Deformed Curve with 4 nodal knots Deformed Curve with 5 nodal knots

Stretched Stretched
control control
point point

Stretching the same NURBS curve with different nodal knots gives different result.

Amapi ProT M 99
The NURBS curve display mode depends on the global operating mode “Polygonal or
NURBS Models” (see details on page 96).
When the global operating mode is
NURBS, a NURBS curve is represented by a
smoothed line. As opposed to polygonal lines,
points are not displayed on NURBS curves. In
fact, the NURBS curve can be «evaluated» by
every point of its curve.

When the global operating mode is Polyhe-


dral, points are displayed on NURBS curves.
These points can be used as construction Nodal points
points for other operations but cannot be Intermediate points

edited directly. The number of points dis-


played depends on the range parameter
defined during the curve creation. The range
is the number of edges displayed between two
nodes (see details on page 293). The
“Smooth” tool can be used to change the
range of the curve and thus to change the
number of points displayed.
(See “Tesselation parameters of NURBS objects” on page 104).
The range is used only for :
• Transforming a NURBS curve into a polygonal curve.
• Displaying the curve.
• Exporting the curve to polygonal formats.
• Collapsing dynamic geometry.

100 Reference Manual


10.6.3.3 NURBS Surface
A NURBS surface is defined similarly to a NURBS curve by its control points, a degree and
a nodal sequence.
A NURBS surface is always defined by a
rectangular control point grid. This grid is
deformed to fit the desired shape. Control Control points grid
points act like magnets on the NURBS sur-
face. By moving control points, the NURBS
NURBS Surface
surface can be deformed but the surface does
not pass through the control points (except for
extremities and when the degree is 1).

Obviously a grid cannot represent every type


of surface. Contours and holes are created by
projecting curves on the NURBS surface.
These curves are called «trimming» curves.
Trimming hole
Amapi Pro’s cut tools are used to manually
create these trimming curves. Several tools
will automatically create the contours and
trimming curves on a surface.

The degrees of a NURBS surface are linked


to the number of control points that have an
effect on the NURBS surface for any given point. There are two degrees: one for the U
direction of the control point grid, the other for the V direction of the control point grid. This
defines the number of nodal points. A degree of 1 gives a broken line going through the con-
trol points. A degree of 3 gives a smoother curve moving slightly away from each control
point. The higher the degree, the lower the influence of each control point and thus the curve
will be smoother as it moves away from the control points.
The Nodal sequence defines the influence of each control point on the surface. There are
two knot vectors: one for the U direction of the control point grid and one for the V direction
of the control point grid. At creation time, all the points have the same influence on the sur-
face except border points. By adding a nodal point to the sequence, the curve can be adjusted
locally or breaks can be added.

Amapi ProT M 101


The NURBS surface display mode depends on the global operating mode “Polygonal or
NURBS Models” (see details on page 96).

When the global operating mode is


NURBS, a NURBS surface is represented by
Isoparametric curves
a smoothed surface delimited by contour lines
and two central isoparametric curves, allow-
ing you to best view the surface shape. Only
the contours can be edited. Isoparametric
curves cannot be edited. As opposed to poly-
hedral surfaces, tesselation points and edges
are not displayed on NURBS surfaces.

When the global operating mode is Polyhe-


dral, points and edges are displayed on
NURBS surface. These points and edges can
be used as construction entities for other oper-
ations but cannot be directly edited.
The number of points and edges displayed
depends on the range parameter defined dur-
ing the curve creation. The range is the num-
ber of edges displayed between two nodes
(see details on page 293). The “Smooth” tool
can be used to change the range of the surface and thus to change the number of points dis-
played.
(See “Tesselation parameters of NURBS objects” on page 104).

The range is used only for :


• Transforming a NURBS curve into a polygonal curve.
• Displaying the curve.
• Exporting the curve to polygonal formats.
• Collapsing dynamic geometry.

102 Reference Manual


10.6.3.4 BREP: «watertight» surfaces and volumes
A BREP (Boundary Representation) is an object made up of one or several NURBS surfaces
and topological links corresponding to the borders and intersections of these surfaces. A
BREP can be open or closed.
BREPs are useful for representing contiguous surfaces defining «watertight» or «crack-free»
assemblies. This property allows you to export objects to CAD/CAM systems. Several
Amapi Pro tools can create BREPs.
In fact, every NURBS surface in Amapi Pro is contained in a BREP.

Example of BREP.

The BREP display is not «crack free». Holes may appear near the intersection of NURBS
surfaces of a BREP. Representing a crack-free BREP requires adapting the tesselation to the
current view. This action is time consuming and will significantly impact overall display
performance.

BREPs with more than one face cannot be edited like simple NURBS surfaces. In fact,
editing the control points of the contained NURBS surfaces would require recomputing the
topological links. This process is very time consuming, so it cannot be made in real time. Editing
the control points of a BREP requires dissociating its faces first.

10.6.3.5 Create a NURBS model


The user will select the NURBS mode when starting to draw curves or to build
surfaces or volumes (See “Change the construction mode” on page 96).
The tool will generate two Dynamic Geometry levels corresponding to the object and its
control shape (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

Amapi ProT M 103


10.6.3.6 Edit a NURBS model
A NURBS is controlled by a control shape which is a polyline for a curve or a grid for a
volume.
This control shape level is just under the NURBS level in Dynamic Geometry hierarchy (see
details on page 109). This level will be used to edit a NURBS object.
The object deformation will follow the control shape modifications.
The difference with the polygonal editing is that in NURBS mode the user doesn’t work on
the object itself, but on its control shape.

Stretch a point Stretch a point on the control shape


on a polygonal object of a NURBS object
(in NURBS mode)
Nodal knots can be inserted, degrees can be changed and breaks can be created using the
tesselation tool..
BREPs with more than one face cannot be edited like simple NURBS surfaces. Actually,
editing the control points of the contained NURBS surfaces would require recomputing the
topological links. This process is very time consuming, so it cannot be made in real time. Editing
the control points of a BREP requires dissociating its faces first.

10.6.3.7 Tesselation parameters of NURBS objects


NURBS objects have several tesselation parameters used for display, transformation to
polygonal objects and export to polygonal files formats. Two tesselation modes are available
for the surfaces:
• “Standard NURBS Tesselation” (see details on page 370) with constant subdivisions
which creates regular polygons which are independent of the surface curvature. This
method is fast but does not keep the connection between adjacent surfaces. We say that it
is not crack-free. We set a range in U and V which corresponds to the number of created
points between two nodal values. This is the default mode.
• “Adaptive NURBS Tesselation” (see details on page 371) (crack-free) which creates
more polygons with strong curvatures and respects criteria for precise tolerance. This
method is slower than the preceding one but of better quality and the resulting surfaces
are crack-free. You can set several parameters such as the maximum chord distance

104 Reference Manual


between the theoretical surface and generated surface in order to guarantee a good sur-
face approximation. You will also be able to specify geometric conditions defining the
general shape of the polygons created in order to obtain the most regular meshes possi-
ble.
You can set the default tesselation and its parameters to create objects in Amapi Pro (See
“Preferences editor” on page 451). You will also be able to configure tesselation parameters
for independent export. This will allow you to adapt the precision of the tesselation to the
export type. The tesselation of each object can be individually set with the “Tesselate” (see
details on page 367) tool.

10.6.3.8 Transform a Polyhedral model into a NURBS model /


a NURBS model into a Polygonal model

Transform a NURBS model into a Polyhedral model


It is possible to transform a NURBS model into a polygonal model by collapsing its
Dynamic Geometry (See “Collapsing a model built from NURBS” on page 120). This
tesselates the NURBS to create a polyhedral model by using the tesselation range.

Transform a Polyhedral model into a NURBS model


It is possible to transform a NURBS model into a polyhedral model by creating, for each
facet of the object, a NURBS surface while keeping the topological connections facet/edges
of the original surface. The resulting object is a BREP that can be used as input for complex
NURBS operations.
This action can be accessed from the object information dialog (See “Information”
on page 187)
If the object is a curve, Amapi Pro adds a Dynamic Geometry level corresponding to a 1
degree NURBS curve above the original curve.
If the object is a surface, the resulting object will be a BREP (see details on page 103) which
can then be used for any complex operation on NURBS.
When working in NURBS mode, all the basic primitives (cube, tetrahedron...) are all built
on this model.
This operation can be applied on DG operations such as boolean operations (See “Cut” on
page 354).
The tool and the Dynamic Geometry (DG) :
This tool adds a DG level to the object.
The "Convert to NURBS" function adds a DG level labeled "Converted".
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

When applied to objects with many facets, this action can be very slow and create objects that
are difficult to manage.

Amapi ProT M 105


10.7 The objects with a grid-structure
(Quad mesh)
An object with a grid-structure (Quad mesh) has been built from a deformed grid. This grid
can be open or closed.

A “Grid structure” object may be closed or not in U and/or in V:

Grid structure Grid structure Grid structure Grid structure


not closed closed in U closed in V closed in U and in V
(Cylinder) (Torus)

The different kinds of closure can be:


• The curves are closed in U or in V (such as Cylinder).
• The curves are closed in U and in V (such as Torus).
The tools which generate grid-structure objects:
• “Cone” (see details on page 266)
• “Cylinder” (see details on page 267)
• “Bump/Soften” (see details on page 385)
• “Sweep” with “Section and profile from curves” (see details on page 310).

The tools which generate grid-structure objects create a first DG level labeled Grid
Structure. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The “Close” tool allows you to edit the connections and closures of the grid-structure
objects (see details on page 401).

The editor tools, which modify the object topology, destroy its grid-structure (See “Behavior
of the tools regarding the DG” on page 128).

106 Reference Manual


10.8 The clones
In some tools (“Duplicate” and “Symmetry”...) Amapi Pro gives you the opportunity to
generate cloned objects.
Clones are strictly identical objects which refer to one and only one unique geometry.
Editing one of them automatically edits all of its clones.
The difference between cloned or non-cloned objects will be fundamental as you begin a
modeling operation.

Do not clone Clone

Option The tool generates independent The tool generates objects which refer
description objects. Each object has its own to the same geometry.
geometry (even if they are identical).

Illustration

Non-cloned objects Cloned objects

Deforming a non-cloned object. Deforming a cloned object.


The other objects are not modified All the clones will have the same warping

To extract a cloned object from a group of clones:


• Cut the cloned object (Ctrl+X)
• Paste the object (Ctrl+V) (This kind of copy never generates clones)

Amapi ProT M 107


108 Reference Manual
11
Dynamic Geometry (DG)

11.1 The concept


Dynamic Geometry is a concept that increases the power and the flexibility of Amapi Pro.
Each step in the object's creation is saved. The user is able to edit any curve or surface it is
made up of. Amapi Pro will automatically reflect these changes up to the finished model.
These curves or surfaces can be viewed as control shapes.
Dynamic Geometry with a simple example:

Stretched
Profile Point

Section

Step #1: Step #2: Step #3: Step #4:


Draw two construction Extrude the section Then smooth the If the result is not satisfying
curves. along the profile. object. enough, modify the shape of
Amapi Pro keeps the Amapi Pro keeps the the profile curve. This
construction curves. extruded object. modification automatically and
interactively updates the
extrusion and the smoothing.

A toggle-icon from the Control Panel allows you to choose to work with or without
Dynamic Geometry:
Work without Dynamic Geometry
Work with Dynamic Geometry

Amapi ProT M 109


If the user chooses not to work with Dynamic Geometry, he or she will be able to edit a
curve or a construction surface only after having cancelled all the modeling steps he or she
has performed since the creation of construction curves. He or she will have to resume his
work of modeling starting from this step.

Same example as above but, this time, without working with Dynamic Geometry:

Profile

Section

Step #1: Step #2: Step #3: Step #4:


Draw two construction Extrude the section Then smooth the If the result is not
curves along the profile. object. satisfying enough,
modify the shape of the
profile curve. Cancel
the action of the two
last steps (Undo twice)
to find the construction
curves.

Stretched
Point

Step #5: Step #6: Step #7:


Modify the shape of the profile Extrude the section along the Then smooth the object.
curve. profile

This short example shows how much DG can help to save time and improve quality and
efficiency, when applied to much more complex models.

110 Reference Manual


11.2 The DG Tree
11.2.1 The shapes hierarchy
When working with DG, Amapi Pro will record the modeling steps.
Dynamic Geometry can be represented as a tree where each node corresponds to an action
and each branch is an intermediate state of the final object (see details on page 126).

• The root of this tree is the finished object.


• All the branches correspond to the intermediate states.
• The leaves are the control shapes.
• The DG level indicates the height in this tree, the highest level being the root of the tree.
Example of the DG levels for the vase:
Tools used

“Smooth” Level #3

Smoothing (finished object)

“Sweep” Level #2

Sweeping (intermediate shape)

“Polyline” Level #1

Polyline 1 (control shape) Polyline 2 (control shape)

The default name of a shape depends directly on the tools it has been built with. It
corresponds to the name of its intermediate state followed by a number sequence. (See “The
different levels of completion” on page 126). Obviously the user will be able to rename
every shape (See “Renaming a shape” on page 116).

Amapi ProT M 111


In our example Amapi Pro named the shapes by default:

the first line (the section) “Polyline 1”


the second line (the profile) “Polyline 2”
the shape resulting from the
“Sweeping 1”
sweeping
the shape resulting from the
“Smoothing 1”
smoothing

11.2.2 The notion of path and current shape


The complexity of this tree representing the DG of an object will depend on the complexity
of the object. We will continue the example of the vase by adding a handle.

Step #1: Step #2: Step #3: Step #4:


Draw a circle. Add thickness. Smooth the object. Use of the Cut tool to
make a Boolean
operation on the two
objects (vase and
handle).

In our example Amapi Pro names the shapes as follows:

the circle “Polyline 3”


the thick shape “Thickness 1”
the smoothed shape “Smoothing 2”
the cut shape “Cut 1”

(See “The different levels of completion” on page 126)

112 Reference Manual


Here is the tree corresponding to Dynamic Geometry of the new object:

Level #4 Cut 1

Cut 1

Smoothing
Level #3
2

Smoothing 1 Smoothing 2

Thickness
Level #2
1

Sweeping 1 Thickness 1

Current
Level #1 Polyline 3 selection

Polyline 1 Polyline 2 Polyline 3

Current path
Other paths

In order to simplify the DG palette, Amapi Pro displays only the path of the tree passing
through the current selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147). It is called the
“Current Path”.
The shapes belonging to this path are called the “Current Shapes”.
In the above example, the current shape of level #2 is “Thickness 1”.

Amapi ProT M 113


For each level, the DG palette will display:

• The sequence level number. Label Number sequence of


the level
• A graphic label allowing the user to recognize the state
of completion of the shape. (See “The different levels of
completion” on page 126) Name of the shape
• The shape name of the current level.
4. Cut 1
In the preceding example the current selection is
"Polyline 3" (the circle controlling the construction of the 3. Smoothing 2
handle) The DG palette will display the corresponding path.
2. Thickness 1

1. Polyline 3

If the current selection contains several objects belonging to 4. Cut 1


different paths, Amapi Pro will be unable to choose a
complete "Current Path". In such a case the DG palette will 3. Multi-Selection
display "Multi-Selection" instead of the name of the
2. Multi-Selection
current shape.
To illustrate this, we will suppose that, in the preceding 1. Multi-Selection
example, the shapes "Polyline 2" and "Polyline 3" are both
selected. Then the DG palette displays the corresponding
information.

The user can view the complete tree by opening the object information window by pressing on
the icon from the control panel (See “Dynamic Geometry tree” on page 189).

114 Reference Manual


11.3 Manipulating DG
11.3.1 The DG palette
We saw that Dynamic Geometry is a tree where the root is the finished object and the leaves
are the control shapes (See “The shapes hierarchy” on page 111).
We also saw that in order to simplify the display, the DG palette represents only the path of
the tree passing through the current selection (See “The notion of path and current shape” on
page 112).

Label of Number sequence of Visible


completion the level
Hidden
Name of the shape
Icons allowing to collapse the DG

3. Smoothing 1

2. Sweeping 1

1. Polyline 2
Interactive display of the result.

Delayed display of the result.

Current level Deletes the highest


level of DG

The DG palette corresponding to the vase example on page 111.

Available actions are;

• “Browsing the palette” (see details on page 116)


• “Selecting the working level” (see details on page 116)
• “Renaming a shape” (see details on page 116)
• “Showing/Hiding a level” (see details on page 117)
• “Collapsing the DG” (see details on page 118)
• “Editing a DG level” (see details on page 123)
• “Deleting the highest DG level” (see details on page 125)
• “Displaying the result in interactive / delayed mode” (see details on page 125)
The display of Dynamic Geometry palette can be controlled from this icon located in
the Control Panel (See “Manage the optional palettes display” on page 168).

Amapi ProT M 115


11.3.2 Browsing the palette
Amapi Pro does not limit the number of DG
levels but it displays only five levels at the same 7. Smoothing
time. In majority of cases this will be enough.
In rare cases when the user will have generated
generated more than five levels, the palette will 5. Cut
always display: 4. Twist
• the first and the last levels (in the example the
1st and 7th) 3. Sweeping
• and three intermediate levels (in the example
3rd, 4th and 5th).
1. Polyline
A scroller allows you to go up or down in the
hierarchy.

11.3.3 Selecting the working level


The working level, highlighted by a red frame, corresponds to the level the user is working
on. Available actions are:
• “Editing a DG level” (see details on page 123).
• “Collapsing the DG” (see details on page 118).
• “Renaming a shape” (see details on page 116).
Amapi Pro always sets a default working level. The user will be able to select another level
by clicking on the label corresponding to the selected level.

11.3.4 Renaming a shape


The shape default name depends on the tools it was built with. It corresponds to the
finishing state followed by a number sequence (See “The different levels of completion” on
page 126).
The user will be able to change the name of the object during any step of modeling.
Editing the name is done in the parameter palette (See “The Parameters” on page 161).
Notice that the parameter palette displays the name of the shape at the current working level.

116 Reference Manual


To rename a shape, make sure that:
3. Smoothing 1
• The shape to rename is the “current shape”
2. Sweeping 1
(See “The notion of path and current shape”
on page 112). 1. Polyline 2
• The “working level” is set at the level of the
shape to rename (See “Selecting the working In this example the user can rename the
shape named by default “Sweeping 1”.
level” on page 116).
Name editing is done in the parameter
Editing the name is done in the parameters palette palette
(See “Editing the parameters” on page 162).
Sweeping 1

11.3.5 Showing/Hiding a level


Amapi Pro displays by default, in the graphic workspace, the finished shape and the control
shape only (See “Selecting the working level” on page 116).
However, the user will be able to choose to hide or show intermediate shapes.
A toggle-icon allows you to switch on/off the visibility.
Visible level
Hidden level

If a real time display is selected, it should be noted that the fact of hiding one or more DG
levels can accelerate the display significantly.
If, for particularly complex objects, the user considers that the display time is still too long
he or she can change the display up to the tool validation stage (See “Displaying the result in
interactive / delayed mode” on page 125).

Amapi ProT M 117


Once more, let us take the example of the vase as seen on page 111:

The working (current) level is


the level #1 (it is highlighted). 3. Smoothing 1
Amapi Pro displays the first
2. Sweeping 1
and the last DG levels by
default. 1. Polyline 2

It will often be interesting to


display all the shapes 3.Smoothing 1
corresponding to the three
2. Sweeping 1
levels of DG.
1. Polyline 2

In some cases it could be


clearer to hide a level to 3. Smoothing 1
simplify the display. The user
2. Sweeping 1
chooses to hide the level #3 of
DG. 1. Polyline 2

In this last example, the user


chooses to hide the levels #2 3. Smoothing 1
and #3 of DG in order to see
2. Sweeping 1
only the control shapes.
1. Polyline 2

11.3.6 Collapsing the DG


The user will be able to choose to collapse the DG on a portion of the current path. The
purpose of this operation is to make one of the intermediate shapes editable.
It removes the DG levels under the selected shape. The shape corresponding to this level
will simultaneously lose its dynamic characteristics and will become an editable control
shape (See “The first level of finishing (control shapes)” on page 126).

The user will indicate the level to collapse by clicking on the icon facing it.

118 Reference Manual


11.3.6.1 Collapsing a Polygonal model
once more, let us take the example of the vase as seen on page 111:
1) All the objects
corresponding to the 3. Smoothing 1
three levels of DG are 2. Sweeping 1
displayed.
Only the curves of 1. Polyline 2
level #1 are editable

2) A DG collapse from
level #2 (Sweeping) 3. Smoothing 1
has been requested. 2. Sweeping 1
Level #1 (Polyline) is
removed. 1. Polyline 2
The shape correspond-
ing to Sweeping loses Clic

its dynamic character-


istics and becomes an
editable control shape
(Structure of a grid) of 2. Smoothing 1
level #1. 1. Sweeping 1

3) The DG has been col-


lapsed from level #2
(Smoothing). 2. Smoothing 1
Level #1 (Structure of a
grid) is removed. 1. Grid structure
The shape correspond-
ing to Smoothing loses Clic

its dynamic character-


istics and then becomes
an editable object
(polyhedral Volume).
1. Smoothing 1

Amapi ProT M 119


11.3.6.2 Collapsing a model built from NURBS
The shapes generated with NURBS tools have a particularity explained in the example
below.

We will use the example of a vase again. But this time, it will be made starting from a
section and a NURBS profile.
Note that, in this case, the control shapes of the NURBS curves are editable.

Sweeping 1 Level #3

Sweeping 1
(finished object)

NURBS
Level #2
Curve 2

NURBS curve 1 NURBSNURBS curve 2


(intermediate shape) (intermediate shape)

Current
selection
Polyline 2 Level #1

Polyline 1 Polyline 2
(control shape) (control shape)

Current path
Other paths

120 Reference Manual


Amapi Pro creates, for this type of object, a NURBS control polygon.
This NURBS control polygon does not appear in the DG tree.

The tree below represents the finished object (Sweeping 1) controlled by the control polygon
computed by Amapi Pro.

NURBS Volume 1 Level #2

Sweeping 1
(finished object)

Grid Structure 1 Level #1

Grid Structure 1
(control shape)

The only way to control the object with the control polygon is to collapse the DG. The
icon shows this possibility.

Amapi ProT M 121


We will illustrate this process with the preceding example:

1) All the objects


corresponding to the 3. Sweeping 1
three levels of DG are 2. NURBS Curve 2
displayed.
Only the curves of 1. Polyline 2
level #1 are editable.

2) A DG collapse from
level NURBS#3 has 3. Sweeping 1
been requested. Levels 2. NURBS Curve 2
#1 and #2 are removed
and replaced by a 1. Polyline 2
NURBS surface. This
Click
is the control shape of
the final object.
2. Sweeping 1

1. Grid-structure

3) Now, it is possible to
collapse the NURBS
surface by clicking on 2. Sweeping 1
the level corresponding
to NURBS surface 1. Grid-structure
(level #2).
Click
Amapi Pro removes
level #1 and the
NURBS Surface is
transformed into a
polyhedral Surface 1. Sweeping 1
(editable finished
object).
This second collapsing
deletes the NURBS
properties of the object.

122 Reference Manual


11.3.7 Editing a DG level
It is very important to understand that only the lowest level of DG (level #1) is completely
editable by the editing tools. The higher levels carry out topological modifications. Their
effects will be reflected in all the higher levels and to the clones (See “The clones” on
page 107). The “Stretch”, “Mold”, “Weld”, “Rotate”, “Scale” and “Delete” tools are
examples of editing-tools. (See “Behavior of the tools regarding the DG” on page 128).
To edit another level, the user will have to collapse the DG. The shape corresponding to this
level will simultaneously lose its dynamic attributes and will become an editable control
shape (See “Collapsing the DG” on page 118).
1) Only the curves of
4. Cut 1
level #1 are editable. In
the example, polyline 3 3. Smoothing 2
(construction circle of
2. Thickness 1
the handle) is scaled.
The effects of the 1. Polyline 3
editing is automatically
applied to the finished
objects. Editing of the circle with
the “Scale” tool

2) A DG collapse from
4. Cut 1
level #4 (Cutting) has
been requested. The 3. Smoothing 2
level #1, #2 and #3 are
2. Thickness 1
removed. The shape
corresponding to 1. Polyline 3
Smoothing loses its Click
dynamic attributes and
then becomes an
editable finished object
(polyhedral Volume). 1. polyhedral Vol

Editing of the finished object with


the “Mold” tool

Amapi ProT M 123


The “Snap/Align”, “Rotate”, “Scale” and “Move” tools can edit a shape at any level of
DG.
Once more we will use the example of the vase. This time we will consider that the "current
selection" is the shape Polyline 1. The DG palette will thus display a different "current path"
(see below).
3) Only the curves of
4. Cut 1
level #1 are editable.
The user clicks on the 3. Smoothing 1
DG level #2 so that it
2. Sweeping 1
becomes "current
level". 1. Polyline 1
The shape Sweeping 1
Click
becomes thus editable.
It is automatically 4. Cut 1
made visible.
3. Smoothing 1

2. Sweeping 1

1. Polyline 1

4) The user then asks to


4. Cut 1
scale the shape
Sweeping 1 vertically. 3. Smoothing 1
The “Scale” tool
2. Sweeping 1
applies a scaling to the
entire Sweeping 1 1. Polyline 1
shape.
The effect of the
scaling is automatically
applied up to the
finished object. Editing of level 2 of DG
with the “Scale” tool

124 Reference Manual


11.3.8 Deleting the highest DG level
This icon in the
lower right corner of 3. Smoothing 1
3. Lissage 1
the DG palette removes the
2. Sweeping 1
highest level of DG. 2. Tubage 1
1. Polyline 2
1. Polyligne 2

Clic

2. Sweeping 1

1. Polyline 2

11.3.9 Displaying the result in interactive / delayed


mode
When a shape is being edited by a tool such as the Stretch tool, Amapi Pro updates all
the levels of DG for any mouse event. For complex objects, this real time update may
become too slow. The following toggle-icon delays the updating until the first mouse release
event:
Interactive display of the result
Delayed display of the result

Interactive
display of the

Before While After validation


transformation transforming of the transformation

Delayed display
of the result

Before While After validation


transformation transforming of the transformation

Amapi ProT M 125


11.3.10 The different levels of completion
The levels of completion informs the user of the type of object it is handling. It depends
directly on the tools that object was built with. It is identified by a graphic "label" and the
"name".
The default name of an object depends directly on its state of completion (See “Object names”
on page 92).

11.3.10.1 The first level of finishing (control shapes)


Labels and wordings Types of objects

Polyline •“Rectangle / Square”


•“Circle”
•“Polyline”
•“Helicoid”
•“Extract Lines”

Polyhedral Volume •“Sphere”


•“Cube”
•“Tetrahedron”
•“Octahedron”
•“Icosahedron”
•“Dodecahedron”
(See “The Polyhedral models” on page 97)

Grid structure •“Cone”


•“Cylinder”
(See “The objects with a grid-
•“Bump/Soften”
structure (Quad mesh)” on
page 106) •“Grid”

Text “Text”
Deformation box The objects being deformed with the “Bend”, “Twist” or “Taper” options
proposed in the “Deform” tool replace the DG of the object by a
Dynamic Geometry level corresponding to “The meshed control box
editing accessories” (see details on page 376)

Parameter(s) Editable parameters.

126 Reference Manual


11.3.10.2 The intermediate levels of finishing
Labels and wordings Types of objects

NURBS curve “Curve controlled by a polyline

Interpolated curve “Interpolated curve”

Composite curve Curves them by composite connections:


(See “Composite (curve)” on page 482)(See “Close” on page 400)

Arc “Arc”

Sweeping Object being extruded using the “Sweep” tool (Extrusion or Sweeping
option).

Double Sweep Shapes obtained with the “Double Sweep” tool starting from a basic
section and two profiles.
Ruled Surfaces “Ruled Surface”

Coons Surfaces “Coons Surface”

Gordon Surfaces “Gordon surface”

Manifold Volume Object obtained with the “Manifold” tool, starting from NURBS surfaces
which delimits the future volume.
Deformation Objects being deformed with the “Deform” tool.

Smoothing Objects being smoothed with the “Smooth” tool.

Chamfer Result of one of the chamfers proposed by the “Chamfer” tool.

Bending Object bent with the “Bend” tool.

Thickness Object thickened with the “Thickness/Offset” tool and the “Give a
thickness” option.

Cut Object changed by an operation of cutting with the “Cut” tool.

Height field Object transformed with the “Bump/Soften” tool.


Group Objects grouped with the “Group” tool located in the Control panel.
A group will always be at the highest level of DG.
NURBS Volume NURBS shape obtained by DG collapse of a shape built starting from
NURBS curves.

Poly-NURBS NURBS shape which can be manipulated like a polyhedron.


The platonic NURBS (“Tetrahedron”, “Dodecahedron”, “Octahedron”
and “Icosahedron”) and the polyhedral objects transformed in NURBS
(see details on page 105) generate a “Poly-NURBS” DG level.

Multi-Selection If there are two selections not belonging to the same path, Amapi Pro is
not able to choose a complete "current path". In such a case the DG
palette will display "Multi-Selection" labels.

Amapi ProT M 127


11.3.11 Behavior of the tools regarding the DG
Overview of the behavior of the tools regarding Dynamic Geometry for each palette.

There are five categories of tools:

• The tools that add a DG level.


For example all the tools of the construction palette add a DG level.
Some tools can insert a DG level between two existing levels.
The “Smooth”, “Chamfer”, “Bump/Soften” tools add a DG level.

• The tools that transmit the DG to the generated object.


“Duplicate”, “Symmetry” are examples of tools which transmit the DG.

• The tools which edit the 1st DG level.


The edit-tools carry out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at the
higher levels and to the clones.
“Snap/Align”, “Delete”, “Mold”, “Weld”, “Rotate”, “Close”, “Scale” and “Stretch” tools
are examples of edit-tools.
“Snap/Align”, “Rotate” and “Scale” tools edit the entire shape at any level of DG.
(See “Editing a DG level” on page 123).

• The tools which preserve the DG.


“Move” and “Lay on” tools modify only the position of the shape, they thus do not make
any topological modifications. They can be applied to any DG level. Their effects will be
reflected at the higher levels.

• The rare tools which collapse the DG (See “Collapsing the DG” on page 118).
“Decimate” and some functions proposed by the “Information” tool are DG collapsers.

128 Reference Manual


11.3.11.1 The tools of the construction palette
Tools Generates a DG level Other behaviors
Labels and wording

“Surface and volume primitives”

Polyhedral “Cube”

Polyhedral “Cube” polyhedral volume

NURBS “Cube” Poly-NURBS

polyhedral volume

NURBS Pole-“Cube” NURBS Volume

Grid structure

“Sphere”

Polyhedral “pole-sphere” polyhedral volume

NURBS “pole-sphere” NURBS volume

polyhedral volume

NURBS “geodesic Sphere” not available

“Cone”

Polyhedral “Cone” polyhedral volume

NURBS “Cone” NURBS volume


Grid structure

“Cylinder”

Polyhedral “Cylinder” polyhedral volume


NURBS “Cylinder” NURBS volume

Grid structure

“Tetrahedron”
Polyhedral “Tetrahedron” polyhedral volume

NURBS “Tetrahedron” Poly-NURBS

polyhedral volume

“Octahedron”

Polyhedral “Octahedron” polyhedral volume

Amapi ProT M 129


NURBS “Octahedron” Poly-NURBS

polyhedral volume

“Icosahedron”

Polyhedral “Icosahedron” polyhedral volume

NURBS “Icosahedron” Poly-NURBS

polyhedral volume

“Dodecahedron”

Polyhedral “Dodecahedron” polyhedral volume


NURBS “Dodecahedron” Poly-NURBS

polyhedral volume

“Bump/Soften” Grid structure

“Grid”

“Grid” polyhedral Grid structure

“Grid” NURBS NURBS volume


Grid structure

“Text” Text

“Line drawing”
“Rectangle / Square”

Polyhedral “Rectangle / Square” Polyline

NURBS “Rectangle / Square” NURBS curve


Polyline

“Circle”

Polyhedral “Circle” Polyline

NURBS “Circle” NURBS curve

Polyline

“Arc” Arc

Parameter(s)

“Polyline” Polyline

Polyhedral “Polyline” Polyline


NURBS “Polyline” NURBS curve

Polyline (of control)

130 Reference Manual


“Curve” NURBS curve

Polyline (of control)

“Interpolated curve” Interpolated curve

Polyline (of control))

“Helix” Polyline

Polyhedral “Helix” Polyline

NURBS “Helix” Not available

“Connexion composite” Composite curve


“Extract Lines”

Polyhedral “Extract Lines” Polyligne

NURBS “Extract Lines” NURBS curve

Polyline (of control)

“Extract Facets”

Polyhedral “Extract Facets” polyhedral volume


NURBS “Extract Facets” NURBS Volume

Grid structure

“Sweep” Sweeping
“Double-Sweep” Double sweeping

“Ruled Surface” Ruled surfaces

“Coons Surface” Coons surfaces


“Gordon surface” Gordon surfaces

“Manifold” Controlled volume

11.3.11.2 The tools of the modeling palette


Tools Generates a DG level Other behaviors
Labels and wording

“Deform”

“Stretch” Edits the 1st level of DG

“Bend” Deformation Replaces the DG of the


object
“Twist” Deformation box

“Taper”

Amapi ProT M 131


“Spherize” Deformation Replaces the DG of the
object

“Smooth” Smoothing*
“Chamfer” Chamfer*

“Thickness/Offset”

“Give a thickness” Thickness*

“Create an offset copy” Transmits the DG

“Cut” Cut

“Tesselate” Edits the 1st level of DG

“Delete”

“Bump/Soften” Height field*

“Bend” Bending

“Mold” Edits the 1st level of DG

132 Reference Manual


11.3.11.3 The tools of the assembly palette
Tools Generates a DG level Other behaviors
Labels and wording

“Duplicate” Transmits the DG

“Symmetry” Transmits the DG

“Close” Edits the 1st level of DG

“Weld”

“Weld objects” Edits partially the DG

“Weld points onto an object”


Edits the 1st level of DG
“Weld points close to each other”

“Snap/Align” Edits the 1st level of DG


Can be applied on all the
levels.
Preserves the DG
“Lay on” Can be applied on all the
levels.
Preserves the DG

“Wrap” Projection

“Unfold” Collapses the DG

“Decimate” Collapses the DG

11.3.11.4 The tools of the basic toolset


Tools Generates a DG level Other behaviors
Labels and wording

“Move” Can be applied to all the


levels.
Preserves the DG
“Rotate” Edits the 1st level of DG
(Can be applied to all the
levels on the entirety of a
shape)

“Scale” Edits the 1st level of DG


(Can act on all the levels
on the entirety of a shape)
“Stretch” Edits the 1st level of DG

Amapi ProT M 133


11.3.11.5 The tools of the control panel
Tools Generates a DG level Other behaviors
Labels and wording

“Group, Ungroup” Group A group will always be at


the highest level of DG

“Information” : “Convert to NURBS” Poly-NURBS

11.3.12 Error messages

11.3.13 The colour of the text labels


The colour of the text labels in the dynamic geometry panel
indicates warnings and errors on the corresponding shapes.

Error: The shape contains build errors and is not valid.


Warning: The shape contains some build warnings.
OK: The shape is correct

11.3.13.1 If Amapi Pro cannot build the geometry


When an error occurs, if
Amapi Pro cannot build the
geometry, an error symbol
and an error message are
displayed as in the
following example:

134 Reference Manual


12
The Navigation

Amapi Pro allows you to work on a model from any viewpoint at any time. The user will
appreciate how easy it is to move around the scene: rotating around objects, zooming in and
out on specific details.
Amapi Pro offers several interfaces giving access to different navigational functions
• “The Navigation Palette” (see details on page 136)
• “The keyboard navigation” (see details on page 142) (keyboard only or keyboard+mouse
combination).
Some navigation functions are not available in both interfaces!
See the following table for details

“The Navigation “The keyboard


Palette” navigation”
(see details on page 136) (see details on page 142)
“Viewpoint” (see details on page 137)

“View All” (see details on page 139) (see details on page 142)

“View Detail” (see details on page 140) (see details on page 142)

View Selection (see details on page 142)

“Zoom In / Out” (see details on page 140) (see details on page 145)

“Rotate around the scene” (see details on page 141) (see details on page 143)

“Pan the scene” (see details on page 141) (see details on page 144)

“Make a direct viewpoint change” (see details on page 142)

Amapi ProT M 135


12.1 The Navigation Palette

The Navigation Palette will allow you to see the scene from any viewpoint.

This palette allows you to:


• “Set a viewpoint” (see details on page 138)
• “Record the current viewpoint” (see details on page 138)
• “Recall a viewpoint” (see details on page 139)
• “Delete a viewpoint” (see details on page 139)
• “View All” (see details on page 139)
• “View Detail” (see details on page 140)
• “Zoom In / Out” (see details on page 140)
• “Rotate around the scene” (see details on page 141)
• “Pan the scene” (see details on page 141)

With a little experience the user will probably prefer using the keyboards shortcuts to
navigate with (See “The keyboard navigation” on page 142). This will also let you
free up space in the graphic workspace (See “Manage the optional palettes display” on
page 168). This icon allows you to hide the navigation palette.

136 Reference Manual


12.1.1 Viewpoint
The Viewpoint is what the user can see. It is defined by the user’s eye position, the
target position and the orientation in 3D space.

• The eye position is the point that the scene is viewed from.

• The target point is the point the eye looks at. The Target Point is also the center of
rotation of the scene (when rotating the scene to change the viewpoint). It is also the
center point for zooming the scene in and out of the scene.
The “Viewpoint” tool allows you to set, record and recall a viewpoint.

• The view plane is perpendicular to the eye - target point axis.


The view plane of the current view is projected onto the screen.

View plane Champ


Field of de
view vision

œileye
observer’s de
l’observateur Object in scene
Objet composant
Out la
of the field of view
scène
Situé hors du champ
de vision

Objects of the scene


In the
Objets field of view
composant la
scène
Situés dans le champ
de vision

Target Point
P i t i é
Viewpoint definition

View seen from the above viewpoint

Amapi ProT M 137


12.1.1.1 Set a viewpoint
Setting the current viewpoint consists of positioning the “eye” and the “target point”. These
parameters can be set through the “Eye” and “Target point” options. Toggling from one to
the other option can be done through both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys shortcut or by
simply clicking on the icon showing the desired option.

Target point Eye

Parameters editable in the x x


graphic area y y
and parameter palette z z

The setting of the viewpoint is a tool to position the eye and the target point. This is different
from navigating (see details on page 142) which moves them.

Keyboard shortcut: key “7”.

12.1.1.2 Record the current viewpoint


If a viewpoint is often used, it is possible to record it and to recall it when needed. Proceed
as follows:
1) Set the current viewpoint as desired. To do this use either “The Navigation Palette” (see
details on page 136), or “The keyboard navigation” (see details on page 142), or use the
“Viewpoint” tool for more precision (See “Set a viewpoint” on page 138)
2) When ready, set the cursor on the “Viewpoint” icon in the control panel.
Click on the right mouse button.
3) Click on “Save” to record the current viewpoint. Amapi Pro saves the viewpoints with
the name “view” followed by a number.

Keyboard shortcut: validate with Ctrl “Enter”.

138 Reference Manual


12.1.1.3 Recall a viewpoint
To recall a saved viewpoint (See “Record the current viewpoint” on page 138):
1) Set the cursor on the “Viewpoint” icon in the control panel.
Click on the right mouse button.
The list of the saved viewpoints will be displayed.
2) Slide the cursor over the name of the viewpoint to be recalled and click. Amapi Pro will
automatically display the scene from this viewpoint.
Keyboard shortcut: keyboard shortcuts are automatically created to access each viewpoint:
• Ctrl+0 to see the scene from the first viewpoint in the list.
• Ctrl+1 to see the scene from the second viewpoint in the list.
• … and so on

12.1.1.4 Delete a viewpoint


Viewpoints can be deleted as follows:
1) The viewpoint to be deleted must be the current one (see details on page 139).
2) Set the cursor on the “Viewpoint” icon in the control panel.
Click on the right mouse button.
3) Click on: “delete” to eliminate this viewpoint.

12.1.2 View All


This function recalculates the scene view, so that all objects are visible.

Before “View all” After “View all”

“View all” automatically sets the target point position (See “Viewpoint” on page 137) at the
geometrical center of the scene.

Keyboard shortcut: key “0”.

Amapi ProT M 139


12.1.3 View Detail
Use this function to zoom in a detail of the scene.
.

Before “View Detail” After “View Detail”

1) Click on the icon in the navigation palette, or click in the “1” key.
2) A rectangle is drawn around the cursor. Position it in the center of the area of interest,
then click.
3) Move the cursor to surround the intended area, then click.
View detail sets the target point position (See “Viewpoint” on page 137) at the geometrical
center of the detail.

Keyboard shortcut: key “1”.

12.1.4 Zoom In / Out


This navigation icon zooms in on the scene. Click and hold down the left mouse
button on the icon. When moving the cursor upward, you will zoom in toward the
default target point located in the center of the scene, and if the cursor is moved downward,
you will zoom out of the scene from the target point. When the correct view is displayed,
release the mouse button.

Zoom In Zoom Out

Keyboard shortcut: keys “3” and “.” or mouse wheel.

140 Reference Manual


12.1.5 Pan the scene
This navigation icon pans the scene. Click and hold down the left mouse button on
the icon. Moving the cursor upward scrolls the scene upward, moving the cursor
downward scrolls the scene downward and moving sideways scrolls the scene sideways.
When the correct view is displayed, release the mouse button.

Sideway movement ...followed by


toward the left... an upward movement

The Target point (See “Viewpoint” on page 137) is scrolled with the scene.

Keyboard shortcut: “Ctrl-Arrow” or mouse central button.

12.1.6 Rotate around the scene


This navigation icon rotates around the scene. Click and hold down the left mouse
button on the icon. Move the cursor upward or downward, and the scene will rotate
step by step around the viewpoint of the scene. When the correct view is displayed, release
the mouse button.

Turn toward the right... ....then turn upward

Keyboard shortcut: “Arrow” keys.

Amapi ProT M 141


12.2 The keyboard navigation
The “keyboard” navigation has the following advantage:
• allows you to hide the navigation palette
• makes manipulations easier
• allows you to navigate the scene without stopping the current modeling action.

12.2.1 Make a direct viewpoint change


0 View All (see details on page 139)
1 View Detail (see details on page 140)
. Zoom Out (see details on page 140)
3 Zoom In (see details on page 140)
2 Front View
4 Left View
The
5 Top View
main
6 Right View
viewpoints
8 Rear View
9 Bottom View

7 Viewpoint (see details on page 138)

Cycling around the main viewpoints: If the “shift” key is


held down when using the arrow keys, the viewpoint will be
successively switched to each main viewpoint, in the
direction indicated by the arrow.

View selection: When pressing simultaneously the “Ctrl”


+ “.” keys, Amapi Pro will center the view on the current
selection.

Current selection: two edges from the The view after “View selection”
cube and one facet of the prism

142 Reference Manual


12.2.2 Progressive viewpoint tuning

12.2.2.1 To rotate around the scene

Turn toward the right... ....then turn upward

Using the arrows:

Use the right, left, up and down keyboard arrows to rotate


around the scene.
The rotation will be made step by step around a target
point which by default is the center of the scene.
Of course, the Left arrow key moves the viewpoint toward
the left, the Up arrow key moves the viewpoint upward,
etc.

Using the keyboard and the mouse:


1) Simultaneously press the “Ctrl” key and the left mouse button.
2) Move the cursor to move the observer’s eye around the scene. The rotation will be made
step by step around the viewpoint.
3) When the correct view is displayed, release the keyboard and mouse buttons.
To change the position of the target point, please refer to the Section 12.1.1.1 “Set a viewpoint”
on page 138.

Amapi ProT M 143


12.2.2.2 Panoramic view of the scene

Sideway movement ...followed by


toward the left.... an upward movement

Using the arrows:

To have a panoramic view of the scene (that is to say


scrolling around the scene from side to side), press and
hold the “Control” key and use an arrow key as previously
indicated.

Using the keyboard and the mouse:


1) Simultaneously press the “Ctrl+Alt” key and click on the left mouse button.
2) The scene scrolls around from side to side. Moving the cursor upward scrolls the scene
upward, moving the cursor downward scrolls the scene downward and moving sideways
scrolls the scene sideways…
3) When the correct view is displayed, release the keyboard and the mouse buttons.

Using the mouse:


1) Click on the central mouse button.
2) The scene scrolls around from side to side. Moving the cursor upward scrolls the scene
upward, moving the cursor downward scrolls the scene downward and moving sideways
scrolls the scene sideways…
3) When the correct view is displayed, release the mouse button.

144 Reference Manual


12.2.2.3 Zoom In / Out

Zoom In Zoom Out

Using the numeric pad keys:

3 Progressive Zoom In:


Press the “3” key to zoom in.

. Progressive Zoom Out:


Press the “.” key to zoom out.

Using the mouse wheel:


Rotate the wheel up to zoom in, down to zoom out.

Amapi ProT M 145


146 Reference Manual
13
Selection

13.1 The concept of selection


Selection consists of marking a set of items before
applying an action to them (See “Entity” on page 94).
All tools have an effect on every selected element (we
call this the “current selection”), except for the “Line
drawing” and “Surface and volume primitives” tools.
It is recommended that you proceed to the selection
before picking up the tool. However, the selection can be
modified while using the tool.
A “selected object” is an object that has at least one of its elements marked as selected.
You will proceed to a selection by using:

• “The selection accessories” (see details on page 148).


They allow you to graphically mark the elements to be selected.

• “Memo-Select” (see details on page 158).


It allows you to save a selection and recall it later.

• “The Scene graph” (Alt-T) (see details on page 202).

• “Searching for objects (Alt+F)” palette (see details on page 217)

Amapi ProT M 147


13.2 The selection accessories
Amapi Pro contains two kinds of selection accessories:

• “The selectable entities”: object, facet, edge or point.


(See “The selectable entities” on page 149).

• “The selection methods” (See “The selection methods” on page 150).

The cursor shape will show the selectable entity type and the current selection accessory.

The selection feedback color can be customized from the “Preferences editor”(Alt-P)>
“Entities display”> “Color of the selected object” (see details on page 467).

You will be able to personalize the display of the entities detected when you roll over them
with the cursor:
’“Preferences editor”> “Scene display”> “Entity highlight display (facet, edge or point)” (see
details on page 469).

When a selection can be made?: a selection can be made before picking up a tool or from
inside the tool.

Selection applies only on visible elements. In other words, it works in a transparent or


wireframe display mode, the elements located on the back side of the object can be selected but
this will not be possible when using a solid display mode. (See “Objects display” on page 180).

148 Reference Manual


13.2.1 The selectable entities
Selectable entities are: objects, facets, edges or points (See “Entity” on page 94).
Select an entity by clicking on one of the selection accessories.
The shape of the cursor will show the selectable entity.

Entities Objects Facets Edges Points


Selection
accessories
icons

Cursors

Default selectable entity:


By default, that is before selecting a tool and a selection accessory:
• the default selectable entity is “object” and two selection modes are available at this step (See
“Default selection mode” on page 157)
• clicking on a selection accessory will automatically switch to “Point”.
Some tools force the selectable entity:
• the selectable entity is switched to “Point” when entering into some tools such as (“Stretch”,...).
• switched to selectable entity “Facet” when entering in certain tools such as (“Tesselate”,...).

Default selection accessory:


When no selection accessory is selected and no tool used, click on one of the selectable entities
“Facet” “Edge” or “Point” to be automatically switched to the “Single object selection”
selection accessory (see details on page 151).

Selecting a group of objects behaves in the same way as selecting several objects (See
“Group, Ungroup” on page 186).

Amapi ProT M 149


13.2.2 The selection methods
A selection accessory corresponds to a selection method. You will have the choice among
several selection accessories:

“Single object “The “The “Select “1 “Extend/ “Select by “Deselect all”


selection” Personalized Rectangular over n”” Restrict the angle”
Lasso Lasso selection”
Selection” Selection”

(see details (see details (see details (see details (see details (see details (see details on
on page 151) on page 153) on page 153) on page 155) on page 155) on page 156) page 157)

Default selection accessory:


When no selection accessory is selected and no tool used, click on one of the selectable entities
“Facet” “Edge” or “Point” to be automatically switched to the “Single object selection” (see
details on page 151) selection accessory.

In NURBS mode, (see details on page 98), the selection of points is only possible by using the
“Single object selection” method. Other selection methods do not apply.
In fact, all the points of a NURBS curve or surface are defined and a point of a NURBS object
can be evaluated anywhere. When the user wants to select a point on an object of this type,
this point will be computed at the time of selection (and not taken among the ones computed
for the display). It is not possible to search all the points of a curve or of a surface in a given
space (as made by the lasso or rectangular selection accessories) because they are at infinity.
For the same reason, search by proximity does not exists in NURBS mode.
In polyhedral mode, search by proximity allows you to click close to the point to be selected and
the tool will search and select the point of the object which is the nearest to the cursor. In this
way, the user is sure to select the point he wanted in one click.
In NURBS mode, the selected point will be exactly the one aimed at by the cursor.
The selection must be made precisely on the curve or on the surface to take effect. If this
condition is not respected, no point will be selected.
(See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96)

Reducing the selection palette:


Amapi Pro has numerous keyboard or mouse shortcuts which allow you to switch quickly from
one selection method to another (see the paragraph dedicated to a method for a shortcuts list).
Once familiar with the shortcuts, the user might choose to hide the icons showing the methods
accessories to free graphic workspace.
Reduce the palette

Open the palette

150 Reference Manual


A shortcut launches the lasso and rectangle selection accessories.
• From the “Single object selection” method the shortcut will switch to the “The Personalized Lasso
Selection” accessory.
The transition will be obtained by clicking on the right mouse button.
• From all the other accessories, you will be switched to the “Single object selection” method.
The transition will be obtained by clicking on the mouse right button.
• From the “The Personalized Lasso Selection” method the shortcut will switch to the “The Rectangular
Lasso Selection” method
Click and hold to obtain the transition.

When there are no selection accessory selected and no tool used, there are two selection
modes available (See “Default selection mode” on page 157).

13.2.2.1 Single object selection


With this method, Amapi Pro detects and highlights the element of the current
object that is closest to the cursor and matches the selectable entity (facets, edges or
points). The user can select or deny the detected element by using one of the following
methods:

The reverse selection:

• add a new element to the current Click


selection (click on a not selected
element).

• remove an element already selected from Click

the current selection (click on a selected


element).

The add selection: adds an element to


the current selection. Just hold the “Shift”
key during the selection. Shift Click

Amapi ProT M 151


The subtract selection: removes an Atl Click
element from the current selection. Just hold
the “Alt” key before clicking on the element
to be deselected.

The substitute selection: replaces the


current selection by an element. Just hold the
Shift Alt Click
“Shift” and “Alt” keys simultaneously while
selecting the new element.

.
Select “by turns”: when several elements fill up the screen, it may be difficult to precisely select
one of them. In this case, when no tools are in use, use the “+” and “-” keys from the numeric
keypad. Each key press will select one entity according to their order of creation. Stop when you
have selected the element you want.

Shortcuts to other selection methods:


• Switch to “The Personalized Lasso Selection”: Click right mouse button.
(see details on page 153)
• Switch to “Extend/Restrict the selection”: Keys “Page-up” and “Page-down”. (see details on
page 155)
• Switch to “Select “1 over n”” method: “+” or “-” keys.
(see details on page 155)

152 Reference Manual


13.2.2.2 The Personalized Lasso Selection
This selection lets you define a Entry
personalized zone to add or Click
substract elements (objects, facets, edges or
points) from the current selection. Click

We call “lasso” the closed polyline used to


define the selection area. It is drawn by Click

successive clicks and is ended by pressing Click


the “Enter” key. Points selection
The personalized lasso selection works
exactly on the same principle as the “The
Rectangular Lasso Selection” (see details on
page 153) and has the same selection and
options modes.

Edges selection
.
For lasso selection, validation only takes into account the points that are clicked; Amapi Pro
does not take into account the cursor position at the moment of validation.

Shortcuts to other selection methods:


• Switch to “Single object selection” method: Click right mouse button.
(see details on page 151)
• Switch to “The Rectangular Lasso Selection” method: Click and hold.
(see details on page 153).
• Switch to “Select “1 over n”” method: “+” or “-” keys.
(see details on page 155)

13.2.2.3 The Rectangular Lasso Selection


This selection accessory lets you define a rectangular selection zone to add or
substract elements (objects, facets, edges or points) from the current selection.
It is defined by two points representing two opposite corners of the rectangle. There are two
ways of defining these points:
• Click-Click
• Click and hold - Drag the cursor - Release mouse button

Amapi ProT M 153


The selection modes
The reverse selection: Click
(see details on page 151)

Click

The add selection: Shift


Click
(see details on page 151)

Shift Click

The subtract selection: Alt Click


(see details on page 151)

Alt Click

The substitute selection: Shift


Alt
(see details on page 151) Click

Shift
Alt
Click

Options of the lasso selection


Amapi Pro has two selection options:
The lasso selection selects the elements which are completely within its limits only.

The lasso selection selects the elements which are completely or partially within its
limits.

Shortcuts to other selection methods:


• Switch to “Single object selection” method: Click right mouse button (see details on page 151).
• Switch to “The Rectangular Lasso Selection” method: Click and hold (see details on page 153).
• Switch to “Select “1 over n”” method: “+” or “-” keys. (see details on page 155).

154 Reference Manual


13.2.2.4 Select “1 over n”
The selection accessory “Select “1 over n”” easily selects one element (object, facet,
edge or point) over “n” selectable elements. “n” is the offset value of the selection. A
null offset will give no selection. The cursor shows that the offset setting can be set
using the “+” or “-” keys of the numeric keypad, but a numeric value can be entered directly
in the parameters area.
If, for example, with this selection method the
setting is “points selection” and the parameter
value is set to “5”, Amapi Pro will select
automatically one point over 5 on each of the
selected objects.

Shortcut for other selection methods:


• For the “Single object selection” method: Click the right mouse button.
(see details on page 151)

The “1 over n” selection deselects all the previous selections on the current object.
However, you may add new selections after a “1 over n” has been used

There are several setting methods for the active parameter:


• “From the graphic workspace” with the “+” or “-” keys on the numeric keypad.
• By entering a value in the Parameter palette (see details on page 163)

13.2.2.5 Extend/Restrict the selection


This selection accessory allows you to extend or restrict the current selection to the
elements close to the current one (closed topology). The cursor shows that the
offset setting can be set using the “+” or “-” keys of the numeric keypad, but a numeric value
can be entered directly in the parameters area.
There is no possible extension if the current selected items do not match the selectable
entity (See “The selectable entities” on page 149).

Shortcut for other selection methods:


• For the “Single object selection” method: Click the right mouse button.
(see details on page 151)

Amapi ProT M 155


13.2.2.6 Select by angle
Selects, within the current selected object, the edges (if the object is a surface) or the
points (if the object is a curve) corresponding to a selection by angle criterion. The
user would choose among two selection by angle options. You will toggle from the one to
the other by pressing both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys.
The cursor will point out that the offset setting will be made easily with the “+” or “-”
keys of the numeric keypad, but you can also enter a numeric value in the parameters area.

The selected object is a curve:

Select the angles less than or equal Select the angles strictly higher than
to the limit the limit
Option description Selects all the points whose adjacent Selects all the points whose adjacent
edges make a non oriented angle edges make a non oriented angle
inferior or equal to the limit set by the strictly higher than the limit set by the
user. user.
Illustration

Limit = 90°

Editable parameter •Limit (Maximum angle) •Limit (Minimum Angle)

The selected object is a surface:

Select the angles less than or equal Select the angles strictly higher than
to the limit the limit
Option description Selects all the edges whose adjacent Selects all the edges whose adjacent
facets make a non oriented angle facets make a non oriented angle strictly
inferior or equal to the limit set by the higher than the limit set by the user.
user.
Illustration

Limit = 90°

Editable parameter •Limit (Maximum angle) •Limit (Minimum Angle)

Shortcuts to other selection methods:


• Switch to “Single object selection” method: Click right mouse button. (see details on page 151)

156 Reference Manual


13.2.2.7 Deselect all
This accessory allows you to deselect all the entity selections (facet, edge or point).
Then, continue the modeling.

13.2.3 Default selection mode


When there is no selection accessory activated and when there is no tool open, the current
item for the selection is the object.
In this context you can select among several selection methods:
The replace selection (Click)
This selection mode (default) allows you to replace the current selection. Just click on the
object to select.
The add selection (Shift-Click)
In this mode you can add an object to the current selection by holding the shift key while
clicking on other objects to add them to the current selection.
The reverse selection (Alt-Shift-Click)
This mode allows you to :
• add a new object to the current selection like in the add mode (Alt-Shift-Click on an
unselected object).
• unselect an already selected object (Alt-Shift-Click on a selected object).
The substract selection (Alt-Click)
Use this mode to unselect an already selected object . Hold the “ Alt ” key while clicking on
the object to unselect it.

Amapi ProT M 157


13.3 Memo-Select
Memo-Select memorizes a named selection in order to
reuse it later without having to do a new selection.
Memo-Select is very useful in the case of meticulous
selections.
The Memo-select panel contains several memory slots where selections can be stored. There
are three settings:
Memo-select free: Empty circle, memory empty

Memo-select not free: A selection is memorized


Current Memo-select: A selection is memorized and it was the latest used selection. Its
name is displayed in the editable area located just above.

To Record the current selection, just click on an empty circle (which indicates it is
free).The icon changes too, so as to be found easily afterwards.

To Recall a previously saved selection, click its corresponding circle. It is marked as the
current selection and its name is displayed just above.

To Delete a saved selection, click its corresponding circle and click on the “Delete”
icon .

158 Reference Manual


13.4 The selection cursors
The shape of the cursor gives some information about:

• The current selectable entity (see details on page 149)

• The selection mode corresponding to the current selection accessory (see details on
page 148).
Basic selection
Entity: Object Facet Edge Point

Selection:
Basic

Reverse

Add

Subtract

Substitute

Lasso selection
Entity: Object Facet Edge Point

Selection:

Reverse

Add

Subtract

Substitute

Amapi ProT M 159


160 Reference Manual
14
The Parameters

14.1 To check the parameters


Amapi Pro displays the values of the current
parameters.

A parameter may be:


• a name
• a coordinate Parameters panel
• an angle value
• a distance
• a coefficient
• a quantity
• a range…

There are two ways to check parameters:


• The parameter palette:
This palette is displayed at the left side of the graphic workspace.
You can edit it (See “Editing the parameters” on page 162).
You can hide it (See “Manage the optional palettes display” on page 168).
• The cursor-parameters:
The current parameters are displayed in the 3D space near the cursor. This type of
display cannot be edited. The cursor-parameter can be hidden See chapter “Preferences
editor”> “Graphic environment”> “Cursor-parameter display” (see details on page 463).

Amapi ProT M 161


14.2 Editing the parameters
To modify the parameters displayed in the palette, you can use several methods:

• “From the graphic workspace” (see details on page 162)


• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162)
• “Using the Remote Control” (see details on page 162)
• “In the parameter palette” (see details on page 163)

14.2.1 From the graphic workspace

14.2.1.1 Using the mouse


This method is available from most of the modeling tools; you will appreciate it for its
versatility and its efficiency.
Most modeling actions will be performed using the mouse.
How it works:
1) The mouse movement changes the displayed value(s) in the parameter palette.
2) Left click on the mouse button to validate the parameters’s values.
The cursor movement is done on the most perpendicular plane to the current point of
view.
When setting three dimensions, the mouse movement will modify only two values instead of
three.
You will have two possibilities to modify the third value:
• To change the point of view (See “The Navigation” on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

It is possible to apply moving or positioning constraints to the cursor (See “The constraints”
on page 191).

14.2.1.2 Using the Remote Control


This mode of editing is available from select tools (“Stretch”, “Scale”, “Move” and
“Rotate”). It allows a precise interactive control of the data.
The current parameter value is changed as follows:
• “Ctrl” “Shift” Left arrow > Increases the horizontal value
• “Ctrl” “Shift” Right arrow > Decreases the horizontal value
• “Ctrl” “Shift” Up arrow > Increases the vertical value
• “Ctrl” “Shift” Down arrow > Decreases the vertical value.

162 Reference Manual


The increment is done step by step. The “step” value is tuned by pressing the “+” or “-”
keys.
For the “Stretch”, “Scale”, “Move” tools, the step value is the ruler. For the “Rotate” tool, it
is the circle.
The cursor movement is done on the most perpendicular plane to the current point of
view.
When setting three dimensions, the mouse movement will modify only two values instead of
three.
You will have two possibilities to modify the third value:
• To change the point of view (See “The Navigation” on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

14.2.1.3 With a 3D Digitizer


With Amapi Pro, you can digitize your models in three dimensions using the MicroScribe
3D digitizing system.
The “Polyline”, “Curve”, “Interpolated curve”, and “Extract Facets” drawing tools will
allow you to digitize 3D objects.
See chapter “3D Digitizing” (see details on page 233) for more information.

14.2.2 In the parameter palette

14.2.2.1 Switch to the parameter edit mode


Parameter values can be entered using the keyboard with one of the two following methods:

“Tab” key:
This key allows you to access the first field of the parameter palette. It switches to edit
mode; the entire data field is automatically selected.

Click:
On the parameter palette:
• Directly in the data field to be edited: switches to edit mode.
• Outside from a data field: the first field of the parameter palette is switched to edit mode.
In both cases, the entire data field is automatically selected.

Amapi ProT M 163


14.2.2.2 Editing a parameter
Once a field of the parameter palette is in edit mode, there are several ways to modify the
value of this field:

Fine tunings
• The tuning arrows
The tuning arrows, which are beside the field will allow you to fine-tune interactively the
parameter value:
• A click on the up arrow _ > Increases the value
• A click on the down arrow_ >Decreases the value
• The slider:
When displayed, it works as follows:
1) Click and hold the slider
2) Move the mouse toward the right or the left to increase or decrease the parameter
value.
3) Release the mouse button at your desired value.
• The “+” and “-” keys of the numeric keypad (the tuner)
You may use the + or - keys of the numeric keypad to quickly set the current parameter.
• “+” key _
> Increases the value
• “-” key _
> Decreases the value

Modifying a character string


Conventional interface
If all the characters of the field are selected, it is not possible to enter the’-’ sign.
This key is reserved to the tuner (see details on page 164),
All of the data in the data field has to be deleted or deselected before entering a negative value.

14.2.2.3 Moving between parameters fields


To edit another field of the parameter palette, use:

“Tab” key
This key has the following functions:
1) Pre-validation of the entered value (the validation will be made when pressing the
“Enter” key (see details on page 165).

164 Reference Manual


2) Application of the new parameter to the current selection and visualization of the
model’s initial state.
3) The cursor is moved to the next data field of the parameter palette.
After the last field, the first field is selected.

The Up and Down arrows of the keyboard


These keys allow you to toggle from one field to the next or to the previous one in the
parameter palette.
This key has the following functions:
1) Pre-validation of the entered value (the validation will be made when pressing the
“Enter” key (see details on page 165)).
2) The cursor is moved to the next or to the previous data field of the parameter palette.
On the last field, the first field is selected.
Unlike the “Tab” key, the arrow key delays the validation of the current value until Enter or
Tab keys are pressed. This is useful when the validation action may take a long time and when
several values must be edited “Validating or Canceling data input” (see details on page 165).

14.2.2.4 Validating or Canceling data input

Validating
By pressing the “Enter” key you will get the following:
1) The validation of the values displayed in each data field.
2) The application of the new parameters to the current selection and the display of the
modified model.
3) The tool switches to the next step (the graphic workspace takes the focus).

Canceling
By pressing the “Cancel” key you will get the following:
1) The original values (before the parameter palette was set in edit mode) will be restored.
2) The application of these former parameters to the current selection and the display of
the model like it was before the operation was cancelled.
3) The cursor is set on the graphic workspace without changing the step.

Amapi ProT M 165


14.2.2.5 Table of key actions in parameters edit mode

KEYS ACTIONS

1) Validates the values displayed in each data field.


2) Applies the new parameters to the current selection and displays the
“Enter” modified model.
3) Goes to the next step of the tool (the graphic workspace takes the
focus).

1) Resets the original values for each data field like they were before the
parameter palette was set in edit mode.
“Cancel” 2) Applies the old parameters to the current selection and displays the
model like it was before the cancelled operation.
3) Returns to the graphic workspace without changing the step.

• Left arrow > Move the cursor to the left


• Right arrow > Move the cursor to the right
• “Ctrl” Left arrow > Set the cursor at the beginning of the string
Arrows
• “Ctrl” Right arrow > Set the cursor at the end of the string
• “Shift” Left arrow > Selection/Deselection on the left
• “Shift” Right arrow > Selection/Deselection on the right

• “+”> Increases the value


“+” and “-”
• “-”> Decreases the value

In the graphic workspace, the “Tab” key gives the focus to the palette of
parameters; the first field is editable.
Once in the parameter palette, it does the following actions:
1) Pre-validation of the entered value (the validation will be made when
“Tab” pressing the “Enter” key.
2) Applies the new parameter to the current selection and displays the
modified model.
3) Moves to the next data field of the parameter palette.
When the last field is reached, moves on to the first field

166 Reference Manual


15
The Control panel

The Control panel is displayed at the bottom of the screen. It is divided into two parts.

The optional palettes display management icons (see details on page 168).

The modeling help functions which help you to make the most of Amapi Pro’s
possibilities.
Some of these functions are accessible as keyboard shortcuts.

The Control panel can be hidden to give more space in the graphic workspace. This option can
be set in the “Preferences editor”> “User interface”> “Palettes display”> “Control panel display”
(see details on page 455).

Amapi ProT M 167


15.1 Manage the optional palettes display
Several palettes in Amapi Pro are optional. To free up space in the graphic workspace it is
recommended to display only the most useful palettes.
The Control panel displays a set of icons that allows you to control the display of these
palettes.
Each icon shows or hides (toggles) the palette it controls.

Controls the display of the selection accessories palette (See “Selection” on


page 147).

Controls the display of the scene graph. It represents all the objects of the current
scene in the shape of a tree. You can carry out all the basic actions on each object
such as hiding, unhiding, locking or grouping,...
(See “The Scene graph” on page 202)

Controls the display of the Dynamic Geometry levels palette (See “Dynamic
Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

Controls the display of the navigation palette (See “The Navigation Palette” on
page 136). With some practice, the user might prefer the keyboard shortcuts (See
“The keyboard navigation” on page 142).

Toggle-icon controlling the display of the advanced constraints palette (See


“Advanced constraints” on page 194).

Toggle-icon controlling the display of the Layer palette (See “The Layers” on
page 198).

Controls the display of the Help palette (see details on page 207) and of the
assistant palette (see details on page 206). If this palette is not displayed, just slide
the cursor onto the icon to display a tooltip with a contextual help message.

The Information panel, onto which the optional palettes are displayed, can be hidden to
give a larger graphic workspace. This option can be set in the “Preferences editor”> “User
interface”> “Palettes display”> “Optional palettes display support area” (see details on page 455).

168 Reference Manual


15.2 Working in the view plane
Modeling is done on a plane symbolized by a grid called the “ground”.
While using tools, the “orthonormal base axis” (X is red, Y is green and Z is
blue) define the three conventional orthogonal planes.
The “working plane” is the plane onto which the cursor is moved. It is defined by the two
axis the most parallel to the current view plane (See “Viewpoint” on page 137).

The working plane

The scene y

The ground
x

For modeling needs, the user may have to change the default working plane for a new one.
He may want to work on the current view plane. The view plane will be reoriented
according to the movement of the viewpoint in the 3D space. In fact, the working plane will
always be on the same plane as the screen.
With these conditions, the cursor movement will modify its three coordinates.
The Control panel displays an icon corresponding to the current mode. Click on it to switch
from one mode to the other.

This tool is not the same as the “Scene / orthonormal base toggling” tool which allows you
to change the working plane by temporarily reorienting the orthonormal base or the scene (see
details on page 171).

Amapi ProT M 169


Default working plane The working plane follows the view plane

The working plane becomes the orthogonal The working plane is in the current view plane
plane when the orientation is the closest to the With these conditions, the cursor movement will
current view plane. modify three coordinates.
In this mode, the cursor motion will modify only The view plane will be reoriented according to the
two of the coordinates. movement of the observer’s eye in the scene.

y y
y

x
x
x

z
z
Absolute orthonormal base
Relative orthonormal base

The working plane is here (x,y) The working plane is oriented


following the current view plane

y y
y
x x

z z

Absolute orthonormal base


Relative orthonormal base
The working plane is here (y,z)
The working plane is reoriented
according to the viewpoint movement
In this working mode, the cursor coordinates can
be displayed:
•Within the absolute orthonormal base
•Within the relative orthonormal base (the working
plane one).
“Preferences editor”> “Units”> “Relative
coordinates” (see details on page 474).

170 Reference Manual


15.3 Scene / orthonormal base toggling
Modeling is done on a plane symbolized by a grid called the “ground”.
While using tools, the “orthonormal base axis” (X is red, Y is green and Z is
blue) define the three conventional orthogonal planes.
The “working plane” is the plane onto which the cursor is moved. It is defined by the two
axis the most parallel to the current view plane (See “Viewpoint” on page 137)

The working plane

The scene y

The ground
x

For modeling needs, the user may have to reorient the orthonormal base to change the
working plane. Amapi Pro proposes several ways to proceed:

• Toggle the orthonormal base.

• Toggle the scene and the orthonormal base.


The Control panel displays the icon corresponding to the current orientation. Click on it to
display a list of possible reorientations. Then click to select and follow the instructions
below:

Amapi ProT M 171


Restore the conventional Toggle the orthonormal base Toggle the scene and the
orthonormal base orthonormal base
Amapi Pro restores automatically The user must click on the facet The user must click on the facet
the conventional orthonormal of an object. of an object.
base The orthonormal base will be The entire scene will be
reoriented so the current working reoriented so the selected facet
plane that is on the same plane that is on the same plane as the
as the selected facet ground.

y y
Selected facet Selected facet

x x

z z

Before toggling Before toggling

y y y y
y z

z
x x
x
x x

z z
z
Absolute orthonormal base Absolute orthonormal base
Relative orthonormal base Relative orthonormal base

Restored orthonormal base After toggling After toggling

With these working modes, the cursor coordinates can be displayed:


•In the absolute orthonormal base.
•In the relative orthonormal base (working plane).
“Preferences editor”> “Units”> “Relative coordinates” (see details on
page 474).

This tool is not the same as the “Working in the view plane” which allows you to orientate
the working plane according to the current view plane (see details on page 169).

172 Reference Manual


15.4 Orthonormal base origin
When using some of the tools, the “graduate orthonormal base axis” are
displayed X (red), Y (green) and Z (blue). They allow you to find a landmark and
make precise alignments in the graphic workspace.
The default position of the orthonormal base origin is the center of the grid called the
“ground”. It can be moved at any moment during modeling. To do this, click on the icon
showing the “Orthonormal base origin” tool in the Control panel, then select the point of the
scene which will become the new orthonormal base origin or enter its coordinates in the
parameter palette (See “Editing the parameters” on page 162).

Amapi ProT M 173


15.5 Snapping
This mode-tool allows you to specify if the cursor is to be snapped or not onto the virtual
grid defined by the orthonormal base gradations.

The non magnetized cursor moves freely in the scene.

The magnetized cursor snaps to the grid intersection points.

It is possible to customize the gradation step at each display of the gradated axis. To increase
or decrease the gradation step, click on the icons of the assistant palette or use the
shortcut: “+/-” keys.

174 Reference Manual


15.6 Alignment Guides
The “Alignment Guides” allow you to create temporary guides which will direct the
cursor movement while building 3D points. These guides are straight lines and make
a right angle (45 degrees, 90 degrees...) to the horizontal plane or to a predefined direction.
They can be accumulated to allow singular lines intersections. They can also be oriented
toward a specified axis. These guides are entirely controlled with the mouse. The guides dis-
appear after each point is created. The “Alignment guides” are enabled by clicking on a tog-
gle-icon in “The Control panel”.
Refer to the “Alignment guides” (see details on page 196) paragraph for more information.

Amapi ProT M 175


15.7 Perspective
This mode-tool allows you to toggle from one of two display modes of the scene:

The Perspective view (default option).

The Orthographic view (to see the scene without perspective).


In some cases, this display mode can provide a clearer visualization of the scene or
facilitate certain manipulations.

Customized Front view Left view Top view Right view Rear view
viewpoint

Perspective
view

Orthogra-
phic view

To toggle from one mode to the other, simply click on the icon showing the tool in the
Control panel.

176 Reference Manual


15.8 Simplified display
In the case of complex scenes or objects, a simplified display can be used in order
to give a faster and clearer display.

To do so, select one of the following options:

Do not simplify the object display.

Simplify the display of deselected objects.

Simplify the display of selected objects.

Simplify the display of all the objects on the scene.

Amapi ProT M 177


15.9 Simple-view / Multi-view
Amapi Pro allows you to work in simple-view or in multi-view mode.

• The navigation's versatility allows you to work with efficiency and comfort in the single-
view mode. The interface is specially designed to be as close to the movements of a
sculptor as possible while he or she is moving around his creation.

• The multi-view consists of simultaneously displaying the scene in several windows. A


different viewpoint corresponds to each window (See “Viewpoint” on page 137). One of
these windows is selected as the “working window”. The user can pass from one to
another as needed. This principle gives you quick and precise control of the resulting
model.
The Control panel displays the icon corresponding to the current option. Click
on it to display the list of the possible configurations. Then, click on the icon
showing the desired configuration.

The “current view” corresponds to the view which the user works on.
Modifications are interactively shown in the other views.
The current view is surrounded by a white frame.
A click on a non-current view selects it as the current view.

It is possible to display or not specific information in each view:


• The type of view (Perspective, Left, Right, Top...).
• The number of images displayed per second.
“Preferences editor”> “User interface”> “Miscellaneous”> “View Informations display” (see details
on page 457).

178 Reference Manual


15.10 Enable/Disable the backface display
A frontface is a facet of a model where the normal is oriented toward the observer.
A backface is a facet of a model where the normal is not oriented toward the
observer.
Disabling the backface display is one of the ways to optimize display time.

Backface display enabled Backface display disabled

Amapi ProT M 179


15.11 Objects display
15.11.1 The display modes
While modeling, you will manipulate various entities: points, edges, facets or objects (See
“Entity” on page 94).
Depending on the kind of action to perform, select the display mode to best highlight the
entities you want to work with. The display mode can be changed at any time.
The Control panel displays the icon corresponding to the current display mode. Click on it to
display the list of the possible configurations. Then, click on the icon showing the desired
display mode.

The “Wireframe” mode displays only the edges of the objects. Because this mode
doesn’t display the facets, it has the advantage of showing the entire object without
having to navigate in the scene: it is possible to select the elements which would be
hidden in a non-wireframe mode.

The “Lit Wireframe” mode adds a lit effect to the “Wireframe” mode.

The “Flat Solid” mode adds a more realistic appearance to the objects by
displaying their facets.
The “Flat Solid and edges” display mode adds edges to the “Flat Solid” mode.

The “Smoothed Solid” mode corresponds to the “Flat Solid” mode to which
smoothing has been applied. This is the most realistic mode.
The “Smoothed Solid and edges” display mode adds edges to the “Smoothed
Solid” mode.

In any desired display mode, Amapi Pro will be able to select any entity (points, edges or
facets).
For example: when the “Flat Solid” mode is selected (displays only the facets of the objects) and
the user wants to select the “edges” entities “one by one”, Amapi Pro will highlight the closest
edge to the cursor while it is moved. The user can then select it or not.

180 Reference Manual


The NURBS objects display is different depending on the operating mode “Polygonal /
NURBS” (see details on page 182):
In the NURBS operating mode, the points and edges of the NURBS objects are not
editable and will not be displayed.
A NURBS curve will be shown as a continuous line.
Isoparametric curves, outlines and cutting curves will be shown on the NURBS surfaces.
In the polygonal operating mode, points and edges are displayed. These can be used as
support for construction but are not directly editable.
(See “The NURBS models” on page 98)

15.11.2 Transparency of the selected object


This tools allows you to give or to not give a transparency effect to the selected objects.

Display “with transparency effect”

Display “without transparency effect”

If this option is activated, it will be effective in the following situations:


• When selecting edges or points
The transparency allows you to select the elements which would not otherwise be visible
(and not selectable) if the display was in solid mode (See “Objects display” on
page 180).
Amapi Pro gives a transparency effect to selected objects if the selectable entity is the
edge or a point (See “The selectable entities” on page 149).

The user can set the “Selection transparency level” (see details on page 466).
• When editing an object with several Dynamic Geometry levels
The transparency allows you to display the Dynamic Geometry level corresponding to
the finished object while an intermediate level is edited. This kind of display gives you
the advantage of being able to manipulate very efficiently (See “Dynamic Geometry
(DG)” on page 109).
The user can set the “Transparency level when editing DG” (see details on page 471).

This effect is only effective when a “solid” display mode has been selected (See “The
display modes” on page 180).

Amapi ProT M 181


15.12 Polygonal / NURBS
Toggles on the NURBS display
Toggles to the NURBS / Polygonal operating mode

(See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96)

182 Reference Manual


15.13 Working with or without Dynamic
Geometry
Dynamic Geometry is one of the points which makes the versatility and the power of this
software. It works on the following principle:
All the modeling steps of each object on the scene is stored. When modifying a curve or a
volume, Amapi Pro can interactively apply this modification to all the steps up to the
finished model. These curves or volumes are used as control shapes.
It is recommended to see the chapter “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109, for a better
understanding of this subject.
Amapi Pro proposes working with Dynamic Geometry as the default option. A toggle-icon
in the Control panel allows you to work with or without Dynamic Geometry:
Work without Dynamic Geometry
Work with the Dynamic Geometry

Amapi ProT M 183


15.14 Hide, Show
Use the Hide tool to make some objects of the scene invisible and the Show
tool to display them again.
These tools are useful to temporarily hide an element and facilitate manipulation.
They are also used to display elements automatically hidden by some tools such as the
curves used with the “Sweep” tool (see details on page 307) as profile or section.

15.14.1 Hide
There are two cases:

• If several objects in the scene are selected, Amapi Pro hides them and automatically
releases the tool and modeling will immediately continue.

• If only one object is selected in the scene, the objects to be hidden must be selected. The
objects will be hidden upon validating or releasing the tool.
When clicking on the “Apply to all” accessory, Amapi Pro makes the operation on all the
displayed entities before automatically releasing the tool.
Shortcut: “A” key.

To temporarily hide the unused objects, use the “Isolate” tool (see details on page 185).

15.14.2 Show
When opening this tool, Amapi Pro displays all the hidden objects and temporarily
hides the non-hidden objects. Select the object(s) to be shown, knowing that
Amapi Pro will then show them once the tool is validated or released. All the non-hidden
objects of the scene will automatically reappear.
When clicking on the “Apply to all” accessory, Amapi Pro makes the operation on all the
displayed entities before automatically releasing the tool.
Shortcut: “A” key.

184 Reference Manual


15.15 Isolate
The “Isolate” mode-tool allows you to work with the current selection without displaying
the other objects of the scene.

If the tool is activated, Amapi Pro automatically hides all the not selected objects
on the scene.

All the non-hidden objects (See “Hide, Show” on page 184) of the scene are
displayed when this mode is deactivated.

The Hide an Show tools are not available in “Isolate” mode.

Do not confuse the “Isolate” which temporarily hides objects without hiding them using “Hide,
Show” (see details on page 184)

Amapi ProT M 185


15.16 Group, Ungroup
Use the Group tool to make several objects behave as a single object for
the following tools: “Scale”, “Rotate”, “Stretch” and “Move”. By grouping
objects or groups of objects together, the scene can be organized hierarchically (groups and
sub-groups).
This tool must not be overlapped with the “Weld objects” option of the “Weld” tool (see details
on page 403).
• A group of objects:
• can be organized into a hierarchy (notion of sub-group)
• keeps the integrality of the points of each object.
• can be ungrouped at any time thanks with the Ungroup tool
• is displayed with its entire bounding box.
• An object made from weld objects:
• does not contain overlapping points after welding.
• can not be unwelded (except with Ctrl-Z).
• is displayed with its partial bounding box.

15.16.1 Group
There are two cases:

• If several objects are selected in the scene, Amapi Pro groups them, then automatically
releases the tool. The modeling will continue immediately.

• If only one object is selected in the scene, the objects to be grouped must be selected. The
objects will be grouped upon validating or releasing the tool.

When clicking on the “Apply to all” accessory, Amapi Pro makes the operation on all the
displayed entities before automatically releasing the tool.
Shortcut: “A” key.

15.16.2 Ungroup
Use this tool to ungroup all the objects belonging to the same group. When opening
the tool, Amapi Pro highlights all the groups and sub-groups of the scene and hides
temporarily hides the objects not belonging to any group. Select the object(s) to be
ungrouped. All the objects of the scene then automatically reappear upon validating or
releasing the tool.

186 Reference Manual


15.16.3 Enter / leave a group
It is possible to edit the objects of a group without having to ungroup and group them again.
To do that, click on the group icon of the control panel with the right button. A context menu
containing Enter a group and Leave a group appears. Select Enter a group then select the
group to be edited. When done select Leave the group.

Amapi ProT M 187


15.17 Information
The “Information” tool displays all the information about the current object. This
information is displayed in a floating palette which can be edited at any time
during modeling.
This tool has several action-buttons which apply functions based mainly on model
optimization or on problem resolution if the file was imported.
The Dynamic Geometry hierarchy of the object is also displayed.
The information palette of any object can be displayed by double-clicking on this object.

15.17.1 Information

Label Nature of the information Editing

Thumbnail Displays a small image of the object.

Name Name of the current object Click on the name’s


(See “Object names” on page 92) display area to edit it.

Type of model Displays if this is a NURBS or Polygonal object.


Nature of the object Gives additional information if it is a NURBS object.
(See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96).

Displays if the object is a curve, a surface or a


volume.
(See “The Types of objects” on page 91).

Layer status Gives information about the status of the layer it


belongs to:
Locked/Unlocked (See “Lock / Unlock a layer” on
page 200).

Number of points Displays the number of points of the finished object.

Number of edges Displays the number of edges of the finished object

Number of facets Displays the number of facets of the finished object

Dimensions Displays the x, y and z dimensions of the bounding


box.

188 Reference Manual


15.17.2 Functions

Label Function Description

Hidden faces Do not show hidden faces


Show hidden faces

Convert to NURBS If the model is Polygonal, Amapi Pro gives you the possibility to convert it to
NURBS.
(See “Transform a Polyhedral model into a NURBS model /a NURBS model
into a Polygonal model” on page 105)

Triangulate non Amapi Pro proposes triangulating the non planar faces of the current object.
planar faces Click on this button to triangulate
(See “Non planar facets” on page 485)

Triangulate faces Amapi Pro proposes triangulating the faces with more than 4 points.
with more than 4 Click on this button to triangulate.
points *

Remove equal Amapi Pro proposes optimizing the model by removing overlapping points.
points * Click on this button to launch the action.

Remove coplanar Amapi Pro proposes optimizing the model by replacing the coplanar facets by
faces * a unique facet.
Click on the button to launch the action.
(See “Coplanar” on page 483).

Destroy Dynamic Amapi Pro gives you the possibility to completely collapse the Dynamic
Geometry Geometry of the object.
Click on the button to launch the action.
(See “Collapsing the DG” on page 118)

reorienting the Amapi Pro gives you the possibility to modify the orientation of the normals to
normals the facets.
Click on this button to activate the tool.
(See “Orient Normals” on page 190)

Create an object for This function is enabled if the current object is a BREP (See “BREP:
each NURBS face of «watertight» surfaces and volumes” on page 103).
the object It explodes the object in as many objects as it has faces.
This operation is a means to edit NURBS faces.
The user will be able to weld these faces by using the “Weld objects” (see
details on page 403) option of the “Weld” tool

Create an edge for Replaces the broken nodal lines into BREP edges.
each nodal break

* This function completely collapses the Dynamic Geometry (DG) (See “Collapsing the DG”
on page 118).
After this operation, the object will only keep one DG level.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

Amapi ProT M 189


Orient Normals
This tool has two main options:

Reverse normals (default option in polyhedral mode)


This option behaves like a tool qhere you can :
• Visualize each facet normal : The path of each facet normal is indicated by a
grey arrow when the cursor is over the facet.
• Toggle facet normal path : Depending on the type of object you can:
• Surfacic objects ; Several selection methods are available :
Replace selection (Click) : click on a facet to toggle the normal path.
Add selection (Shift-Click or lasso) : Select a group of facet and hit Space
bar to toggle the normals all at once.
Substract selection (Alt-Click): Unselect a group of facet; toggle like in
previous mode.

Reverting normals implies to collapse the Dynamic Geometry. A message


window asking to perform this operation will appear when validating the tool.
• For curves, hitting the space bar toggles the curve path.
Clicking on another curve will change the current selection.
• This option has no effect in the following cases:
• NURBS mode.
• Some shapes requiring unified normals (control shapes of some
dynamic geometries).

Unify normals (default option in NURBS mode)


This option activates a dynamic property of the selected object that has the
following effect ;
• All the normals of the seleted objects are oriented in the same direction. We call
this a unified normals facets.
• If the selected object is made up of several groups of adjacent facets (adjacent
facets are facets sharing one common edge), unifying normals is made indepen-
dently for each facet group. The orientation of each group of unified normals
facet can be different from each other.
• A yellow arrow indicates, for each group of adjacent facets, the unified orienta-
tion. This normal can be toggled by clicking on any facet of the group.
• This property will remain active whatever transformation is made to the object.
• This option has no effect on curves.

190 Reference Manual


15.17.3 Dynamic Geometry tree
When working with Dynamic Geometry, Amapi Pro stores all the modeling steps.
The information palette displays the integrality of the hierarchy of the shapes corresponding
to the object finishing steps.
In the example of a vase made from a boolean operation (“Cut” tool) between two smoothed
objects (“Smooth” tool): the vase body was made from the extrusion (“Sweep” tool) of a
circle and the handle made from the thickness (“Thickness/Offset” tool) of a circle.

Cut 1

Smoothing 1 Smoothing 2

Sweep 1 Thickness 1

Current
selection

Polyline 1 Polyline 2 Polyline 3

Current path (path of the current selection)


Other paths

Amapi ProT M 191


192 Reference Manual
16
The constraints

By default, the cursor movement constraint is snapped on the ruler gradation grid. In some
cases, the cursor can be set free from any constraint or other kinds of constraints can be
applied to it.

Amapi Pro has several kinds of constraints:

“Snapping” (see details on page 192).

“Axis toggling” (see details on page 193).

“Advanced constraints” (see details on page 194).

“Alignment guides” (see details on page 196).

The gradated rulers of the orthonormal base shows that the user can use the cursor movement
and position constraints

Amapi ProT M 191


16.1 Snapping
16.1.1 Snapping on ruler gradation
The cursor movement can be snapped on:
• The nodes of a virtual grid, the cross-ruling of which is defined by the rulers gradations
(See “The orthonormal base” on page 88).
• The rotation circle gradations (See “Rotate” on page 244).
Toggle from one mode to the other by clicking on the toggle-icon in the Control panel (See
“The Control panel” on page 167).

The cursor is free from any constraint and moves freely in the scene.

The cursor movements are snapped on the ruler gradations or on the rotation circle
gradations.

The longer the gradation step is, the more the cursor movement is jerky. It is possible to
customize the gradation step size (increasing or decreasing it) by clicking on the icons
of the assistant palette. Shortcut: “+/-” keys when the rulers are displayed.

16.1.2 Snapping on particular points


It is possible, while working, to snap the cursor on particular points.
The object’s particular points are:
• the points defining the objects
• the middle of the segments
• the center of the objects.
To do this, press the “Shift” key while moving the cursor.

Cursor
Cursor Cursor

Snap on point Snap on middle of segment Snap on center of object

192 Reference Manual


16.2 Axis toggling
While editing, Amapi Pro allows you to set the movement constraints along one axis (See
“The orthonormal base” on page 88).
A constrained movement allows you to restrict the action of the current tool on one of the
two axis or set the action direction.
Amapi Pro has three kinds of constraints.

No constraint

Horizontal constraint

Vertical constraint

To toggle from one to the other, use the icons of the “The assistant palette” (see details on
page 206), or press the “Space-Bar”.

Cursor Cursor Cursor

No constraint Horizontal constraint Vertical constraint


The cursor movement is free constraint horizontal axis (red) constraint vertical axis (green)
is displayed. is displayed.
The cursor can move along this The cursor can move along this
axis only. axis only.

The axis toggling allows you to;


• Draw a polyline segment horizontally or vertically from the last drawn point (See
“Polyline” on page 286).
• Draw an ellipse with the tool “Sphere” (See “Sphere” on page 263).
• Stretch a selection horizontally or vertically (See “Stretch” on page 252).
• Scale a selection horizontally or vertically ((See “Scale” on page 248).
• Sweep a radial or an axial tube (See “Sweep” on page 307).

Amapi ProT M 193


16.3 Advanced constraints
Amapi Pro has a set of advanced constraints enclosed in a palette which may or may
not be displayed by clicking on this icon of the Control panel (See “The Control
panel” on page 167).

The advanced constraints allow you to move or position the cursor following the constraint
lines desired by the user.
How to proceed:
1) Click on the icon corresponding to the desired constraint.
2) Select the entities to be used to draw the constraint lines (point, edge(s) or segment(s)).
3) Move the cursor (constraint movement) and click as it reaches the right location.

Icons Constraints Illustrations

Cursor
Cancel all the constraints (free moving).

P
Moving along an axis passing through the
last drawn point and a point “P” to be Cursor
specified.

Moving along an axis passing through the S


last drawn point and parallel to an edge or a
segment “S” to be specified. Cursor

Cursor
Moving along an axis passing through the S
last drawn point and perpendicular to an
edge or a segment “S” to be specified.

194 Reference Manual


P

Moving along a vertical axis passing through


a point “P” to be specified.
Cursor

P
Cursor
Moving along a horizontal axis passing
through a point “P” to be specified.

Cursor

S
Moving along a line passing through an edge
or a segment “S” to be specified

Positioning at the intersection of the edges or S


segments extension “S” and “S’” to be
specified
S’

.
The selection of a constraint is valid for only one positioning, the cursor movement is set free
after each positioning.

This palette is floating, it can be relocated, reoriented and locked/unlocked:

Palette relocation handle.

Vertical display of the palette.


Horizontal display of the palette.
Palette locked: it remains displayed whatever the current tool.
Palette unlocked: it appears only in the current tool.

Amapi ProT M 195


16.4 Alignment guides
The “Alignment guides” tool allows you to temporarily guide the movement of the
cursor when creating 3D points. These guides are lines forming a singular angle (45
degrees, 90 degrees...) with either a horizontal or a preset direction. These guides can be
accumulated to make it possible to materialize singular line intersections. They can also be
directed along a specified axis. The control of these guides is entirely carried out with the
mouse. The guides disappear after each created point. The activation of the alignment guides
is done by clicking on a toggle icon integrated in the “The Control panel” (see details on
page 167).

“Alignment guides” enabled

“Alignment guides” disabled

There are three types of alignment guides:


The last point created automatically becomes a guide until the next point is created. It is then
replaced by the new point. The guide point is framed by a small white square. By moving
the cursor, lines are displayed when the conditions of alignment are found. For example,
when the cursor is close to a horizontal line going through the guide point.
Points selected by Ctrl-Shift-click (left mouse button) on a point are added to the list of
the guide points. You can add as many as you like but two to three points are sufficient to
carry out the majority of alignments.
The guide edges indicated by Ctrl-Shift-click (left mouse button) on an edge define a
guide point in the center of the edge and the guide lines aligned on the edge. This makes it
possible to position guides with a particular direction.
The preset angles for which lines are displayed can be set by the “Preferences editor” in
“Graphic environment”>“Alignment guides” (see details on page 462). You can set up to
eight angle values simultaneously.
When several guide lines are intersected, the intersection is materialized. Then, just click on
the point to be sure it is at the intersection of the lines.
The guide lines can become fixed movement constraints by clicking on Ctrl-Shift-Click
(right mouse button) on a singular line. The line remains displayed and the displacement is
done along this line. Defining two lines intersecting themselves will block the movement of
the cursor at the point of intersection of the curves.

196 Reference Manual


17
Scene management

Amapi Pro has several tools to manage the scene.

The layers allow you to put sets of objects together, to lock them so that they can not be
modified and to make them invisible. The layer is a very useful way to manage large
quantities of objects.
The hide and show tools make it possible to quickly select the objects you want to work on.
(See “The Layers” on page 198)
The scene graph represents the current scene in the form of a tree, the objects associated
with each material and the objects included in each layer. All the basic actions can be done
to objects such as hide, show, lock, group...
Object Information makes it possible to know object characteristics such as the type or
number of points as well as to carry out geometry cleaning actions in order to delete
coplanar faces and overlapped points. This function is integrated into the Control panel
(See “Information” on page 188)
The catalog is a native file management system. It allows you to visualize directories of
objects as thumbnails. It is possible to read, write, delete and rename files. It is also possible
to create favorites directory. The catalog is a room accessible by an icon located on the top
right-hand side of the screen.
(See “The Catalog” on page 443)

Amapi ProT M 197


17.1 The Layers
The Layer manager allows
you to arrange objects or
groups of objects depending on a
desired criteria. When the Layer
manager is open, Amapi Pro
displays all the layers of the scene
as thumbnails. It is possible to:
• Select the current layer into
which the next objects that are
created will be put.
• Hide one or several layers to
work efficiently with the rest of
the scene.
• Lock one or several layers to
prevent modifications of the
corresponding objects.
• Create a new layer.
• Delete the current layer.
• Move objects from one layer to another.

The toggle-icon located in the scene manager controls the layers display.
This palette can be located anywhere in the graphic workspace and displayed horizontally
or vertically.

Palette relocation handle.

Vertical display of the palette.

Horizontal display of the palette.

The number of layers is not limited.

198 Reference Manual


17.1.1 Select the receiving layer
The layer selected as the receiving layer is where the next created objects will be housed.
You will recognize it thanks to its particular markings (Different background color). To
select a layer as the receiving layer, just click on the thumbnail of the target layer.
A locked or hidden layer can not be selected as the receiving layer.
(See “Lock / Unlock a layer” on page 200)
(See “Show / Hide a layer” on page 200)

17.1.2 Add a layer


To add a new layer click on the icon of the layers palette.

17.1.3 Edit a layer names


Click on the layer name and type a new name to rename it.

17.1.4 Delete a layer of its contents


Select the layer to be deleted (See “Select the receiving layer” on page 199) and click on the
icon of the layers palette.

Attention! This operation cannot be undone.

17.1.5 Merge two layers


Merging two layers consists of moving the content of one layer into another layer.
To do this, use the "Drag and Drop" method:
1) Slide the cursor over a layer to be merged.
2) Click on the left mouse button and hold it. The cursor icon changes to indicate that the
transfer to another layer is allowed.
3) Move the cursor over the receiving layer.
4) Release the mouse button.

Amapi ProT M 199


17.1.6 Show / Hide a layer
When hiding a layer, all the objects included in this layer are hidden.
This method can be very useful to hide unwanted objects in order to work on other complex
objects. A toggle-icon allows you to switch from visible to not visible.
Visible layer

Invisible layer
This function is close to “Hide, Show” which allows you to select the objects to hide in the scene
without any layer concept. (See “Hide, Show” on page 184).

Hiding the receiving layer automatically selects the first visible not locked layer as the receiving
layer.
(See “Select the receiving layer” on page 199)

17.1.7 Lock / Unlock a layer


Locking a layer turns the objects on that layer into not editable objects. No action performed
on these objects will have any effect. These locked objects can be used for reference while
modeling one object belonging to another layer.
Unlocked layer

Locked layer
Locking the receiving layer automatically selects the first visible not locked layer as the receiving
layer.
(See “Select the receiving layer” on page 199)

It is possible to Lock/Unlock only one object of the scene without isolating it in a layer. This
operation will be made by using the scene graph.
(See “The Scene graph” on page 202)

17.1.8 Move one object to another layer


To move an object, a selection or a group of objects from one layer to another, you can:

By moving the selection toward another layer:


The designation of the receiving layer will be done by a simple click on the icon
corresponding to the receiving layer.

200 Reference Manual


Use the "Scene graph" method:
The changing of a layer is done by choosing the receiving layer in the list of the layers
proposed in the contextual menu related to the object.
(See “The Scene graph” on page 202).

Amapi ProT M 201


17.2 The Scene graph
The scene graph is a hierarchical representation of the objects, the groups, the layers
or the materials. This presentation allows you to browse and to organize the
hierarchies and to modify the objects attributes: it is possible to create groups, layers, to
associate an object to a material, to rename objects, to hide them or to lock them...

17.2.1 Browse the scene graph


The scene graph can be launched trough the Edit
menu or by clicking on its icon in the control panel.
The default display is a tree showing the graph of the
objects of the scene. The graphs of the groups, layers
or the materials can be displayed by clicking on their
respective thumbnails.

Graph of the objects of the scene

Graph of the groups of the scene

Graph of the materials of the scene

Graph of the layers of the scene

The objects are represented by their names associ-


ated with a letter showing their type:
• N for node (basic objects),
• G for group,
• L for layer,
• M for material.
Objects including sons (groups or dynamic geometries) have a sign + or - to the left of their
names allowing you to open or close their sons list.
The names list is ordered alphabetically.
The sons of the dynamic geometries are their control shapes.
The groups are composed by nodes, the materials contain a material list which includes
objects which use this material. Each layer contains the objects which belong the layer.

202 Reference Manual


When opening the scene graph, all the objects are open. To close them, just click on the -
sign displayed at the intersection of the branches of the tree. Inversely, to open a closed
object, click on the sign +. You can also use the keys +/- or the keyboard arrows.

17.2.2 Selection using the scene graph


It is possible to select one or more objects in the scene graph in order to apply to them one of
the operations described in the following paragraph. For this use one of the following meth-
ods:
Simple selection: click on the name of the object in the scene graph with the left mouse but-
ton. The name of the object is highlighted.
Multiple selection, element by element: Keep the “shift” key pressed while successively
clicking on the elements to be selected in the scene graph. The elements are highlighted.
Multiple selection by list: Keep the “shift” key pressed and click on the first element of the
list in the scene graph, then click on the last element. These two elements and all the ele-
ments in between them are highlighted.
Selection by name: Type the first letters of the name of the required object with the key-
board. The selection is set on the first corresponding object starting from the current selec-
tion.
Do not confuse: “Select in the scene graph” with “Select in the view”.
The selection in the scene graph will be selected in the view only if the user chooses “Select” in
the pop-up menu (right mouse click).
(See “The concept of selection” on page 147)

17.2.3 Operations on the scene graph selection


A pop-up menu will appear when the cursor is positioned on the selection and the right
mouse button is clicked.
This menu will propose several operations depending on the number and the type of the
selected element (Scene, Group, Node, Material or Layer).

Operations for node (N) or group (G) elements:


The node would be a simple graphic object with or without dynamic geometry

• Select/Unselect in the view the scene graph selection


(See “The concept of selection” on page 147)

Amapi ProT M 203


• Display the properties of the selected element (simple selection only)
(See “Information” on page 188)

• Delete the selection


(See “Deletion” on page 216)

• Rename the selected element (simple selection only)


(See “Object names” on page 92)

• Hide/Show the selection


(See “Hide, Show” on page 184)

• Lock/Unlock the selection


This operation consists of making the selection uneditable. In other words, any action
will remain without effect on this object.

• Group the selected elements


(See “Group, Ungroup” on page 186)

• Collapse the Dynamic Geometry of the selection


(See “Collapsing the DG” on page 118)

• Create a new layer


(See “The Layers” on page 198)

• Move to a layer
(See “The Layers” on page 198)

Operations for material (M) elements:


• Display the properties of the material by displaying its parameters in the rendering
room
(See “Material editor” on page 432)

• Delete a material
(See “Deleting a file from the catalog” on page 429)

• Rename a material

• Create a new material


(See “Saving a new material in the catalog” on page 430)

204 Reference Manual


Operations for layer (L) elements:
• Select the receiver layer (layer in which all the new objects will be created)
(See “Select the receiving layer” on page 199)

• Display the properties of the layer by displaying its preview thumbnail in the layers
palette.

• Delete the layer. The contents of the layer is deleted.


(See “Delete a layer of its contents” on page 199)

• Rename the layer

• Hide/Show the layer


(See “Show / Hide a layer” on page 200)

• Lock/Unlock the layer


(See “Lock / Unlock a layer” on page 200)

• Create a new layer


(See “The Layers” on page 198)

• Move to a layer
(See “The Layers” on page 198)

17.2.4 Change the group, layer or material


It is possible to reorganize specific elements with the assistance of the scene graph.
To put one or more objects or groups in another group, select the objects to be moved, click
on this selection and move them while keeping the mouse button down. Release it as soon as
the cursor is over the group.
In the same way, to change the material of a selection of objects, deposit the selection onto
the new material. If the selection contains a group, all the objects of the group will undergo
the material change.
Finally, to change a group of objects from one layer to another, proceed in the same way by
releasing the mouse button over the desired layer. The destination layer can be a layer
represented in the scene graph or the thumbnail preview of a layer in the layers window. If
the selection is a layer, all the elements of this layer will be modified. The original layer will
be empty. If the selection is a group, all the objects of the group will undergo this layer
change.

Amapi ProT M 205


206 Reference Manual
18
The Help

Amapi Pro has several kinds of help for using the program. They were created to meet the
different users’s requirements depending on their habits, their working methods and on how
they use the program.
Three help methods are available:

• “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206)

• “The contextual help” (see details on page 207)


• “The on-line help palette” (see details on page 207)
• “The on-line help icon” (see details on page 207)

• “The tooltips” (see details on page 208)

• “The cursor” (see details on page 208)

Amapi ProT M 205


18.1 The assistant palette

The assistant palette is a functional help palette for beginners that appears in the center
above the graphic workspace; it aims at guiding the beginner by graphically highlighting the
fundamental actions he or she may perform.
The trained user might prefer to use the keyboard shortcuts and choose to free the space
taken by this palette to increase the graphic workspace (See “Manage the optional palettes
display” on page 168).
Increases the value of the current parameter.
Keyboard shortcut: “+” key.
Decreases the value of the current parameter.
Keyboard shortcut: “-” key
Constrains the cursor to move only on the horizontal axis.
(See “Axis toggling” on page 193)
Keyboard shortcut: press the “Space-Bar” once.
Constrains the cursor to move only on the vertical axis.
(See “Axis toggling” on page 193)
Keyboard shortcut: press the “Space-Bar” twice.
Frees the cursor from any movement constraint.
(See “Axis toggling” on page 193)
Cancels the last operation.
(see details on page 214).
Keyboard shortcut: “Ctrl Z”.
Redoes the last cancelled operation.
(see details on page 214).
Keyboard shortcut: “Ctrl R”.
Cancels all the operations performed within the current tool.
The tool is released; you may pick up another tool. Keyboard shortcut: “Escape”.

Validates the current operation.


Keyboard shortcut: “Enter”.

206 Reference Manual


18.2 The contextual help
The on-line help palette function is useful to guide the user by pointing out the operations he
or she can carry out during each modeling step.
The on-line help is available within two options:

The on-line help palette


This palette is displayed in the left-hand part of the screen. You
may hide it to increase the graphic workspace by clicking on the
icon in the control panel.

(See “Manage the optional palettes display” on page 168).

The on-line help icon

When the cursor is slid over this icon in the control panel, a tooltip displays a contextual
help text. With this mode, the help text can be accessible when needed, while saving space
in the graphic workspace.

Amapi Pro displays the help tooltips by default, but this option can be disactivated.
This option is accessible in the “Preferences”> “User interface”> “Palettes display”> “Tooltips
display” (see details on page 456).

Amapi ProT M 207


18.3 The tooltips
When sliding the cursor over an icon, Amapi Pro displays
information about the functions corresponding to the icon.
Tooltips can be hidden in the Preferences menu (See in chapter
“Preferences editor” section “Tooltips display” on page 456).

18.4 The cursor


The shape of the cursor also gives you some information:
The selectable entity and the selection mode corresponding to the current selection
accessory (See “The selection cursors” on page 159).

The Tuner-cursor shows that a quick parameter setting can be done by using
the icons or the “+” or “-” keys.

The cursor can have a particular shape while using some tools to show the specifics
of the current operation.

208 Reference Manual


19
The Menus

The upper left hand part of the screen is dedicated to the menu bar.
Here you will find all the common classic functions included in most programs as well as
the functions specific to Amapi Pro.

As soon as you start manipulating, you might prefer accessing Amapi Pro’s functions by
using the Amapi Pro interface.

Amapi ProT M 209


19.1 File
This paragraph shows the “classic” File menu manager accessible from the menu bar in the
upper left hand part of your screen.
Amapi Pro contains another File menu manager system, which is more visual, simpler and
faster: the “Catalog” (See “The Catalog” on page 443).
Most of these functions are also available using keyboard shortcuts.

19.1.1 Opening/ Closing


New (Ctrl+N)
This command of the File Menu creates a new Amapi Pro blank document.
The new document's default name is “untitled” followed by a numbered order.
By default, it is displayed at the top left hand side of the screen (See “Display the file name”
on page 457).
It is possible to rename the file when saving it (see details on page 211).
Note that you may have several documents opened at the same time and toggle from one to
the other by:
• Using the “Window” (see details on page 227) menu.
• Using the “Ctrl -Tab” keyboard shortcut.

Open (Ctrl+O)
This command of the File Menu displays an opening file window.
The Open dialog window allows you to specify the file to open.
You may select a format in the proposed list (See “Import” on page 229). If the current
document is not empty, the scene corresponding to the file open will be displayed in another
document.

Merge (Ctrl+M)
This command of the File Menu allows you to open a file and merge the objects contained in
this file into the current scene.

Close (Ctrl+W )
This command of the File Menu closes the current document.
If your document contains unsaved modifications, Amapi Pro will ask you: “Would you like
to save the changes?”.
If so, click:
• “Yes”, if you want to save the latest changes.

210 Reference Manual


• “No”, if you want to close the document without saving the changes.
• “Cancel”, if you decide to not close the document.
If another document was open, it becomes the current document. If there is no document
open, the program remains ready to open another document or to create a new one.

19.1.2 Saving files


Save (Ctrl+S)
This function takes effect only if the scene has been saved at least once.
• If this is the case, the scene is saved under the same name as the previous one (the former
file version is lost).
• If it is not the case, it automatically opens the “Save as (Ctrl+E)” dialog box (see details
on page 211).
Amapi Pro does not perform automatic file saving while modeling. Many valuable working
hours can be lost because of a power cut or a false maneuver. It is very important to save an
object (possibly under an other name) before making a complex modification. Thus, if you are
not satisfied with the result, you can return to the preceding step. However, you will have to close
the document without saving it.

With each request for saving a scene in the Amapi Designer format, the program will update the
associated file with the “.png” suffix. This file corresponds to a small thumbnail of the scene,
used by the Amapi Pro catalog (See “The Catalog” on page 443).

Save as (Ctrl+E)
This command of the File Menu opens a dialog box. You are then allowed to:
• Name the document
• Select an output format
• Specify the folder to save the file in.
You may save a file from the “Catalog” room, using Amapi Pro’s File management tool (See
“The Catalog” on page 443).

With each request for saving a scene in the Amapi Pro format, the program will update the
associated file with the “.png” suffix. This file corresponds to a small thumbnail of the scene,
used by the Amapi Pro catalog (See “The Catalog” on page 443).

Amapi ProT M 211


19.1.3 Import-Export
Import
This function allows you to specify the kind and name of file you want to import.
You will find the complete list of formats in the “Import” paragraph (see details on
page 229).
You may save a file from the “Catalog” room, using Amapi Pro’s File management tool (See
“The Catalog” on page 443).

Export
This function allows you to export the current document to the format you want to select.
You will find the complete list of formats in the “Export” paragraph (see details on
page 231).
You may save a file from the “Catalog” room, using Amapi Pro’s File management tool (See
“The Catalog” on page 443).

Import/Export preferences
Open the “Import / Export” preferences window (see details on page 474).

19.1.4 Printing
Print: (Ctrl+P)
Launches the wireframe printing of the entire scene or a part of it.
If you are printing for the first time, Amapi Pro requires that you define the printing format
(page feed, page format, margins, printer).
A dialog window from the Preferences /Printing menu, allows you to set the printing
parameters. You may choose to print the measurements, in hidden line mode or to give a scaling
factor (“Preferences”> “Printing preferences”)

Printing configuration (Ctrl+Shift+P)


A dialog box allows you to set the printing characteristics of your document.
Depending on your printer, you will see a dialog box with the parameters you need to set for
page feeding, page size and orientation and margins values.

Printing preferences
Opens the printing preferences window (see details on page 474).

212 Reference Manual


Printing a Postscript file
Opens a printing preferences window where you can select the destination folder and the
name of the postscript (.ps) file.

19.1.5 Opening recent files


Opening recently opened files:
At the bottom of the “File” menu, Amapi Pro lists the names of recently opened files. This
list is useful to reopen a recent file from this list.

19.1.6 Leaving the program


Quit (Ctrl+Q)
This command in the File Menu closes and quits Amapi Pro. If one of the open documents
contains unsaved modifications, Amapi Pro will ask you if you want to save them.

Amapi ProT M 213


19.2 Edit
This paragraph shows the functions present in the editing menu. However, Amapi Pro has
several palettes which will give you an easier, faster and a better visual access.
• “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206)

• “The Control panel” (see details on page 167)

Most of these functions are also available through keyboard shortcuts.

19.2.1 Basic commands


Undo (Ctrl+Z)
Cancels the last operation.
It is accessible from the “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206).

• When you are not using a tool, it cancels all the operations carried out by the more
recently used tool.
• When you are using a tool, it cancels the last operation carried out with the tool in use.
Cancel no longer has any effect when all the operations have been cancelled with a
specific tool.
The number of possible successive cancellations is defined by the user in the preferences
menu. You can have access to this option in the “Preferences editor” (Alt-P)> “User interface”>
“Maximum undo levels” (see details on page 456).

Redo (Ctrl+R)
This command of the File Menu restores the last undone action.
Accessible from the “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206).

Validate (“Return key”)


Validates the current action.
Accessible from the “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206).

214 Reference Manual


Cancel (“Escape key”)
Cancels all the operations made with the current tool. The tool is dropped so that you
can select another one.
Accessible from the “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206).

19.2.2 Copy
Cut (Ctrl+X)
This command in the File Menu deletes the selected elements from the current scene and
copies them into the clipboard where they are stored until they are pasted.

Copy (Ctrl+C)
This command in the File Menu places a copy of the selected elements from the current
scene into the clipboard without deleting them from the original scene.
Amapi Pro has a “Duplicate” tool (see details on page 388) which might be more suitable for
the kind manipulations you will do with this program.

Paste (Ctrl+V)
This command of the File Menu will paste a copy of the current clipboard content in the
graphic workspace.
Amapi Pro, pastes an object in the exact position (from the point of origin of the working space)
where it was cut from, even if you have opened another document. If you paste the copy into the
original document, keep in mind that your copy will be superimposed onto the original object.

This kind of copy never generates a clone (See “The clones” on page 107).
You could use it to take an object out of a group of clones:
• Cut the cloned object (Ctrl+X) (see details on page 215)
• Paste the object (Ctrl+V)

Duplicate (Ctrl+D)
Duplication creates a clone of the selection and locates it in the same place (See “The
clones” on page 107).

Amapi ProT M 215


19.2.3 Deletion
Delete (“Delete”)
This command in the File Menu deletes the current selection. The difference with the “Cut”
command is that nothing is saved in the clipboard.

Delete all (Ctrl+“Delete”)


This command in the File Menu deletes all the objects of the current scene, including the
hidden objects (See “Hide, Show” on page 184)

19.2.4 Selection
Select All (Ctrl+A)
This command in the File Menu selects all the objects of the current scene.

Deselect All (Ctrl+Shift+A)


This command in the File Menu deselects all the objects of the current scene.
(See “Deselect all” on page 157).

Select next (“+”)


This command in the File Menu selects the next object of the current scene. The order of the
selection will follow that of the object creation.

Select previous (“-”)


This command in the File Menu selects the previous object of the current scene. The order of
the selection will follow that of the object creation.

19.2.5 The editing windows


Editing the object information (Ctrl I)
Use the Information command if you want to see and/or modify the information about the
current selection.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel (See “Information” on
page 188) or by double-clicking on the object.

216 Reference Manual


Editing the preferences (Alt+P)
Open the “Edit preferences” palette.
To get more information about this, see the “Preferences” paragraph (see details on
page 451).

Editing a shortcut (Alt+K)


The “Edit a shortcut” tool can be very useful, because it allows you to set your own shortcuts
and to get to your preferred tools or functions faster (See “Shortcuts Editor” on page 478).

Editing the scene graph of the scene (Alt+T)


See “The Scene graph” paragraph on page 202.

Searching for objects (Alt+F)


The “Search for objects” palette allows you to make a list of the objects in the scene accord-
ing to the criteria you have selected. The available search criteria are:
• Name of the object
• Curves/Volumes
• Polyhedral
• NURBS
• Groups
• Text
• Dynamic
• Visible
The icon on the left hand side of the text editing area will launch the search.
Amapi Pro will then list the name of the objects corresponding to the criteria.
You can select one or several objects in that list. They will become the current selection (see
“The concept of selection” on page 147).

Amapi ProT M 217


19.3 Scene
19.3.1 Graphic display
Objects display
While modeling, you will manipulate various entities: points, edges, facets or objects (See
“Entity” on page 94).
Amapi Pro has several display modes for the objects of the scene which will allow you to
best highlight the entities you want to work with.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.
To get more information about this, see “The display modes” paragraph on page 180.

The “Wireframe” mode displays only the edges of the objects.

The “Lit Wireframe” mode adds a lit effect to the “wireframe” mode.

The “Flat solid” mode gives a more realistic aspect to the objects by displaying the
facets of the objects.
The “Flat solid and edges” display mode adds edges to the “Flat solid” mode.

The “Smoothed solid” mode correspond to the “Flat solid” mode on which an
operation of smoothing have been applied. This is the most realistic mode.
The “Smoothed solid and edges” display mode adds edges to the “Smoothed
solid” mode.
The edge display is different depending on the operating mode “Change the
construction mode” (see details on page 96):
In NURBS operating mode, edges are not editable and they will not be displayed.
Amapi Pro will display isoparametric curves, outlines and cutting curves instead of the
edges. (See “The NURBS models” on page 98).

Transparency
You can add a transparency effect to the “solid” display modes.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.
To get more information about this, see “Transparency of the selected object” paragraph on
page 181.

218 Reference Manual


Display “with transparency effect”

Display “not transparent effect”

Simplified display
It is possible to display the objects in a simplified way. In the case of complex scenes or
objects, a simplified display can be used in order to give a faster and clearer display. You
will be able to choose between a simplified display of the entire scene and a simplified
display of one or more objects indicated in the scene.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.
To get more information about this, see the “Simplified display” paragraph on
page 177.

Enable/Disable the backface display


A frontface is the facet of a model where the normal is oriented toward the
observer.
A backface is the facet of a model where the normal is not oriented toward the
observer.
Disabling the backface display is one of the ways to optimize display time.

19.3.2 The objects


Hide (Ctrl+H)
Hide the selected objects.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.
For more information, refer to the “Hide” paragraph on page 184.

Show hidden objects (Shift+H)


Opens the function allowing you to indicate the objects to show.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel. For more information,
refer to the “Show” paragraph on page 184.

Show selection (Alt+H)


The “Isolate” mode-tool allows the user to work on the selection in progress without being
obstructed with the display of surrounding objects.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel. For more information,
refer to the “Isolate” paragraph.

Amapi ProT M 219


Group (Ctrl+G)
Groups selected objects.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel. For more information,
refer to the “Group” paragraph on page 186.

Ungroup (Ctrl+Shift+G)
Opens the function allowing you to indicate the groups to be ungrouped.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel. For more information,
refer to the “Ungroup”paragraph on page 186.

Layers
Opens the layer window. Classification by layer enables you to arrange your objects or
groups according to the criteria of your choice. You will be able to hide one or more layers.
You will also be able to lock one or more layers to allow modeling only on "active" layers.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel. For more information,
refer to “The Layers” paragraph on page 198.

Working with or without the Dynamic Geometry


Work without Dynamic Geometry
Work with Dynamic Geometry

19.3.3 Rulers, working plane


Working in the working plane
For your modeling needs, you might want to work on a different working plane from the one
set by default.
Indeed, you might want to work according to the current plane view. The working plane will
be reorientated according to the displacement of the point of view in the graphic workspace.
In fact the working plane will always be on the same plane as the screen.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.
To get more information about this, see the “Working in the view plane” paragraph
on page 169.

Toggle the scene / the axis


You might also want to reorientate the axis temporarily so as to change working plane while
modeling. Amapi Pro proposes several ways to proceed:
• Toggle the axis.

220 Reference Manual


• Toggle the scene and the axis.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.
To get more information about this, see the “Scene / orthonormal base toggling”
paragraph on page 171.

“Orthonormal base origin”


Amapi Pro sets the origin of the rulers by default to the position at the center of the grid
called “the ground”. You can constantly move it while modeling.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.
To get more information about this, see the “Orthonormal base origin” paragraph
on page 173.

Perspective
This mode-tool allows you to toggle on one of two scene display modes:
• The Conical Perspective is set by default.
• The Orthographic Perspective allows you to observe the scene without perspective.
This display mode can, in some cases, allow a clearer visualization of your work and to
make easier some manipulations.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.
To get more information about this, see the “Perspective” paragraph on page 176.

19.3.4 Constraints
By default, the cursor movement is free from any constraint. For some manipulations, cursor
movement constraints or cursor positioning constraints can be set. See “The constraints” on
page 191.

Advanced Constraints
The advanced constraint tool permits moving or positioning the cursor according to con-
straints defined by the user. They are located in a palette which can be toggled on and off.
This function is accessible through the control panel.
(See “Advanced constraints” on page 194)

Constrains the cursor movement to a horizontal axis


Keyboard shortcut: one pressure on the “Space-Bar”.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.
To get more information about this, see the “The assistant palette” on page 206
paragraph.

Amapi ProT M 221


Constrains the cursor movement to a vertical axis
Keyboard shortcut: two pressures on the “Space-Bar”.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.
To get more information, see “The assistant palette” paragraph on page 206.

Release the cursor from constrained movement


This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.
To get more information, see “The assistant palette” paragraph on page 206.

Snap to the grid


This mode-tool allows you to specify if the cursor is to be snapped or not onto the virtual
magnetism of the grid.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.
To get more information, see the “Snapping” paragraph on page 174.
The not magnetized cursor moves freely in the scene.

The magnetized cursor snaps to the grid intersection points, defined by the gradation
of the rulers.

Alignment Guides
The “Alignment guides” tool allows you to temporarily guide the cursor movement when
creating 3D points (See “Alignment guides” on page 462).

“Alignment guides” disabled

“Alignment guides” enabled

19.3.5 Construction mode


Amapi Pro has two creation modes for the elements used as a basis for modeling:
• “The Polyhedral models” (see details on page 97)
• “The NURBS models” (see details on page 98)
You will constantly be able to toggle from one construction mode to the other with the
(Ctrl+B) keyboard shortcut.

222 Reference Manual


19.4 Views
This menu gives access to the main navigational functions; however Amapi Pro has other
very effective interfaces:

“The Navigation Palette” (see details on page 136)

“The keyboard navigation” (see details on page 142) (keyboard only or


combination keyboard+mouse)

View all (shortcut: 0)


(See “View All” on page 139)

View Detail (shortcut: 1)


(See “View Detail” on page 140)

Zoom Out (shortcut: .)


(See “Zoom In / Out” on page 140)

Zoom In (shortcut: 3)
(See “Zoom In / Out” on page 140)

Make a direct viewpoint change (shortcut: Ctrl .)


(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142)

Amapi ProT M 223


Progressive tuning of a viewpoint (shortcut: 7)
(See “To rotate around the scene” on page 143)

Viewpoint
(See “Record the current viewpoint” on page 138)
(See “Delete a viewpoint” on page 139)

Front view (shortcut: 2


(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142)

Left view (shortcut: 4)


(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142)

Top view (shortcut: 5)


(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142)

Right view (shortcut: 6)


(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142)

Rear view (shortcut: 8)


(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142)

Bottom view (shortcut: 9)


(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142)

224 Reference Manual


19.5 Tools
We saw that the tools that are specific to each Room are arranged in palettes.

The Modeling room has many tools. For more clarity, Amapi Pro displays only the tools that
you will most likely need at each stage of your work.
That is why they were split in three palettes:
• The Construction palette
• The Modeling palette
• The Assembly palette
Each one of these main palettes has a “Basic toolkit” composed of the fundamental tools
you always have at hand, at every modeling step.

The "Tool" menu gives access to each tool existing in the modeling palette. For more details
on the use of each one of them, refer to the corresponding paragraph in “Modeling room” on
page 237.

The basic toolkit The construction The modeling The assembly


palette palette palette

This This This This


palette is palette palette palette
always contains contains contains
visible. It contains basic line modificati tools to
the “Move”, and on tools carry out
“Rotate”, “Scale” surface that can complex
and “Stretch” tools. drawing edit assemblie
tools as existing s and a
well as objects. few
advanced surface generic tools
creation tools.

19.5.1 Advanced tools


This menu contains some special tools which are not present in the four tools palettes. They
are accessible either from the Control panel or from the Information on the current object.

Amapi ProT M 225


19.5.2 Peripherals
This menu contains the management functions for input peripherals.

19.5.2.1 MicroScribe
Setting the digitalization of the 3D MicroScribe device (See “3D Digitizing” on page 233).

Connect:
enables the MicroScribe device

Disconnect:
disables the MicroScribe device

Calibrate:
MicroScribe device working planes initialization sequence

226 Reference Manual


19.6 Window
This menu is divided into two parts:

Window
This function gives you the possibility of working in single-view or multi-view
window.
This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.

For more information on this subject, consult “Simple-view / Multi-view” on page


178.

Documents
This part of the menu allows you to move from one open document to another. It lists the
open documents. A check mark precedes the name of the current document.
To move from the one to the other, click on the name of the document you wish to work on.
The combination of the “Ctrl-Tab” keys allows you to pass quickly from one document to
the other (in the order of appearance on the list).

Amapi ProT M 227


19.7 Rooms
Amapi Pro does not limit you to use a specific procedure, but it does propose to lead you
through a choice of specific steps, depending on the result you wish to obtain.
A "Room" corresponds to each one of these steps.
The “Tool” menu gives access to the Rooms. To obtain more details on the use of each one
of them, refer to the paragraph which is devoted to it:

• The Modeling Room allows you to build, model and assemble your model (See
“Modeling room” on page 237).

• The Rendering Room is where you will develop textures and lighting (See “Rendering
Room” on page 421).

• The Catalog Room in which you will insert objects or will save your creations (See “The
Catalog” on page 443).
You can also go from one Room to the other by clicking on the icon
corresponding to the desired Room (on the top right of the screen).

228 Reference Manual


20
Import / Export

20.1 Import
List of import file formats supported by Amapi Pro:

Programs Suffixes Comments

3D Studio 3ds Autodesk file format.This format is becoming a standard for 3D files.

Amapi Pro a3p Amapi Pro native format

Amapi Designer a3d Amapi Designer native format

DWG dwg Autocad binary native format by Autodesk. Compact and complete, it is
very useful to communicate with Autocad.

DXF dxf The most well known PC and Mac graphic file type. Used by all the 3D
programs.

IGES igs Industry standard, used by CATIA, Pro Engineer, Euclid…

Illustrator 3.0 ai Well-known 2D format for graphical artists.

Open Inventor iv CAD format file (was used as a base for the VRML format).

STL stl Stereolitography file format

Amapi ProT M 229


VRML 1/97 wrl The most commonly used 3D format on the Web !

WaveFrontObj obj Allows exchange with programs such as:


• Shade
• Archicad
• Alias / Wavefront
• Bryce
• Carrara
• Electric Image
• Maya
• Nendo
• Poser
• Softimage
• Vue d’Esprit

There are several ways to import a file:

• Use the File > Import menu


• Use the File > Open menu (keyboard shortcut Crtl-O).
• Use the File > Merge menu (keyboard shortcut Crtl-M).
• Click on the icon of the “The Catalog” (see details on page 443).

Some imported files may have topology problems. The “Information” tool can help to solve
these problems.
(See “Information” on page 188).

230 Reference Manual


20.2 Export
List of export file formats supported by Amapi Pro:

Programs Suffixes Types of supported Comments


objects

3D Studio 3ds Polyhedral Autodesk file format.This format is becoming a standard


for 3D files.

Amapi Pro a3p Polyhedral Amapi3D files


NURBS

Amapi Designer a3d Polyhedral BREPs and some dynamic geometries are reduced to
NURBS basic primitives before exportation.

Carrara Studio car Polyhedral Carrara Studio files

DXF dxf Polyhedral The most well known PC and Mac graphic file type. Used
by all the 3D programs.

DWG dwg Polyhedral Binary Autocad format, very well known on PC and Mac
graphic stations

IGES igs Polyhedral Industry standard, used by CATIA, Pro Engineer,


NURBS Euclid…

Illustrator ai Used to export a file compatible with Illustrator (See


“Printing a Postscript file” on page 213).

Open Inventor iv Polyhedral CAD format file (was used as a base for the VRML
NURBS format).

STL stl Polyhedral Stereolitography file format

Amapi ProT M 231


VRML 1/97 wrl Polyhedral The most commonly used 3D format on the Web !

WaveFrontObj obj Polyhedral Allows exchange with programs such as:


NURBS • Shade
• Archicad
• Alias / Wavefront
• Bryce
• Carrara
• Electric Image
• Maya
• Nendo
• Poser
• Softimage
• Vue d’Esprit

There are several ways to export a file:

• Use the File > Export menu


• Use the File > Save as menu (keyboard shortcut Crtl-E).
• Click on the icon of the “The Catalog” (see details on page 443).

232 Reference Manual


21
3D Digitizing

Amapi Pro allows you to model using the digitizing devices to create a numeric model from
a physic model. For example, you may use a 3D digitizer to create a car from a model. The
digitizing process is used to create lines or facets and assemble them to realize a complete
model.

21.1 MicroScribe
A MicroScribe 3D digitizing system is a precise
and easy to use device, commonly used for this
kind of work. It is built by Immersion Corp.
To use the MicroScribe in Amapi Pro, you just
have to connect it and calibrate it. After that all of
the functions that create 3d points (using the line
drawing tools) or facets will use the 3d digitizers
input. To come back to a classic modeling mode,
just disconnect it. Use the Tools/Peripherals
menu to connect, disconnect and calibrate it.
Amapi Pro automatically detects the MicroScribe
device when it is connected to a serial port or an
USB port. It is not necessary to install a driver. Amapi Pro includes the MicroScribe drivers.

Amapi ProT M 233


21.2 Calibration
The calibration process consists of defining the y
true working space of the digitizer. This
operation must be made each time Amapi Pro is
launched or when the object or the digitizer is
moved. Use the Tools/Peripherals menu to do
the calibration.
Amapi Pro asks you to define the following
points:
• xmin, xmax: the X axis digitizing domain
limits.
• zmin, zmax: the Z axis digitizing domain x
limits.
z
• y0: the working plane vertical position in Y
The X,Y and Z axis correspond to the axis
displayed in Amapi Pro.
These points define a plane from the center of the base of the digitizer. Generally, these
points will be taken on the table where the object to be digitized is placed.
Once the calibration is done, you can perform the digitizing operation.

21.3 The tools which allow you to digitize


The “Polyline”, “Curve”, “Interpolated curve”, and “Extract Facets” drawing tools allow
you to digitize 3D objects.
Connect the 3D digitizer before using it with these tools and disconnect it to be able to use
the mouse again.
Use the Tools/Peripherals menu to connect, disconnect and calibrate it.
To digitize a line on a 3D object:
1) connect the 3D digitizer (Tools/Peripherals menu), after having calibrated it.
2) click on the polyline tool.
3) place the digitizer’s head on the first point to be captured.
4) press on the left pedal digitizer.
5) move the digitizer’s head to a new point on the object.
6) repeat the operation as many times as necessary to get a line.

234 Reference Manual


7) End the drawing by pressing on the digitizer’s right pedal or by pressing the Enter key of
the keyboard.

21.4 AutoPlot Mode and Scaling factor


The AutoPlot mode can be accessed from the preferences dialog “Preferences editor” on
page 447, allowing you to digitize in continuous mode by moving the digitizer’s head on the
surface. In this mode, a point is automatically created after the digitizer’s head covers a
distance defined by the AutoPlot Distance parameter.
A scale factor can be applied to the points generated by the digitizer to make them in a
space which will be consistent with the rest of the scene. Adjust the Scale parameter in the
preferences dialog.
You can have access to this option in the “Preferences editor” (Alt-P)>“Graphic
environment”> “MicroScribe” (see details on page 464).

Amapi ProT M 235


236 Reference Manual
Modeling room
In the modeling room, Amapi Pro displays only the tools likely to be necessary for
each step of modeling.
That is why they are divided into three palettes:

Each room offers different functions called “Tools”.


The tools of the modeling room have been separated
into specialized groups of tools called “Tools
palettes”.
Amapi Pro will display only the tools needed for each
step of work. This is why they have been divided into Construction
three different groups. Each group, called a “Palette”, palette
corresponds to a modeling step:

• The “Basic toolkit”


• The Construction palette
• The Modeling palette
• The Assembly palette

Modeling
palette

The general operation of a modeling tool is based on


the same principle as the tools of the other rooms (See
“Using tools” on page 80).

Assembly
palette

Amapi ProT M 239


240 Reference Manual
22
Basic toolkit

Above each main tools palette, a “Toolkit” is displayed. It contains tools which are always
available even while using a tool from the main palettes.

Icon Tool name Description See

“Move” Use this tool to change the position of the current object. page 242

“Rotate” Use this tool to rotate the current object. page 244

This tool changes the size of the current object, either


“Scale” keeping its original proportions, or distorting it vertically or page 248
horizontally.

The “Stretch” tool is used to move the current selection


“Stretch” (facets, edges and/or points). The selected objects will be page 252
deformed according to the cursor movement.

Amapi ProT M 241


22.1 Move
The “Move” tool allows you to move a
selected object in the scene (See “The
concept of selection” on page 147).

22.1.1 The move tool


There are several ways to move objects:

• By moving the object “by hand” in the graphic workspace. There are two possible
interfaces:
• A short click followed by a cursor motion moves the selection. A second click locks
its position.
• A long click allows you to move the selection. It will follow the cursor motion. Just
release the mouse button to lock its position.
You are allowed to give positioning or moving constraints to the cursor with “The
constraints” (see details on page 191).

• By entering new coordinates directly in the data window (see details on page 163).

• By using the “Remote Control” (“Ctrl”+“Shift”+Arrow): this edit mode allows a fine
and interactive tuning of the numerical parameters (see details on page 162).

Now, you may move the selection again or leave the tool by putting it beside or by pressing
the “Enter” key.

242 Reference Manual


22.1.2 Moving when no tool is selected
When no tool is selected, you can move any object in the scene, even if it is not the current
object (See “The concept of selection” on page 147).
A long click allows you to move any other object in the scene. That one will follow the
cursor motion. Just release the mouse button to lock its position.
This kind of moving does not allow editable parameters.

22.1.3 Additional information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool can be applied at any DG level. Its effects will
be reflected at the higher levels.
“Dynamic Geometry (DG)” (see details on page 109).

The cursor motion follows the working plane (see details on page 488)
The motion of the mouse will modify two out of three displayed values (x, y and z) only.
There are several possibilities to modify the third value:
• Change the point of view (See “The Navigation” on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

Automatic duplication:
If the “Ctrl” key is pressed while selecting the “Move” tool, Amapi Pro will automatically generate
a copy of the current object.

Change current object: .


This tool allows you to change the current object by using the “Change the current object”
accessory.

This tool must be distinguished from the “Stretch” tool (see details on page 252) which
moves the current selection while the “Move” tool moves the selected object(s).

Amapi ProT M 243


22.2 Rotate
The “Rotate” tool rotates the current selection
(See “The concept of selection” on page 147)
on an axis passing by its geometric center (default) and
perpendicular to the working plane.
This tool allows you to rotate according to a given
angle, or rotate an object to align one point of the
object and one point selected in the scene. In both
cases, the position of the center and the rotation plane
can be customized.

22.2.1 Methods of rotation


The operation can be made using one of the two following methods. toggle from one to the
other by using both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys or by clicking on the corresponding
icon.

22.2.1.1 Rotate by a given angle


The gradations of the “rotation circle”
can be used as a help to rotate the 2- click
selection.
Select a method to set the “rotation angle”
1- click
parameter:
• The “freehand” method in the graphic
workspace:
• A first click to start the action: the
selection rotates on its rotation reference
point, depending on the cursor movement. A second click sets the position.
• Or, click and hold down the mouse button to rotate the selection which rotates on its
rotation reference point, depending on the cursor movement. Releasing the mouse
button sets its position.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163).
• Using the “Remote Control” (“Ctrl”+“Shift”+Arrow): This edit mode allows fine and
interactive tuning of the numeric parameters (see details on page 162).

244 Reference Manual


22.2.1.2 Rotate to align
This method allows you to rotate an object, on its rotation reference point, to align
one point of the object and one point selected in the scene using:
1- click
2- click
• A gradation from the “rotation circle”.
Click on the point to be aligned, then click on
the desired gradation.

1- click 2- Shift+click
• A point to be selected in the scene.
Click on the point to be aligned, then press
and hold the “Shift” key and click on the
desired point.

22.2.2 Rotation axis orientation


A rotation is always done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).
The two axis that parallels the current view plane the most define the working plane, where
the modeling will be done. The user will have to change the viewpoint to change the
working plane (See “The Navigation” on page 135).
It is also possible to “Working in the view plane” (see details on page 169) or to “Scene /
orthonormal base toggling” (see details on page 171).

22.2.3 Rotation reference point repositioning


The rotation reference point is a point
located on the rotation axis. The
default center is the geometric center of the
selection. To change it, use the “Change the
rotation center” accessory (See “Tool
accessories” on page 85), then select the point
of the object which will be the new rotation
point.

Amapi ProT M 245


22.2.4 Global / Local options

Global rotation Local rotation

Option The complete selection rotates on a unique Each element of the selection rotates on its
description rotation point ( ). own rotation point ( ).

Illustration

22.2.5 Tuning the gradation accuracy


The “+” or “-” keys will increase or decrease the number of gradations of the “rotation
circle”.

22.2.6 Magnetizing the rotation circle gradations


You can choose to magnetize or not to magnetize the cursor on the rotation circle gradation:
You will toggle from one mode to the other by clicking on the toggle-icon in the options
palette.

Rotation is continuous and follows the cursor movement.


The rotation undergoes an attraction to the gradations of the rotation circle, turning to
each angle of the gradation steps.

When launching the tool, this option is initialized with the current magnetic value of the
grid, controlled by the toggle-icon integrated into the Control panel (See “Snapping” on
page 174).

246 Reference Manual


22.2.7 Additional information
The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):
This tool is an editor-tool able to edit:
• The first DG level by carrying out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at
higher levels.
• A shape located at any DG level. In this case, the tool will not work on the current selection but on the
entire shape
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

Automatic duplication:
If the “Ctrl” key is pressed while picking up the tool, Amapi Pro will automatically duplicate the
entire objects selection. The tool action will then be made on this copy

The tool and the clones (See “The clones” on page 107):
• If the current selection is a part of a cloned object, it will be deformed. All its clones will get the same
transformation.
• If the current selection is a cloned object, it will not be deformed. None of the clones will be rotated

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Change the current object: .


This tool allows you to change the current object by using the “Change the current object”
accessory.

Amapi ProT M 247


22.3 Scale
This tool is used to change the size of the current selection, keeping its original
proportions or distorting it vertically or horizontally (See “The concept of
selection” on page 147). A scaling percentage, a dimension, a surface or a volume can also
be set.

Original object Proportionally scaled object Vertically scaled object

There are three ways of scaling:

• “by hand”, using the object bounding box (click to start the action, move cursor, then
release the mouse button to validate).

• By entering a value (dimension, percentage surface or volume) in the parameter palette


(see details on page 163).

• Using the “Remote Control” (“Ctrl”+“Shift”+Arrow): This edit mode allows a fine and
interactive tuning of the numerical parameters (see details on page 162).

Not proportional scaling: the “manual” scaling uses the constraints set by the user. A cursor
movement without any constraint makes a proportional scaling in the three dimensions. But a
cursor movement with constraint (see details on page 250) or values entered through the
keyboard allows a different scaling in the three dimensions.

248 Reference Manual


22.3.1 Center / base reference point
The reference point is the point the scaling will be made from. Amapi Pro gives the choice
between two points:

The geometric center of the object

The center of the base of its bounding box


Toggle from one to the other by using both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys or by clicking on
the corresponding icon.

It is also possible to select a point on the object to define the reference point (See
“Customizing the reference point” on page 249).

The reference point The reference point


is the center of the object is the center of the base
of the bounding box of the object

22.3.2 Customizing the reference point


The reference point is the point the scaling will be made from.

It is also possible to select a point on the object to define the reference point. To do this, use
the “Change the scale center” accessory, then select the point of the scene which will be the
new reference point.

Amapi ProT M 249


22.3.3 The constraints
Amapi Pro proposes three types of constraints. Toggle from one to the other by using the
icons located in “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206); or by pressing the “Space-
Bar”

Proportional Horizontal Vertical


scaling scaling scaling

Editable
parameters
in the graphic
workspace

Editable •X (Width) •X (Width) •X (Width)


parameters •Y (Height) •Y (Height) •Y (Height)
in the parameter
•Z (Depth) •Z (Depth) •Z (Depth)
palette
•Scale factor •Scale factor x •Scale factor x
•Surface •Scale factor y •Scale factor y
•Volume to reach •Scale factor z •Scale factor z

22.3.4 Global / Local options

Global scaling Local scaling

Option The entire selection is scaled from a Each element selected is scaled
description common reference point. from its own reference point.

Illustration

250 Reference Manual


22.3.5 Additional information
The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):
This tool is an editor-tool able to edit:
• The first DG level by carrying out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at
higher levels.
• A shape located at any DG level. In this case, the tool will not work on the current selection but on the
entire shape
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

Automatic duplication:
If the “Ctrl” key is pressed while picking up the tool, Amapi Pro will automatically duplicate the
entire objects selection. The tool action will then be made on this copy

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) to set a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Change current object: .


This tool allows you to change the current object by using the “Change the current object”
accessory.

The tool and the clones (See “The clones” on page 107):
• If the current selection is a part of a cloned object, it will be deformed. All its clones will get the same
transformation.
• If the current selection is a cloned object, it will not be deformed. None of its clones will be
transformed

Amapi ProT M 251


22.4 Stretch
The “Stretch” tool allows you to move the current selection (facets, edges and/or
points). The selected objects will be distorted depending on the cursor movement
(See “The concept of selection” on page 147).

The object before The object after


using the tool using the tool
Illustration: Stretch a set of points to make the groove in an apricot

22.4.1 The selection


There are two cases;

• The elements have been selected (facets, edges and/or points) before picking up the
tool or the selection was changed inside the tool: a click in the graphic workspace will
start the stretch action.

• The elements have not been selected (facets, edges and/or points) on the current
object(s): before starting the action, a click in the graphic workspace will start the
selection of the closest elements corresponding to the selectable entity (See “The
selectable entities” on page 149).

252 Reference Manual


22.4.2 Movement modes options
This tool has several movement modes as options:
• An absolute movement mode.
• A movement mode along the normal.
Toggle from one to the other by using both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys or by clicking on
the corresponding icon.

Stretch the selection Stretch each element of the


All the selected elements are selection following the normal.
moved while keeping their relative
position. All the selected elements are moved
the same distance but not in the same
direction. Each one is moved
following its own normal from the
original object.
Illustration:

Editable • • Move x • •Length


parameters • Move y
• Move z

Amapi ProT M 253


22.4.3 Stretch NURBS objects
NURBS objects have a Dynamic Geometry level corresponding to their control polygon.
When working at that Dynamic Geometry level, the “Stretch” tool will work just like on
polygonal models but on the control polygon and not on the object itself.
(See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96)
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

Polygonal object NURBS object


and its control polygon

Stretch a point Stretch a point


on a polygonal object on the control polygon
of a NURBS object

Stretch a point Stretch a point


on a polygonal object on the control polygon
of a NURBS object

254 Reference Manual


22.4.4 Stretch an object having a Deformer control
box
The “Deform” (see details on page 374) tool adds a
Dynamic Geometry level corresponding to a Deformer
control box (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)
The object itself will be transformed following the actions
made on this “Deformer control box”. The use of this
control box works as on the NURBS objects control box
(See “Stretch NURBS objects” on page 254).
The “Deformer control box” accessory from the “Deform”
tool allows you to modify the mesh density in x,y and/or z
to work more or less precisely (See “The meshed control
box editing accessories” on page 376).

22.4.5 Control of the depth of a cut


The “Stretch” tool allows you to control the depth of a cut made with the“Punch” tool.

Object cut with the The same object and The cut depth line while Object cut with
“Punch” tool. the line allowing you to setting it with the the“Punch” tool where
The object is drilled set the depth of the cut “Stretch” tool the depth has been
from a face through the in the “Stretch” tool reduced
other one

(See “Punch” on page 357)

22.4.6 Editing the tangents of the NURBS curves


The “Stretch” tool allows you to edit the tangents of the NURBS curves to modify
the shape of a curve after it is built. To do this,
• Select the tangent control accessory.
• Click on the curve at the place you wish to modify it.
• A line depicting the tangent appears.

Amapi ProT M 255


• By moving its ends you will adjust the tangent.
• It is possible to add as many tangents as necessary.
.

These tangents are temporary and will not be saved when leaving the tool.

22.4.7 Additional information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool is an editor-tool able to edit the first DG level by
carrying out topological modifications. Their effects will show at higher levels.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

Automatic duplication:
If the “Ctrl” key is pressed while picking up the tool, Amapi Pro will automatically duplicate the
entire objects selection. The tool action will then apply to this copy

The motion of the cursor follows the working plane (see details on page 488)
The motion of the mouse will modify two out of three displayed values (x, y and z) only.
There are several possibilities to modify the third value:
• Change the point of view (See “The Navigation” on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

While using this tool, the gradated axis of the orthonormal base (X is red, Y is green and Z is
blue) will be displayed. They will help to make accurate positioning and can work together with
the cursor movement and position constraints (See “The constraints” on page 191).

This tool must be distinguished from the “Move” tool (see details on page 242) which moves
the selected object(s) while the “Stretch” moves the current selection.

The tool and the clones (See “The clones” on page 107): If the current selection is a part of a
cloned object, it will be deformed. All its clones will undergo the same transformation.

Change current object:


This tool allows you to change the current object by using the “Change the current object”
accessory.

256 Reference Manual


23
Construction Palette

This tools palette contains the tools used to draw the shapes that will be the modeling base.
Icon Tool name Description See

This tool displays a sub-tools palette to quickly draw numerous 3D


“Surface and volume shapes.
page 258
primitives”

This tool displays a sub-tools palette to quickly draw numerous 2D or 3D


lines.
“Line drawing” page 277

This tool creates curve(s) from points selected on the current object or
“Extract Lines” existing objects of the scene.
page 300

“Extract Facets” This tool creates an object made up of several facets. page 304

The basic use of this tool is to create sweeped shapes from curves.
“Sweep” however, it can also extrude facets, edges or points
page 307

“Double-Sweep” This tool creates a surface from a section and two profiles. page 321

This tool lets you create a “skin” tightened between two or more 2D or
“Ruled Surface” 3D curves.
page 324

This tool generates a surface from connected curves drawing a closed


“Coons Surface” perimeter.
page 331

This tool creates a surface using a network of 3D curves. The surface is


“Gordon surface” generated along the longitudinal and latitudinal curves
page 334

This tool creates a volume from NURBS surfaces which will define the
“Manifold” future volume
page 336

Amapi ProT M 257


23.1 Surface and volume primitives
This tool displays a sub-tools palette which allows you to quickly build many 3D
shapes.
These shapes are called primitives as they will often be used as building blocks for the
construction of your models.
Sphere, cube, cone, cylinder are examples of primitives.
Click on the icon depicting the desired primitive then follow the specific instructions.

• “Cube” (see details on page 260)

• “Sphere” (see details on page 263)

• “Cone” (see details on page 266)

• “Cylinder” (see details on page 267)

• “Tetrahedron” (see details on page 268)

• “Octahedron” (see details on page 268)

• “Icosahedron” (see details on page 268)

• “Dodecahedron” (see details on page 269)

• “Height-Fields” (see details on page 272)

• “Grid” (see details on page 273)

• “Text” (see details on page 274)

It is possible to make several drawings before releasing the palette.

258 Reference Manual


For most surface and volume primitives, the creation can be done in polygonal
mode or in NURBS mode. It must be specified if an object will be polygonal or
NURBS while creating it (See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96). Amapi Pro
displays a toggle-icon in order to switch from one construction mode to the other. Check that
the button corresponding to the desired mode is selected. If not, click on it or use the
(Ctrl+B) shortcut.

This palette can be floating or fixed.


This option can be found in the “Preferences editor”> “User interface”> “Palettes display”> “Sub-
tools floating palette display” (see details on page 455).
• If the palette is floating, it can be relocated, reoriented and locked/unlocked:

Palette relocation handle.

Vertical display of the palette.


Horizontal display of the palette.
Palette locked: it remains displayed whatever the current tool.
Palette unlocked: it appears when using the current tool.
• If the palette is fixed, it will be displayed in the tools palette area.

Amapi ProT M 259


23.1.1 Cube
Amapi Pro offers several methods to create a cube. It can be created by setting its
center or its base. You will be able to choose between two NURBS cube construction
modes. It is also easy to create a rectangular parallelepiped.

23.1.1.1 Creation Methods


Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”
and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.

From the center


With this method, the tool will first ask you to set the position of the center point of
the parallelepiped. Then it will ask you to set the size of the cube. Click on an icon to
put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” to toggle from one
option to the other:

Cube Horizontal rectangle Vertical rectangle


parallelepiped parallelepiped

Radius Y

Editable r r Radius X
parameters
in the r
graphic
workspace

Editable •Radius (r) •Radius X •Radius X


parameters •Radius Y •Radius Y
in the parameter
•Radius Z •Radius Z
palette

260 Reference Manual


From the base
With this method, the tool will ask you to set the position of the base point of the
parallelepiped. Then it will ask you to set the size of the cube. Click on an icon to put
a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” to toggle from one option to
the other:

Cube Horizontal rectangle Vertical rectangle


parallelepiped parallelepiped

Dimension y
Editable d
parameters
in the |d| |d| Dimension x
graphic
workspace

Editable •Dimension (d) •Dimension x •Dimension x


parameters If d<0, the cube •Dimension y •Dimension y
in the parameter will be drawn
•Dimension z •Dimension z
palette below the base
point

23.1.1.2 NURBS cubes


If you are working in the NURBS construction mode (see details on page 98) Amapi Pro
offers you two options for NURBS cube construction.

NURBS cube NURBS pole-cube


(NURBS BREP with six faces) (NURBS BREP with only one surface)

Amapi ProT M 261


23.1.1.3 Additional information
The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level of which the label is
depending on the object type.
• A polyhedral “Cube” will generate a first DG level labeled Polyhedral volume

• A “NURBS cube” will generate a first DG level labeled polyhedral volume and a second level
labeled Poly-NURBS

• A “NURBS pole-cube” will generate a first DG level labeled Grid structure and a second level
labeled NURBS volume
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

At the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

The cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).
The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z).
There are two ways to change the third value:
• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

262 Reference Manual


23.1.2 Sphere
Amapi Pro offers several methods to create a sphere. It can be created by setting its
center or its base. It is also possible to easily create an ellipsoid and set the number of
points of the generated mesh. Finally, geodesic spheres can be built.

23.1.2.1 Creation Methods


Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”
and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.

From the center


With this method, the tool requires setting the center point of the sphere’s position
before the next construction step, setting the radius.
Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” to
toggle from one option to the other.

Sphere Horizontal ellipsoid Vertical ellipsoid

Radius Y
Editable r
parameters
in the r r Radius X
graphic
workspace

Editable •Radius (r) •Radius X •Radius X


parameters •Radius Y •Radius Y
in the parameter
•Radius Z •Radius Z
palette

Amapi ProT M 263


From the base
With this method, the tool will ask you to set the base point of the sphere’s position
before the next construction step, setting the diameter.
Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” to
toggle from one option to the other.

Sphere Horizontal ellipsoid Vertical ellipsoid

Editable d

Diameter y
parameters
in the |d| Diameter x
|d|
graphic
workspace

Editable •Diameter (d) •Diameter x •Diameter x


parameters If d<0, the sphere will •Diameter y •Diameter y
in the parameter be drawn below the
•Diameter z •Diameter z
palette base point

23.1.2.2 Geodesic spheres


Several options are available. toggle from one to the other by clicking on the corresponding
icon or by using both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys.

pole-sphere Geodesic sphere Geodesic sphere Geodesic sphere


(default option) based on a cube based on based on
an icosahedron an octahedron

264 Reference Manual


23.1.2.3 Setting the number of points
Once the sphere is drawn, Amapi Pro suggests setting the number of points that define the
sphere. The greater is the number of points, the smoother is the sphere. The tuning can be
made with the +/- keys.

No points=7 No points=8 No points=9

23.1.2.4 Additional information


Only the pole-sphere can be built in NURBS. The geodesic spheres are only polygonal
shapes.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates a DG label depending on the type
of sphere:
• The polygonal spheres are labeled Polygonal volume.
• The NURBS pole-sphere generates a NURBS volume, controlled by a polygonal volume. Thus, it
adds two DG levels labeled NURBS volume and Polygonal volume.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

At the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

The cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).
The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z).
There are two ways to change the third value:
• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

Amapi ProT M 265


23.1.3 Cone
This tool allows you to quickly create a cone. First of all, the position and dimensions
of the base will be set, then the height and finally the section size. A cone can be
eventually truncated; to do this, give a non null value to the last section radius. The +/- keys
allow you to quickly tune the number of intermediate sections and the number of points
defining the sections. Then, Amapi Pro will suggest closing the openings before validating
the operation.

Cone: made from 4 intermediate Truncated cone: made up of 2 The pyramid is a cone where the
sections where each section is made intermediate sections and where each sections are made up of 4 points
up of 8 points section is made up of 8 points

This tool builds ’grid structure’ objects (see details on page 106).

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):


• The polygonal cone adds a first DG level labeled Polyhedral volume.
• The NURBS cone generates a NURBS volume, controlled by a grid Structure. Thus, it adds two DG
levels labeled NURBS volume and Grid Structure.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

The cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).
The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z).
There are two ways to change the third value:
• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

At the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

266 Reference Manual


23.1.4 Cylinder
This tool allows you to quickly create a cylinder. First of
all, the position and the base dimensions have to be set,
and then the height. The +/- keys allow you to quickly tune the
number of intermediate sections and the number of points
defining the sections. Finally, Amapi Pro will suggest closing the
openings before validating the operation.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):


• A polyhedral “Cylinder” adds a first DG level labeled Polyhedral volume.
• A NURBS “Cylinder” generates a NURBS volume controlled by a Grid-structure; adds two DG levels
labeled NURBS volume and Grid-structure.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The cursor is movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).
The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z).
There are two ways to change the third value:
• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

At the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Amapi ProT M 267


23.1.5 Tetrahedron
The “Tetrahedron” is a platonic shape. All platonic
shapes are built following the same procedure. To learn
how to do this, see “Dodecahedron” paragraph (see details on
page 269).

23.1.6 Octahedron
The “Octahedron” is a platonic shape. All platonic
shapes are built following the same procedure. To learn
how to do it, see paragraph “Dodecahedron” paragraph (see
details on page 269).

23.1.7 Icosahedron
The “Icosahedron” is a platonic shape. All platonic
shapes are built following the same procedure. To learn
how to do it, see paragraph “Dodecahedron” paragraph (see
details on page 269).

268 Reference Manual


23.1.8 Dodecahedron
Amapi Pro offers several methods for creating a platonic
shape. It can be created by setting its center or its base.
Then, the dimensions of its bounding sphere are set. This sphere
can become an ellipsoid if it is stretched horizontally or
vertically.

23.1.8.1 Creation Methods


Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”
and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.

From the center


In the first step of this method, the tool will ask you to set the position of the center
point of the dodecahedron before the next construction step which is setting the
radius(es).
Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” to
toggle from one option to the other.

Dodecahedron Horizontal Dodecahedron Vertical Dodecahedron


Radius y

Editable r
parameters r
in the Radius X
graphic r
workspace

Editable •Radius (r) •Radius X •Radius X


parameters of the bounding •Radius Y •Radius Y
in the parameter sphere •Radius Z •Radius Z
palette
of the bounding ellipsoid of the bounding ellipsoid

Amapi ProT M 269


From the base
In the first step of this method, the tool will ask to set the position of the base point of
the dodecahedron before the next construction step, setting the radius(es).
Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar”
toggle from one option to the other:

Dodecahedron Horizontal Dodecahedron Vertical Dodecahedron

Diameter y
Editable d
parameters Diameter X
in the
graphic d d
workspace

Editable •Diameter (d) •Diameter X •Diameter X


parameters of the bounding •Diameter Y •Diameter Y
in the parameter sphere
•Diameter Z •Diameter Z
palette of the bounding ellipsoid of the bounding ellipsoid

23.1.8.2 Additional information


The tool and the Dynamic Geometry (DG) This tool generates a first DG level which is labeled
depending on the type of object generated :
• A platonic Polygonal shape will generate a first DG level labeled Polygonal volume

• A platonic NURBS shape will generate a first DG level labeled Polygonal volume and a second
level labeled Poly-NURB.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The cursor is movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).
The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z).
There are two ways to change the third value:
• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

270 Reference Manual


At the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Amapi ProT M 271


23.1.9 Height-Fields
This tool allows you to convert a 2D image into a 3D object, the different heights
and altitudes dependant on the colors of the image.
1) The tool requires you to draw the grid that will be transformed as a relief (See “Grid” on
page 273).
2) A dialog box then asks you to select the image to be converted.
3) Amapi Pro will map the image onto the grid, moving the points of the grid to give it a
relief. This displacement is done according to the color of the area: the lighter the color,
the higher the altitude. The darker points remain at zero altitude.
4) The tuning of the maximum altitude is made by using the + or - keys or by entering a
value in the parameter palette (See “Editing the parameters” on page 162).

This tool builds ’grid structure’ objects (see details on page 106) (See “The objects with a grid-
structure (Quad mesh)” on page 106).

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):


This tool adds a DG level labeled Grid Structure. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on
page 109).

It is recommended to use grey levels images.

272 Reference Manual


23.1.10 Grid
Use the “Grid” tool to create a flat mesh. Amapi Pro asks you to set the origin (a
corner), then to set the dimensions of one cell. Finally, you will enter the number of
cells needed in height (V) and in width (U).
of a cell
Height

Width of a cell
Example of a grid with 3 cells in V and 4 cells in U

This tool builds ’grid structure’ objects (see details on page 106).

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):


• A polygonal grid adds a first DG level labeled Grid-structure.
• A NURBS grid generates a NURBS volume controlled by a Grid-structure; adds two DG levels:
Level 2 : NURBS volume
Level 1 : Grid Structure
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

The cursor is movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).
The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z).
There are two ways to change the third value:
• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

At the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Only complete grids are generated. If a cell (or facet) size is 10 X 10, the entire grid size will be
a multiple of 10, such as 180 X 50, but never 182 X 47.

Amapi ProT M 273


23.1.11 Text
The “Text” tool allows you to insert editable 3D text into a scene, and has several
parameters to customize its graphic appearance.
When using this tool, set the text position’s first point (See “Alignment” on page 276), by
entering the coordinates in the parameter palette or by clicking on the graphic workspace.
Then select the parameters by filling or checking the boxes in the dialog box.

Text
Enter the text in the text box

Text: Hello

Font
Select a font from the list of choices

Font: Times new roman

Bold
Check this box to generate bold text

Font: Times new roman Bold

Italic
Check this box to generate italic text

Font: Times new roman Italic

Outline only
When checking this box, Amapi Pro
will only draw the text outline. This
option is the opposite of the filled text.
Specific case: A text without depth but Text outline only (without depth)
but only with an outline is a curve. (this object is a curve)

274 Reference Manual


NURBS
Check this box to generate NURBS
objects.
Polygonal text

NURBS text

Scale
This parameter allows you to tune the
size of the text
Text size before the scale downsizing

Text size after the scale downsizing

Depth
Enter the text depth in this area.
A text with a zero depth is a flat text.
Depth at zero

Depth with a value

Bevel
Choose to bevel or not the text letters.

Text not beveled

Beveled text

Amapi ProT M 275


Smoothing
Set the smoothing range (default =2).

Smoothing range = 2

Smoothing range = 8

Alignment
Check the icon corresponding to the
choice of alignment (on left, centered Left
or on right). The alignment will be alignment
made from where the text position's Centered
first point was set when entering the
tool. Right
alignment

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled as Text (See
“Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

To edit a Text group, simply double-click on it.

The letters of a text are automatically grouped. They can be ungrouped with the “Ungroup”
(see details on page 186) tool located in the control panel.
Attention! an ungrouped text is not be editable.

276 Reference Manual


23.2 Line drawing
This tool displays a sub-tools palette with several kinds of 2D or 3D lines that can
be quickly and easily drawn. The curves created from these lines will be used as a
building base for the construction of your models (See “Curves” on page 91).
Click on the icon depicting the desired primitive then follow the instructions.

• “Rectangle / Square” (see details on page 279)

• “Circle” (see details on page 281)

• “Arc” (see details on page 284)

• “Polyline” (see details on page 286)

• “Interpolated curve” (see details on page 289)

• “Curve” (see details on page 292)

• “Helix” (see details on page 295)

• “Symmetry” (see details on page 298)

• “Reverse curve points” (see details on page 299)

It is possible to make several drawings before releasing the palette.

Amapi ProT M 277


If the current selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147) is an
open curve, Amapi Pro will provide three options whether or not to
connect the new line to the current selection, or to make a composite curve (See “Curves” on
page 91).
Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”
and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.
Amapi Pro keeps the desired option as long as the “Line drawing” tool is in use (as long as
the sub-tools palette is displayed). The default option is “Do not connect”.

For most surfaces and volumes primitives, the creation can be done in polygonal
mode or in NURBS mode. This must be specified while creating the object (See
“Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96). Amapi Pro displays a toggle-icon allowing
you to switch from one drawing mode to another. Check that the button corresponding to the
desired mode is selected. If not, click on it or use the (Ctrl+B) shortcut.

This palette can be floating or fixed.


This option can be found in the “Preferences editor”> “User interface”> “Palettes display”> “Sub-
tools floating palette display” (see details on page 455).
• If the palette is floating, it can be relocated, reoriented and locked/unlocked:

Palette relocation handle.

Vertical display of the palette.


Horizontal display of the palette.
Palette locked: it remains displayed whatever the current tool.
Palette unlocked: it appears only in the current tool.
• If the palette is fixed, it will be displayed in the tools palette area.

278 Reference Manual


23.2.1 Rectangle / Square
To draw a rectangle, define its two opposite corners.
Set the first corner by clicking a point in the graphic workspace or by entering its
coordinates in the parameter palette. Do the same to set the opposite angle or enter
accurately the dimensions of the rectangle in the parameter palette.

23.2.1.1 The constraints


Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” to
toggle from one option to the other:

No constraint Horizontal constraint Vertical constraint

Width
Height

Editable Width

Height
parameters
in the
graphic
workspace

Editable •Width •Width •Width


parameters •Height •Height •Height
in the parameter
palette
•Opposite corner x •Opposite corner x •Opposite corner x
•Opposite corner y •Opposite corner y •Opposite corner y
•Opposite corner z •Opposite corner z •Opposite corner z

23.2.1.2 Draw a square


This option toggles between the drawing of a rectangle and a square.

Amapi ProT M 279


23.2.1.3 Additional information
The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool creates a DG where the labeling depends on
the type of desired object:
• A Polyhedral “Rectangle / Square” will create a first DG level labeled Polyline.
• A NURBS “Rectangle / Square” will create a first DG level labeled Polyline and a second level
labeled Polyline
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The cursor is movement is done on the orthogonal plane which orientation is the most
perpendicular to the eye - target point axis (See “Viewpoint” on page 137)
The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z).
There are two ways to change the third value:
• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

280 Reference Manual


23.2.2 Circle
Amapi Pro has two methods to create a circle. It can be created by setting its center
or by setting its base. Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction
option or press both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.
With this tool, it is also easy to create an ellipse and set the number of points for the object
definition.

23.2.2.1 Creation Methods

From the center


With this method, the tool requires you to set the circle’s position of the center point
before the next construction step, which is setting the radius.
Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” to
toggle from one option to the other:

Free movement Horizontal movement Vertical movement


(Circle) (Horizontal ellipse) (Vertical ellipse)

Radius Y
Editable
parameters r
in the Radius Radius X
graphic
workspace

Editable •Radius (r) •Radius X •Radius X


parameters •Radius Y •Radius Y
in the parameter
palette

Amapi ProT M 281


From the base
With this method, the tool requires you to set the circle’s position of the center point
before the next construction step, which is setting the diameter.
Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” to
toggle from one option to the other:

Free movement Horizontal movement Vertical movement


(Circle) (Horizontal ellipse) (Vertical ellipse)

Editable

Diameter y
parameters
Diameter

in the Diameter x
graphic
workspace

Editable •Diameter (d) •Diameter x •Diameter x


parameters If d<0, the circle will •Diameter y •Diameter y
in the parameter be drawn under the
palette base point

23.2.2.2 Setting the number of points


Once the circle is drawn, Amapi Designer allows you to set the number of points defining it.
The greater the number of points, the smoother the circle. The tuning can be made with the
+/- keys.

Nb points=4 Nb points=8 Nb points=16

282 Reference Manual


23.2.2.3 Additional information
The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates a DG labeling which depends on
the kind of circle:
• The polygonal circles are labeled Polyline.
• The NURBS circle generates a NURBS curve, controlled by a polyline. Thus, it adds two DG levels
labeled NURBS curve and Polyline.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The cursor is movement is done on the orthogonal plane which orientation is the most
perpendicular to the eye - target point axis (See “Viewpoint” on page 137)
The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z).
There are two ways to change the third value:
• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Amapi ProT M 283


23.2.3 Arc
Amapi Pro has several methods to create arcs. Check the number of points defining
the arc before releasing the tool.

23.2.3.1 Creation Methods


Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”
and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.

1- Center 1- Start 1- Start 1- Start 1- Start


2- Start-Radius 2- Center-Radius 2- End 2- End 2- End
3- Angle 3- Angle 3- Middle 3- Center-Radius 3- Tangent

3 3
3 3
1 1 1
2 2 1 1
3
2 2
2

1
3

Possibility
to reverse the arc

The setting order is shown by the color code of the points in the icons:
• 1st point (or dimension) to be set: Red
• 2nd point (or dimension) to be set: Green
• 3rd point (or dimension) to be set: Blue

23.2.3.2 Composite connection options


Amapi Pro provides three options to connect or not to connect the current
arc to the current selection. Click on the icon corresponding to the desired
option or press both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.

284 Reference Manual


23.2.3.3 Setting the number of points
Once the arc is drawn, Amapi Pro suggests that you set the number of points defining the
arc. The greater the number of points, the smoother the arc. The tuning can be made with the
+/- keys.

No points=3 No points=4 No points=6

23.2.3.4 Additional information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates two DG levels:
• Level #2: Arc (labeled Arc)
• Level #1: The control parameters (labeled Parameter(s)).
• If a composite connection has been made, the tool adds a third DG level labeled Composite
connection.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).
The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z).
There are two ways to change the third value:
• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Amapi ProT M 285


23.2.4 Polyline
Use the “Polyline” tool to draw a set of
connected straight lines. Amapi Pro will
create a segment between each point. The point
position can be set by entering its coordinates in
the parameter palette, manually or by successive
mouse clicks. In this last case it is possible to give constraints to the cursor movement or
positioning. While drawing, it is possible to connect the polyline with the latest drawn curve
or to leave it as is. Finally, choose whether or not to close the curve.

23.2.4.1 Composite connection options


If the current selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147) is an
open curve, Amapi Pro will provide three options whether or not the new
line to the current selection, or to make a composite curve (See “Curves” on page 91).
Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”
and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other:

Do not Connect Connect Connect


to the end of the curve to the beginning of the
curve
Illustration
Latest drawn Beginning
curve

New polyline

First point
of the new
polyline
End

Editable •x,y,z •x,y,z •x,y,z


parameters (point coordinates) (point coordinates) (point coordinates)
•Step (See ““Freehand” •Step (See ““Freehand” •Step (See ““Freehand”
drawing” on page 287) drawing” on page 287) drawing” on page 287)

Accessories •Close •Close •Close


(see details on page 287) (see details on page 287) (see details on page 287)

286 Reference Manual


23.2.4.2 “Freehand” drawing
When the “Freehand” drawing option is set,
holding down the left mouse button generates
points according to the defined “step”. The step
corresponds to the minimum distance between two
consecutive points.
Cursor path
Generated polyline

23.2.4.3 Closing the curve


Amapi Pro provides a “Close line”
accessory.
When clicking on it while drawing, a segment is
added between the last drawn point and the first
point of the current curve, the tool is then
automatically released.
Closing of a simple polyline
For a composite curve (made up of several
connected curves), Amapi Pro adds a curve
segment between the last drawn point and the free
end of the first curve, the tool is then automatically
released.
Closing of a composite curve

23.2.4.4 Additional information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):
This tool generates a first DG level labeled Polyline.
If a composite connection was made the tool adds a second DG level labeled Composite
connection.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The validation ignores the last displayed segment attached to the cursor.

A polyline cannot be created in NURBS mode.

Amapi ProT M 287


In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

The cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).
The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z).
There are two ways to change the third value:
• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

288 Reference Manual


23.2.5 Interpolated curve
This tool generates a smoothed curve that is
controlled by a polyline defined by the user.
The generated curve passes through those points. The
point position can be set by entering its coordinates in
the parameter palette, by freehand, or by successive
mouse clicks. In this last case it is possible to put constraints on the cursor movement or
positioning. While drawing, it is possible to modify the number of points generated by each
segment and choose whether or not to connect the polyline with the latest drawn curve.
Finally, choose whether or not to close the curve.

23.2.5.1 Composite connection options


If the current selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147) is an
open curve, Amapi Pro will provide three options whether or not to
connect the new line to the current selection, or choosing to make a composite curve (See
“Curves” on page 91).
Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”
and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other:

Do not Connect Connect Connect


to the end of the curve to the beginning of the
curve
Editable •x,y,z •x,y,z •x,y,z
parameters (point coordinates) (point coordinates) (point coordinates)
•Step (See ““Freehand” •Step (See ““Freehand” •Step (See ““Freehand”
drawing” on page 287) drawing” on page 287) drawing” on page 287)

Accessories •Close •Close •Close


(see details on page 287) (see details on page 287) (see details on page 287)

23.2.5.2 “Freehand” drawing


In the “Freehand” drawing option, the
polygon drawing follows the path drawn by
the cursor. The step corresponds to the minimum
length of its segments. With this method,
Amapi Pro automatically creates the points which Cursor path
define the drawing. Generated control polygon
Generated curve
To start a “Freehand” drawing, keep the mouse
button pressed.

Amapi ProT M 289


23.2.5.3 Defining the range
At the end of the drawing, Amapi Pro suggests that you set a range. It corresponds to the
number of segments generated between two nodal points (See “NURBS Curve” on page 99).
The greater the number of points, the smoother the curve. The tuning can be made with the
“Ctrl +” or “Ctrl -” keys.
Points of the control polygon
(defined by the user)

Points generated between


two control points

Interpolated curve (range = 4)

23.2.5.4 Defining the degree


A NURBS curve is defined by control points, a nodal sequence and a degree.
The degree of a NURBS curve corresponds to the number of control points influencing the
curve at a given point. A degree of 1 gives a broken line passing by the control points. A
degree of 3 gives a smoother curve which deviates slightly from the control points. The
higher the degree, the less influence each control point has on the curve, thus creating a
smoother curve as it moves away from the control points.

23.2.5.5 Closing the curve


Amapi Pro provides a “Close the line”
accessory.
When clicking on it while drawing, a segment is
added between the last drawn point and the first
point of the current curve, the tool is then
automatically released. Open curve

For a composite curve (made up of several


connected curves), Amapi Pro adds a curve
segment between the last drawn point and the free
end of the first curve, the tool is then automatically
released.
Closed curve

290 Reference Manual


23.2.5.6 Additional information

The validation ignores the last displayed segment attached to the cursor.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates two DG levels:
• Level #1: The control polyline (labeled Polyline).
• Level #2: The curve ((labeled Interpolated curve)
• If a composite connection was made the tool adds a second DG level labeled Composite
connection.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

The cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).
The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z).
There are two ways to change the third value:
• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

Amapi ProT M 291


23.2.6 Curve
A NURBS curve is defined by control points, a
nodal sequence and a degree (See “NURBS
Curve” on page 99). The point position can be set by
entering its coordinates in the parameter palette, by
freehand, or by successive mouse clicks. In this last
case it is possible to give constraints to the cursor
movement or positioning. While drawing, it is possible to modify the number of points
generated by each segment and choose whether or not to connect the polyline with the latest
drawn curve. Finally, choose whether or not to close the curve.

23.2.6.1 Composite connection options


If the current selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147) is an
open curve, Amapi Pro will provide three options to connect or not the
new line to the current selection to make a composite curve (See “Curves” on page 91).
Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”
and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other:

Do not Connect Connect Connect


to the end of the curve to the beginning of the
curve
Editable •x,y,z •x,y,z •x,y,z
parameters (point coordinates) (point coordinates) (point coordinates)
•Step (See ““Freehand” •Step (See ““Freehand” •Step (See ““Freehand”
drawing” on page 287) drawing” on page 287) drawing” on page 287)

Accessories •Close •Close •Close


(see details on page 287) (see details on page 287) (see details on page 287)

23.2.6.2 “Freehand” drawing


When the “Freehand” drawing option is
set, holding the left mouse button down
generates new points for each “step” pixel. The
step corresponds to the minimum length of its
segments. With this method, Amapi Pro
Cursor path
automatically creates the points which define the Generated control polygon
Generated curve
drawing.
To start a “Freehand” drawing, keep the mouse
button pressed.

292 Reference Manual


23.2.6.3 Defining the range
At the end of the drawing, Amapi Pro suggests that you set a range. It corresponds to the
number of segments generated between two nodal points (see details on page 99). The
greater the number of points, the smoother the curve. The tuning can be made with the “Ctrl
+” or “Ctrl -” keys.

Points of the control polygon


(defined by the user)

Nodal points of the NURBS curve


(set by the program)

Points generated between


two nodal points

23.2.6.4 Defining the degree


A NURBS curve is defined by control points, a nodal sequence and a degree.
The degree of a NURBS curve corresponds to the number of control points influencing the
curve at a given point. A degree of 1 gives a broken line passing by the control points. A
degree of 3 gives a smoother curve which deviates slightly from the control points. The
higher the degree, the less the influence of each control points on the curve, thus creating a
smoother curve as it moves away from the control points.
(See “NURBS Curve” on page 99)

Amapi ProT M 293


23.2.6.5 Closing the curve
Amapi Pro provides a “Close the line”
accessory.
When clicking on it while drawing, a segment is
added between the last drawn point and the first
point of the current curve, the tool is then
automatically released. Open curve

For a composite curve (made up of several


connected curves), Amapi Pro adds a curve
segment between the last drawn point and the free
end of the first curve, the tool is then automatically
released.
Closed curve

23.2.6.6 Additional information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates two DG levels:
• Level #1: The control polyline (labeled Polyline).
• Level #2: The curve ((labeled NURBS curve)

• If a composite connection was made the tool adds a second DG level labeled Composite
connection.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The validation ignores the last displayed segment attached to the cursor.

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

The cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).
The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z).
There are two ways to change the third value:
• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

294 Reference Manual


23.2.7 Helix
This tool is used to create helixes and spirals.

23.2.7.1 Use
Enter the following parameters for each step:

Step #1: Beginning Radius


• Coordinates of the center of the first spiral radius

Step #2: Ending Radius


• Beginning radius

Step #3:
• Ending radius
• Helix total height

Step #4:
• Number of spirals
• Number of edges (+/- keys)

Step #5:
Press the “Enter” key or release the tool to validate.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):


This tool generates a first DG level labeled Polyline. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on
page 109).

Amapi ProT M 295


23.2.7.2 The constraints
Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” to
toggle from one option to the other:

Free movement Horizontal movement Vertical movement


(Helix) (Spiral) (Circular Helix)

23.2.7.3 The path option


To select the path of the helix, click on the icon corresponding to the desired option or press
both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.

Counter-clockwise path Clockwise path

296 Reference Manual


23.2.7.4 Composite connection options
If the current selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147) is an
open curve, Amapi Pro will provide three options whether or not to
connect the new line to the current selection, or to make a composite curve (See “Curves” on
page 91).
Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”
and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other:

Do not connect Connect Connect


to the end of the curve to the beginning of the
curve
Illustration
Latest drawn Start
curve

New polyline

First point
of the new
polyline
End
Editable •x,y,z •x,y,z •x,y,z
parameters (point coordinates) (point coordinates) (point coordinates)
•Step (See ““Freehand” •Step (See ““Freehand” •Step (See ““Freehand”
drawing” on page 287) drawing” on page 287) drawing” on page 287)

Accessories •Close •Close •Close


(see details on page 287) (see details on page 287) (see details on page 287)

Amapi ProT M 297


23.2.8 Symmetry
The “Symmetry” accessory can be used to obtain the mirror image of a curve.
Amapi Pro automatically draws the mirrored curve, connected to the current curve,
onto the selected orthogonal plane. Note that the curve must be drawn in the right direction
to get the expected symmetry.

23.2.8.1 Symmetry plane orientation


Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” to
toggle from one option to the other:

Horizontal Vertical

Symmetry plan

Symmetry plan

Curve to be mirrored Mirroring onto a


vertical plan

Mirroring onto an
horizontal plan

23.2.8.2 Connections options


If the current selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147)
is an open curve, Amapi Pro will provide four options whether or
not to connect the new line to the current selection or to make a composite curve (See
“Curves” on page 91).

298 Reference Manual


Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”
and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other:

Do not connect Connect Connect Close the curve


to the end of the to the beginning
curve of the curve
Symmetry plan

Symmetry plan

Editable •x,y,z •x,y,z •x,y,z •x,y,z


parameters (plane position) (plane position) (plane position) (plane position)

The symmetry of a NURBS, a composite curve or an arc creates composite curve (the curve to
be mirrored and its mirrored image).
(See “Composite (curve)” on page 482).

23.2.9 Reverse curve points


Some tools check the direction of the curve End Start
(“Symmetry” ...). So here, as its name implies,
the “Reverse curve points” tool reverses the direction of
the curve.
Just click on the curves to be reversed, then press the
“Enter” key to validate the operation.
Start End

Amapi ProT M 299


23.3 Extract Lines
The “Extract Lines” tool allows you to create one or several lines from points of any
objects in the scene.
Amapi Pro has several drawing methods as options. Click on the icon corresponding to the
desired construction option or press both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one
option to the other.
Depending on the desired option, Amapi Pro will create an object or a group of objects
(curve type):
• “Creating a curve from existing points in the scene”
immediately creates an object (see details on page 300).
• “Automatic extraction of openings”
immediately creates an object or a group of objects (see details on page 301).
• “Object edges extraction”
immediately creates a group of objects (see details on page 301).
• “Extracting U and V curves from objects with a grid structure”
immediately creates two groups of objects (see details on page 302).
• “Extract a part of a line”
immediately creates an object (see details on page 302).

To leave the tool, release it or press the “Enter” key.

23.3.1 Creation methods

23.3.1.1 Creating a curve from existing points in the scene


This method allows you to create a curve from Click
the geometry of the objects in the scene. Select Click Click
the points each object on which the future facets will be
Click
located. The selection can be made with the “One by
one” or “Lasso” selection accessories (See “The
selection methods” on page 150). Press the “Enter” key
to finish the drawing.
When the current option is “Extract edges from existing
points”, clicking on the right mouse button is a shortcut for the “Extract edges one by one”
option.

If the current selection is a ’grid structure’, this option will propose the accessory “Extracting U
and V curves from objects with a grid structure” (see details on page 302).

300 Reference Manual


23.3.1.2 Automatic extraction of openings
This option allows you to quickly create curves Click
corresponding to the openings of a surface or an
opened volume (See “Open / closed objects” on
page 94).
Amapi Pro highlights the openings of the current object.
Just click on those to be extracted, then press the “Enter”
key to validate the action.
Click
Object with its highlighted
opening curves

It is possible to click on the “Apply to all” accessory, in order to automatically


generate all the opening-curves corresponding to the highlighted openings. This
accessory shortcut is the “A” key.
If several opening-curves are created at the same time, Amapi Pro will group them automatically
(See “Group, Ungroup” on page 186).

If the current selection is a ’grid structure’, this option will propose the accessory “Extracting U
and V curves from objects with a grid structure” (see details on page 302).

23.3.1.3 Object edges extraction


This method consists of selecting several edges to Lasso
be extracted as polylines.
The selection can be done by :
• single object selection,
• lasso/rectangular selection.
Click on the right mouse button to switch between these
modes.
After validating, a new curve will be created for each set
of connected curves. Object from which several
edges are being extracted with
If this is not possible (more than 2 edges per vertex), a the lasso
dialog box will be displayed.

It is possible to click on the “Apply to all” accessory, to automatically generate a


group of curves made up of all the edges of the current object.

Amapi ProT M 301


23.3.1.4 Extracting U and V curves from objects with a grid
structure
This option is only available if the current
selection is a ’grid structure’ (See “The objects
with a grid-structure (Quad mesh)” on page 106) or if it
is a NURBS surface.

For polyhedral surfaces, Amapi Pro will automatically


create two groups of curves, when clicking on this icon: Group of V curves
• a first group made up of as many objects as there are extracted from a cylinder
U curves to be extracted. Group of U curves
extracted from a cylinder
• a second group made up of as many objects as there
are V curves to be extracted.
(See “Group, Ungroup” on page 186).

For NURBS surfaces, this accessory allows you to extract any isoparametric curve in U or
in V.
1) Select the surface where you want to extract lines from.
2) Move the cursor above the surface to see the curve displayed.
3) Click to create the curve or enter a value between 0 and 1 in the parameters palette.
4) Click on the UV toggle option or press the “Space-Bar” to extract the lines in U or in
V.

23.3.1.5 Extract a part of a line


This option allows you to extract a part of a curve or an edge.
You will only need to select the ends.

23.3.2 Generation of NURBS or Polygonal lines


This tool is able to generate either NURBS or polygonal lines. The nature of the line
depends on both:
• the nature of the current object (See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96)
• the current construction mode (See “What is a polyhedral model?” on page 97)

302 Reference Manual


23.3.3 Additional information
The cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).
The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z).
There are two ways to change the third value:
• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):


This tool generates a first DG level labeled Polyline. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on
page 109).

Amapi ProT M 303


23.4 Extract Facets
The “Extract Facets” tool allows you to create an object made up of one or several
facets which can be drawn according to the selected method. Click on the icon
corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar”
keys to toggle from one option to the other.
The facets of the object will be drawn, one at a time, following the corresponding
instructions of the selected option (See “Creation methods” on page 304). It is possible to
change the creation option while drawing. After the last facet has been drawn, release the
tool or press the “Enter” key to validate the action.
The creation of polygonal facets creates polyhedral objects.
The extraction of closures or facets on a NURBS surface creates NURBS facets.

23.4.1 Creation methods

23.4.1.1 Creating a facet from existing points in the scene


This method allows you to create a polygonal Click Click
facet from the geometry of the objects in the
Click
scene. Click
Select each point of the objects in the scene on which the
Click
points of the future facet will be located.
Press the “Enter” key to finish the drawing.

23.4.1.2 Draw in the 3D space


Set the points one by one to define the future
facet. This method allows you to apply
constraints to locate or move the cursor (See “The
constraints” on page 191) or enter the coordinates with
the keyboard (see details on page 163).
Press the “Enter” key to finish the drawing”. 1- Click

From the drawing of the second facet, the first point is


3- Shift-Click
automatically connected to the closest point to the 2- Click
current object.
Drawing of the third facet
of the object

304 Reference Manual


23.4.1.3 Automatic creation of facet closures
This option allows you to quickly create facets
corresponding to the openings of closed curves, a
surface or an opened volume (See “Open / closed Click
objects” on page 94).
Amapi Pro highlights the openings of the current object.
Just click on the ones to be closed, then press the “Enter”
key to validate the action.
It is possible to click on the “Apply to all”
accessory, to automatically generate all the Click
facet closures corresponding to the highlighted Object with
openings. This accessory shortcut is the “A” key. its facet closures

This option allows you to quickly transform a curve


into a surface.

This tool is different from the tool “Close” (see


details on page 400):
• The “Extract Facets” tool creates a new object closure.
• The “Close” tool closes the current object.
Click
When the current object is a NURBS object, the
closure creates a NURBS facet. Creating a facet
from a curve

23.4.1.4 Facets extraction


This method consists of selecting several facets Lasso
on the current object to be extracted as a set of
facets.
The selection is made with the “custom lasso” accessory
(See “The Personalized Lasso Selection” on page 153).

To extract facets and remove the facets from the Object on which facets are
being extracted with the
object, use the tool “Cut” (see details on page 354). lasso

When the current object is a NURBS object, the lasso


selection accessory tool selects NURBS facets,
meaning complete NURBS surfaces and not polygonal
facets.

Amapi ProT M 305


The "facet" and "edge" selection mode are available.

In "facet"
mode
(default), selected
facets are extracted
directly.
The tool creates a set
of facets.
Selection Generated facets

In "edge"
mode,
selected edges are
used to build a single
facet.

Selection Generated facet

23.4.2 NURBS or Polyhedral facets generation


The tool can generate either NURBS facets, or polygonal facets.
The facet type depends on both:
• the nature of the current object (See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96)
• the current construction mode (See “Change the construction mode” on page 96)

23.4.3 Accessory "create new empty object"


The "Facet" tool allows you to create one or several facets with several methods defined by
the available options.
By default, the new facets will be automatically added to the current object.
For each click on the "Create a new object" accessory, Amapi Pro creates a new
object which will contain all the facets created afterwards.

306 Reference Manual


23.4.4 Additional information
The options “Creating a facet from existing points in the scene” and “Draw in the 3D space” have
shortcuts:
• The right mouse click is a shortcut for the option “Facets extraction” (see details on page 305).
• The “Apply to all” accessory automatically generates all the facet closures corresponding to the
openings (See “Automatic creation of facet closures” on page 305).
This accessory shortcut is the “A” key

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):


This tool generates a first DG level labeled Polyhedral Volume.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The cursor is movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).
The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z).
There are two ways to change the third value:
• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

The “Extract Facets” tool creates only one object per session.
It is possible to separate the facets afterwards by using the tool “Cut” (see details on page 354).

The generated facets create a new object. Use the tool “Weld” (see details on page 403) to
merge it with another object of the scene.

If used on NURBS objects, the “Extract Facets” tool will create only polygonal facets.

Amapi ProT M 307


23.5 Sweep
The sweep tool is used to make tubular shapes, that is why we will call these objects
“Tubes”. This powerful tool will allow you to create, with options, more complex
objects which do not look anything like tubes.

• A Tube is built from the following elements:


• one or several base section(s) (see details on page 309).
• a profile (see details on page 308).

• There are two ways to build a tube:


• The “Sweeping with the profile already drawn” which has several tubing options
(see details on page 311).
• The “Freehand sweeping” (see details on page 314) which has several tubing
options that can be mixed together.

• You can choose between several intermediate section orientation options (see details
on page 317) and the possibility to increase or decrease progressively the size of the
sections using only one operation.

• To finish, it is possible to close or not to close the openings (see details on page 318)
when working from a closed curve.

• If the current selection is a curve or group of


curves, you will be able to do a freehand sweep or
use a preset profile.
If the current selection is a surface or a volume,
you will be able to work freehand, starting from a
multiple selection of points, edges or facets.

Amapi ProT M 307


23.5.1 Section and Profile
Amapi Pro has several tubing options that can be mixed together (See “The options” on
page 315). The use of the section and the profile will be different depending on the selected
option. This must be known before drawing the section and/or the profile.

An Extrusion A Sweeping
Tubular shape Tubular shape
the sections are concentric with a constant section
and parallel one another along a profile

Profile
Profile

base section
base section

•The Profile defines the position, the number and •The Profile shows the path to be followed by the
the size of each intermediate section. tube and the number of intermediate sections to
•The size of each section can be specified. be generated.
•Each intermediate profile section has a constant
size (default).

h h

h= Height of the current segment


h= Height of the current segment = Angle between the current
l= Width of the current segment segment and the previously drawn
segment

308 Reference Manual


23.5.1.1 The base section(s)
Their state
A base section can be one of the following entities (See “The selectable entities” on
page 149):
• a closed or open line object (See “Line drawing” on page 277)
• a point on a polyhedral surface (NURBS surfaces have no points)
• an edge on a surface
• a facet on a polyhedral surface (It is not possible to sweep a NURBS surface).
As opposed to the specialized selection accessories detailed in the selection palette,
the “Select all entities” accessory allows you to select either facets, edges or points
(See “The selectable entities” on page 149).

Their quantity
It is possible to “Sweep” several sections along a same profile at the same time.
The base section is selected when the tool is picked up (See “Selection” on page 147).
This option allows you to clone or not the profiles of a sweeping of multiple sections
(several sections are selected). (See “The clones” on page 107).

Examples
... points ... edges ... facets
... a line on a surface on a surface on a surface

Extruded
sweep...

Profiled
sweep...

Amapi ProT M 309


23.5.1.2 Section and profile from curves
The section and the profile can be open or closed curves, but their shape and their orientation
are determining. What is more, their role is different depending on the desired option (See
“The options” on page 315). Think about this before drawing the section and/or the profile.

An Extrusion A Sweeping
Shapes the sections which are Shape with a constant section
concentric and parallel to each along a profile
other

•The Profile defines the •The Profile shows the path to


position, the number and the be followed by the tube and the
size of each intermediate number of intermediate
section. sections to be generated.
•The size of each section can •Each profile intermediate
be tuned. section has a constant size
(default).

Profile
(open curve)

base section
(open curve)

Profile
(open curve)

base section
(closed curve)

Profile
(closed curve)

base section
(open curve)

Profile
(closed curve)

base section
(closed curve)

310 Reference Manual


23.5.2 Sweeping with the profile already drawn

23.5.2.1 Use
Before using the sweeping mode, an open or closed profile must be drawn with a “Line
drawing” sub-tool (see details on page 277).
The section(s) must be selected before entering the “Sweep” tool, then just click on the
profile curve. Amapi Pro has several sweeping options. Click on the icon corresponding to
the desired option or press both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to
the other.

Extruded tube Irregular sweep Regular sweep Sweep with


parallel sections

base section to The sections are The segments of The size of each All the intermediate
be swept along a concentric the obtained shape intermediate sections are
profile The profile defines are not regular. section is automatically set
the size of those automatically parallel.
sections modified to make a
regular shape.
The Profile defines the number of the intermediate sections.

What about the curves used for the construction?


There are two cases:
When working using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on page 109), the
curves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be editable by the
tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will be automatically
transmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123).
When working without using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on
page 109), the curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after
releasing the tool. They can be seen again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” on
page 184).

Amapi ProT M 311


23.5.2.2 The profile snapping
The notion of snapping exists only when sweeping along an existing profile.
The result obtained is directly depending of the snapping point.
Its action is different:
• “The case of an extruded tube” (see details on page 312)
• “The case of a swept tube” (see details on page 313)

The case of an extruded tube


With this kind of extrusion, Amapi Pro will move the section to the path before extruding.
The closest points of each curve will be snapped together, and consequently the result of this
operation will depend on the position of the two curves.
Profil

Section de Points de calages


base superposés

Profile

Snap points

Section de
base Points de calage
section

312 Reference Manual


The case of a swept tube

There are two different cases:

• The profile and the section do not share a common point:


A base section corresponds to each profile segment.

Profile

Snap point Intermediate sections


base section positioned along the profile

• The profile and the section share a common point (snapping point):
The snapping will be at the geometric center of the profile.

Profile

Snap point

Intermediate sections position


along the profile
base section

Amapi ProT M 313


23.5.3 Freehand sweeping

23.5.3.1 Use
With this kind of construction, which is much more intuitive, no profile need previously be
drawn. Each tube segment is displayed as soon as a new profile segment is created. With this
method, it is possible to mix extruded segments and swept segments.

Freehand sweeping

To create a Freehand sweep:


Select the base section(s) before picking up the tool, click in the graphic workspace (away
from any object) to start the operation, then move the cursor to build the first tube segment.
According to the selected option, one or several of the following parameters can be set:
• The orientation of the segment ( ).
• The width of the intermediate section (l).
• The height of the segment (h ).
Their tuning can be made by a simple click or by entering accurate values in the parameters
area. Do the same for the other segments and validate the operation by pressing the “Enter”
key.

The validation ignores the last displayed segment attached to the cursor.

With this method the profile can only be a polyline.

314 Reference Manual


23.5.3.2 The options

Extruded tubing Swept tubing


The cursor movement controls simultaneously:
The orientation of the swept segment ( ).
Each intermediate section of the tube is
constant and is automatically oriented so that
The cursor movement controls simultaneously: its plane follows the bisecting line of the angle
The section scaling (the width l). made by two successive profile segments.
The height (h) of the extruded segment. The height (h) of the swept segment (h).

h h

•The “Ctrl” key: shortcut for the “Radial •The “Ctrl” key: controls the section size (l).
tubing” option (See “The constraints” on Press and hold the key before moving the
page 316). Press and hold the key before cursor. Release it only after tuning is
moving the cursor. Release it only after tuning completed.
is completed.

l
l

•The “Shift” key: shortcut for the “Axial


tubing” option (See “The constraints” on •The “Shift” key: shortcut for the “Axial
page 316). Press and hold the key before tubing” option (See “The constraints” on
moving the cursor. Release it only after tuning page 316). Press and hold the key before
is completed. moving the cursor. Release it only after tuning
is completed.

h h

Amapi ProT M 315


23.5.3.3 The constraints
Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor movement or press the “Space-Bar” to
toggle from one option to the other:

Free movement Horizontal constraint Vertical constraint


(Free tubing) (Radial tubing) (Axial tubing)

The height of the segment is The current profile segment is


null (h=0). oriented along the axis of the
l
The cursor movement controls previous profile segment ( =0).
only the section size (l). The cursor movement controls
only the height of the segment
(h).
h

Free extrusion

Free sweeping

316 Reference Manual


23.5.3.4 Section orientation options
When using the “Swept tubing” (See “The options” on page 315), Amapi Pro has an
additional step after the validation of the drawing. This is to select the option for the
orientation of the section. Click on the icon corresponding to the desired option or press both
the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other

Irregular sweep Regular sweep Sweep with parallel sections


The size of the intermediate The size of each intermediate All the intermediate sections are
sections remains as defined. section is automatically modified automatically oriented to be
The segments of the obtained to make the tube regular*. parallel to the base section.
tube are not regular*. If some intermediate sections had
been scaled, Amapi Pro would
have applied a scaling coefficient
on them.

* Regular tube: tube with a constant section on its entire length.

23.5.4 Progressive scaling of the sections


When using the “Swept tubing” (See “The options” on page 315) (See “Sweeping with the
profile already drawn” on page 311), Amapi Pro allows you to control the progressive
scaling of all the sections. The tuning can be done with the +/- keys. Then, validate by
pressing the “Enter” key or by releasing the tool.

Amapi ProT M 317


23.5.5 Close the openings
If the base section is a closed curve, Amapi Pro proposes closing the openings (See “Open /
closed objects” on page 94).
To close them, click on the highlighted openings.
An icon allows you to automatically close all the openings of the sweeping.

23.5.6 Simplified display


When building a tube from several base sections, the display screen can be overloaded and it
might be better to simplify the display. That is why Amapi Pro has a “Simplified display”
accessory.

Full display

Simplified display

23.5.7 Display the graduated axis


This option makes it possible to visualize the axis of the orthonormal local base
related to the sweeping in progress. These reference marks allow, as for traditional
layouts of lines, to carry out a snapping on the graduations and to better visualize direction
of displacement.

23.5.8 Sweep by Block


The sweep by block applies only to the sweeping of a selection of adjacent facets. When this
option is not activated, the sweeping makes as many tubes as of selected facets each one
being perpendicular to its facet.

318 Reference Manual


When it is activated, the adjacent facets are joined together in only one block which pre-
serves the form of the group of facets. To use it, it is necessary to select several adjacent fac-
ets by an edge then to select the this option and finally to launch the sweeping (Enter key).

Sweep by block enabled Sweep by block disabled

23.5.9 Sweeping from an edge of a NURBS surface


If the current selection is a NURBS surface or a BREP, you will be able to work starting
from the edge outlines or to trim by freehand as in the example below where the sweeping
uses the cutting edge as a base section

Original surface
cut by a circle

Sweeping edge
based on the edge

Profile drawn hand free

Amapi ProT M 319


In this case, the edge section is divided by the two surfaces. Thus, if this curve is modified,
the two surfaces will be modified as in the example below:

23.5.10 Additional information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):
This tool adds a DG level labeled Sweeping (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) to set a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

320 Reference Manual


23.6 Double-Sweep
The “Double-Sweep” tool allows you to create complex shapes quickly from a base
section and two profiles. This way, you can create surfaced or volumetric tubes, that
can be asymmetrical or have different shapes at their ending sections.

Profiles
(open curves)

base section
(closed curve)

Profiles
(closed curves)
base section
(open curves)

base section
(closed curve)

Profiles
(closed curves)

Profiles
(closed curves)
base section
(closed curve)

Amapi ProT M 321


23.6.1 Use
1) Create a base section and two profiles under the following conditions:
• The section can be an open or a closed curve (See “Open / closed objects” on
page 94).
• Both profiles must be either closed or open (See “Open / closed objects” on page 94).
• Each profile must share a common point with the section.
• The two profiles must not share the same common point with the section.
2) The base section must be the current object (See “The selection accessories” on
page 148).
3) Click on the icon showing the tool “Double-Sweep” in the construction palette.
4) Click on each profile, one after another.
5) If the object has openings (See “Open / closed objects” on page 94), Amapi Pro will
allow you to close them by clicking on those that you would like to close.
6) Release the tool by pressing the “Enter” key to validate the operation.

23.6.2 Base orientation options


It is possible to choose the way in which a surface is generated compared to the section. If
the section is not located in a plane perpendicular to the profiles, the tool can either create a
surface by positioning the section perpendicular to the profiles or create a surface while con-
serving the original position of the profile.

Section perpendicular Preservation of the section


to profiles orientation

Construction curves
before “Double-Sweep”

322 Reference Manual


23.6.3 Additional information
The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):
This tool adds a DG level labeled Double Sweep (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on
page 109).

For a better quality, the two profiles should have the same number of segments. If not,
Amapi Pro will add more segments to the profile with less segments to do the operation in the
best conditions.

What about the curves used for the construction?


There are two cases:
When working using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on page 109):
The curves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be editable by
the tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will be automatically
transmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123).
When working without using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on
page 109): The curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after
releasing the tool. They can be shown again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” on
page 184).

Amapi ProT M 323


23.7 Ruled Surface
This tool is used to create a “skin” between curves or edges (in NURBS mode) fron-
tières. A simple illustration of a ruled surface would be the wing of an airplane. The
structural members of the wing represent the curves, and the “skin” (wing’s surface) is the
mesh linking these curves together.
You also can make a “Tangential connection” of NURBS surfaces using the edges of these
surfaces. In this type of connection, a curve border belonging to two objects is shared by the
two surfaces in dynamic geometry. You can thus edit this curve and the modifications will
be applied to the two surfaces.

Example of surface obtained by using the “Ruled Surface” tool

Ruled surface on edges of closed NURBS surfaces

324 Reference Manual


23.7.1 Creating “Ruled Surface”
To create a “Ruled Surface”, proceed as follows:
1) Create a set of curves proceeding as follows before picking up the “Ruled Surface” tool.
• The curves can have a different number of points.
• They can be curves or volume openings (See “Open / closed objects” on page 94), or
edges (in NURBS mode).
• They can be Polygonal or NURBS (See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96).
• The only constraint is that the curves must be all open or all closed (See “Open /
closed objects” on page 94).
2) Pick up the “Ruled Surface” tool.
3) There are two cases:
• All the curves are open:
Click on each curve that is to become a border.
In NURBS mode, you will have the possibility to point out a succession of edges as a
border. You can select multiple edges by keeping the “Shift” key pressed.
• All the curves are closed:
Click a point of the first curve, then the corresponding point of the second curve and
so on. Amapi Pro draws a line segment between each selected point. These segments
will be used to create the surface. Select the points with care because the result can be
affected. The “Curve Inversion” (see details on page 330) can solve the reverted
curves problems. In NURBS mode, you will be able to ask to “Align the first border
points” (see details on page 330).
4) If the borders are edges (in NURBS mode), you can make a “Tangential connection” (see
details on page 326).
5) Validate by pressing the “Enter” key.

Amapi Pro allows you to pick up the tool only if there is at least one curve or an open volume in
the scene.

Amapi ProT M 325


23.7.2 Tangential connection
This type of connection makes it possible to connect the ruled surface tangentially to an edge
of a NURBS surface. You can also use a cut (trimming) or the external edges of a NURBS
surface.

Surfaces not connected Surfaces connected tangentially


tangentially

The user will need to do the following:


• “Determine the connection surfaces”
• “Set the tension”
• “Set the degree in U”

The tangential connections options are available only if the NURBS mode has been activated
(See “Change the construction mode” on page 96).

326 Reference Manual


23.7.2.1 Determine the connection surfaces
A handler will make it possible to indicate, for each border, the adjacent surface the
connection will need to be tangential to, as well as the direction of the connection.
The selection will be made by a simple click on the handler arrow which approaches the
orientation of the desired surface connection the most.
A red arrow identifies the tangential connection.
By clicking again on this arrow, the user will cancel the tangential characteristic of the
connection.

Border #2

Border #1

Non tangential connections between two borders Non tangential connections on the border #1
tangential on the left on the border #2

Border #2 Border #2

Border #1 Border #1

Connections Connections
non tangential on the border #1 tangential on the left on the border #1
tangential on the left on the border #2 tangential on the left on the border #2

Amapi ProT M 327


If the border is common to several faces, the user will have to click on the handler arrow
which approaches the orientation of the desired surface of the face to be connected
tangentially.

Border #2

Border #1

Non tangential connections between two borders Connections


tangential on the top on the border #1
non tangential on the border #2

Border #2 Border #2

Border #
Border #1

Connections Connections
tangential on the right on the border #1 tangential on the top on the border #1
non tangential on the border #2 tangential on the bottom on the border #2

328 Reference Manual


23.7.2.2 Set the tension
The connection handler will make it possible to graphically tune the tension of the tangential
connection. The length of the arrow is proportional to the tension. The setting will be done
as the follows:

• Click on the end of an arrow marking the tangential connection.


• Move the cursor
• Click to validate.

Slightly tightened tangential Fairly tightened tangential Strongly tightened tangential


connection connection connection

23.7.2.3 Set the degree in U


When making a ruled surface between NURBS curves, Amapi Pro creates a NURBS surface
where U degree is given by the degree of the curves but where the V degree is undefined.
The degree per default depends on the number of borders as well as the nature of the
connection (tangential or not):
Minimum degree = number of borders + number of tangential connections -1.

A degree of 1 will produce a surface with sharp A degree of 2 will produce a smooth surface
angles

Amapi ProT M 329


23.7.3 Closing the surface on itself
It is sometimes necessary to close the ruled surface by using the first curve as the last
curve. For this, after having validated the second to last curve, click on this option
and the first curve will be added to the surface in order to close it.

23.7.4 Curve Inversion


The “Ruled Surface” tool takes into account the direction of the curve. The generated
surface might therefore appear twisted if all the curves are not in the same direction.
The “Curve Inversion” accessory enables you to obtain a better result as it will reverse the
direction of the last indicated curve. You will obtain the same effect by pressing on the
“Space-Bar”.

23.7.5 Align the first border points


In NURBS mode, the user will be able to choose to align the first points of closed borders in
U or V. This option can solve the problems of twisted ruled surfaces.

Does not align the first border points.

Aligns the first border points.

23.7.6 Additional information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled Ruled_Surface
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

What about the curves used for the construction?


There are two cases:
When working using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on page 109): the
curves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be editable by the
tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will be automatically
transmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123). When the curves are
edges or cuttings of NURBS surfaces, they are shared by the two surfaces they belong to. When
they are edited, the modifications appear on the two surfaces as if they had been welded.
When working without using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on
page 109): the curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after
releasing the tool. They can be shown again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” on
page 184).

330 Reference Manual


23.8 Coons Surface
This tool generates a surface from connected curves, snapped by the end points with
the adjacent ones drawing a closed perimeter. These curves can be edges of NURBS
surfaces that makes it possible to create surfaces of connection between several adjacent sur-
faces by a point.
.

Coons Surface created from four curves

4 adjacent surfaces with one point Coons surface created from four adjacent edges

Amapi Pro allows you to pick up the tool only if there is at least one curve or an open volume in
the scene.

Amapi ProT M 331


23.8.1 Surface creation
The tool can work in two different modes. Select the icon showing the desired mode:

Manual Coons mode

Automatic Coons mode

Manual Coons mode


To manually create a “Coons Surface”, proceed as follows:

1) Create a set of curves under the following conditions before picking up the “Coons
Surface” tool.
• The curves must be connected (See “Connected curves: Connected curves are several
curves, where a curve has one end exactly superimposed with one end of another
curve.” on page 91).
• There are no limits for the number of curves.
2) Pick up the “Coons Surface” tool.
3) It must be specified if an object will be polygonal or NURBS while creating
it (See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96). Amapi Pro displays a
toggle-icon allowing to switch from one drawing mode to another. Check that the button
corresponding to the desired mode is selected. If not, click on it or use the (Ctrl+B)
shortcut.
4) Click on each curve (in any order).
5) The operation is finished when Amapi Pro detects the curve or the set of connected
curves is closed.
The Coons surface is displayed.

Automatic Coons mode


The Automatic Coons mode works exactly like the manual mode. The only
difference is that Amapi Pro is able to detect whether or not the first selected curve is
connected to the others to make a closed shape. If it is the case, the surface will be
immediately created from the detected curves without another user action.

332 Reference Manual


23.8.2 Tangential connection
This type of connection makes it possible to connect a Coons surface tangentially to a border
of a NURBS surface.
Connection options are offered only if the user has enabled the NURBS operating mode (See
“Change the construction mode” on page 96).

23.8.3 Additional information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):
This tool adds a DG level labeled Coons_Surface (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on
page 109).

What about the curves used for the construction?


There are two cases:
When working using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on page 109):
The curves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be editable by
the tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will be automatically
transmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123). When the curves are
edges of NURBS surfaces, they are shared by the two surfaces to which they belong. When they
are edited, modifications will appear on the two surfaces as if the surfaces were welded.
When working without using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on
page 109): The curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after
releasing the tool. They can be shown again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” on
page 184).

Amapi ProT M 333


23.9 Gordon surface
This tool is used to create a surface using a network of 3D curves. The surface is
generated along the longitudinal and latitudinal curves.

23.9.1 Surface creation


To create “Gordon surface”, proceed as follows:
1) Create a set of curves under the following conditions before picking up the “Gordon
surface” tool.
• All the longitudinal curves must have their ends connected to one point of the
latitudinal curves (and vice versa) to create a net.
• It must not be a curve that will be longitudinal and latitudinal at the same time (See
“Curves” on page 91).
• All curves going in the same direction (longitudinal or latitudinal) must either be
closed or opened (See “Open / closed objects” on page 94).
2) Click on each of the longitudinal curves.
3) Validate.
4) Click now on each of the latitudinal curves.
5) Validate.
6) Amapi Pro computes the surface mesh; if the curves are correct, it will display the result.
If not, Amapi Designer will suggest a configuration to be validated that will generate the
surface.

334 Reference Manual


23.9.2 Additional information
The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):
This tool adds a DG level labeled Gordon_Surface (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on
page 109).

What about the curves used for the construction?


There are two cases:
When working using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on page 109): the
curves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be editable by the
tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will be automatically
transmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123).
When working without using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on
page 109): the curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after
releasing the tool. They can be shown again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” on
page 184).

Amapi ProT M 335


23.10 Manifold
This tool is used to create a closed volume from NURBS surfaces which will define
the future volume.
(See “Surfaces / Volumes” on page 92)
(See “Open / closed objects” on page 94)
(See “The NURBS models” on page 98)

The selection of the surface-limits will be made either before or while using the tool.
To change the selection while using the tool is known as the “inverse” selection principle
(See “Single object selection” on page 151).
The volume will be created when the “Enter” key is pressed, thus validating the selection of
the surface-limits.

Surfaces-limits Generated volume

An option allows you to generate or not the internal surfaces of the resulting volume.

Do not generate internal surfaces Generate internal surfaces

336 Reference Manual


The surfaces-limits must imperatively delimit a closed contour.
If this condition is not observed, Amapi Pro will not be able to generate a volume.

The tool and the Dynamic Geometry (DG) :


This tool adds a DG level labeled Manifold_Volume (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on
page 109).

What about the objects used for the construction?


There are two cases :
When working using the Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on
page 109) : The curves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be
editable by the tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will be
automatically transmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123).
When working without using the Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on
page 109) : The curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after
releasing the tool. They can be shown again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” on
page 184).

Amapi ProT M 337


338 Reference Manual
24
Modeling palette

This tools palette contains the tools used to model the objects.

Icon Tool name Description See

This tool is used to control the number of facets defining a surface and the
“Smooth” number of points defining a curve and to give them a smoother aspect.
page 340

This tool allows you to create internal or external bevels, depending on the
“Chamfer” orientation of the model edges
page 347

This tool offers two different options:


“Thickness/Offset” - Creates a clone object parallel to the current object. page 351
- Gives a thickness to a curve, a surface or a volume

“Cut” Proposes several methods to cut one or several objects at the same time. page 354

This tool allows you to delete one or several elements (facet, edge or point)
“Delete” from the selected objects.
page 364

This tool subdivides the segments of a curve or the facets of a surface or a


“Tesselate” volume.
page 367

This tool lets you apply several kinds of deformations on the current
“Deform” selection proposed as options.
page 374

“Bend” This tool deforms the selection along a profile curve. page 379

This tool allows you to pull on the current selection so that the points
“Mold” located in the influence area are moved with an inertia effect.
page 382

“Bump/Soften” This tool allows you to work on the surface bump of the current selection. page 385

Amapi ProT M 339


24.1 Smooth
The “Smooth” tool is used to control the number
of facets defining a surface and the number of
points defining a curve.

• Amapi Pro has several smoothing methods (See


“Smoothing options” on page 341).
• The higher the smoothing value, the smoother the
object looks.
• Some options give accessories to generate smoothing
breaks (see details on page 344) or tune tensions (see
details on page 343).
• The default mode is to apply a smoothing on the
current selected objects (See “The concept of
selection” on page 147). However, a smoothing can Not smoothed Smoothed
be applied on a part of the selection “Partial Object Object
smoothing” (see details on page 345).
• The smoothing is editable: if the “Smooth” tool is selected again and the current object is
already smoothed, Amapi Pro will suggest either to modify the current smoothing
parameters or to change the smoothing method.
When working with Dynamic Geometry, the smoothing adds a DG level to the object,
allowing the smoothing to be editable.
That is to say, if the current object is already smoothed, the tool systematically offers to edit
the corresponding Dynamic Geometry level for the user.
Thus, he or she will be able either to change the smoothing method of the selected elements
or to modify the selection to be smoothed.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

340 Reference Manual


24.1.1 Smoothing options
Amapi Pro has several different smoothing methods depending on the type of the current
selection. The smoothing methods are displayed as options.
You will select the option proposing the nearest solution to the required effect.
As there are many smoothing possibilities, you will have to test them to find the best adapted
to your shape.
There are several kinds of smoothing:
• “Smoothing polygonal surfaces” (see details on page 341)
• “Smoothing polygonal curves” (see details on page 342)
• “Smoothing NURBS objects” (see details on page 343)

24.1.1.1 Smoothing polygonal surfaces

Catmull Doo Bézier Loop Butterfly


smoothing smoothing smoothing smoothing smoothing
* * ** * **
Illustrations
Objects to be
smoothed

Editable •Range •Range •Range •Range •Range


Parameter(s) (see details on (see details on (see details on (see details on (see details on
page 342) page 342) page 342) page 342) page 342)
•Tension •Tension •Tension
(see details on (see details on (see details on
page 343) page 343) page 343)

There are two kinds of smoothing:


* The internal smoothing: the smoothed shape remains inside the limits defined by the not smoothed
object.
** The external smoothing: the smoothed shape is outside the limits defined by the not smoothed object.

Amapi ProT M 341


The range
The smoothing range defines the number of facets. The higher the range value, the
finer the smoothing. The tuning can be made either with the +/- keys or by entering a
value in the parameter palette.

Not smoothed object Bézier smoothing Bézier smoothing


range = 2 range = 8

24.1.1.2 Smoothing polygonal curves

Bézier Interpolation Approximation Chaïkin Cubic


smoothing smoothing smoothing smoothing smoothing
* *
*
Illustration
Curve to be
smoothed

Editable •Range •Range •Range •Range •Range


Parameter(s) (see details on (see details on (see details on (see details on (see details on
page 343) page 343) page 343) page 343) page 343)
•Tension •Degree •Level •Tension •Tension
(see details on (see details on (see details on (see details on (see details on
page 343) page 342) page 343) page 343) page 343)
•Degree
(see details on
page 342)

* Generates NURBS curves

Degree
A NURBS curve is defined by control points, a nodal sequence and a degree.
The degree of a NURBS curve corresponds to the number of control points which influence
the curve at any given point. A degree of 1 gives a broken line which goes through the
control points. A degree of 3 gives a smoother curve moving away from the control points
The greater the degree, the lower the influence of the control points, with the curve
smoothing out the more as it moves away from the control points.
(See “NURBS Curve” on page 99)

342 Reference Manual


The range
The smoothing range defines the number of segments. The higher the range value,
the finer the smoothing. The tuning can be made either with the +/- keys or by
entering a value in the parameter palette.

Not smoothed object Bézier smoothing Bézier smoothing


range = 2 range = 8

The level

Not smoothed object Approximation smoothing Approximation smoothing


range = 5 and level = 2 range = 5 and level = 4

24.1.1.3 Smoothing NURBS objects


The Polygonal objects smoothing methods are not applicable to the NURBS objects (See
“Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96) and Amapi Pro will switch to the Tesselation
procedure described in “Tesselate a NURBS object” on page 370.

24.1.2 Tension control


Some smoothing methods allow you to control the tension of the smoothing, that is to
say that it controls how close the smoothing edges are (polygonal surfaces smoothing
only) or vertices (polygonal surfaces and curves) to the not smoothed object.
Tension setting is done on the entire object. To do so, enter a value in the parameter palette.

Amapi ProT M 343


Tension control on internal smoothing:

Not smoothed object Tension = -0.80 Tension = 0 Tension = 0.80

Tension control on external smoothing:

Not smoothed object Tension = -0.80 Tension = 0 Tension = 0.80

Some smoothing methods have an accessory to control tension on a part of an object.


Use the appropriate selection accessory (see details on page 148) to select the edges or the
vertices on which the tension can be tuned.
The tuning can be made either with the +/- keys or by entering a value in the parameter
palette.
A click in an empty space of the scene will delete all the local tensions.

24.1.3 Break control


Some smoothing methods allow you to control the breaks of smoothing.
The breaks correspond to the edges (polygonal surfaces smoothing only) or vertices
(polygonal surfaces and curves) on which the smoothing must not be applied.
Use the appropriate selection accessory (see details on page 148) to select the edges or the
vertices to be broken.

344 Reference Manual


A click in an empty space of the scene will delete all the breaks.

Not smoothed object Smoothed object Smoothed object Smoothed object


on which some edges are on which a point is a
selected breaks selected break

24.1.4 Partial smoothing


By default, the smoothing is automatically applied on all the selected objects with
respect to the break instructions (See “Tension control” on page 343) (See “Break
control” on page 344).
Some smoothing methods provide a partial smoothing accessory. It allows you to select
facets (polygonal surfaces smoothing only) or segments (polygonal surfaces and curves) to
smooth. The facets or segments not selected will not be smoothed.
Use the appropriate selection accessory (see details on page 148) to select the facets or
segments to smooth.
A click in an empty space of the scene will delete all the selections.

24.1.5 Making convex surfaces


This option gives a small variation of the smoothing effect for the objects made up of
concave facets.

A convex facet is any segment linking two points


anywhere on a surface and is fully enclosed in the
shape.
Convex facet

A concave facet is any facet which does not


match the above convex facet definition.

Concave facet

Amapi ProT M 345


The smoothing of an object made up of convex
facets gives a different result from the smoothing
of the same object made up of concave facets.
For this reason, Amapi Pro can automatically
make convex the concave facets of the object to
be smoothed. This operation consists of dividing Concave facet transformed
into a convex facet
each concave facet into the minimum convex
facets.

24.1.6 Additional information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):
This tool adds a DG level labeled Smoothing (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

For a better quality and efficiency, we recommend to create your models with a small number
of facets and to smooth them at the end of the modeling.

Mixing different smoothing methods on the same object:


If the current object is already smoothed, Amapi Pro will suggest to edit the corresponding DG
level.
To apply another smoothing method on a part or on the entire object, delete this DG level. (See
“Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

346 Reference Manual


24.2 Chamfer
This tool allows you to create internal or external
bevels, based on the orientation of the edges of the
model. Choose a kind of chamfer before selecting the elements
you want to work on.
The selection method is described in “The selection methods”
paragraph on page 150.
Then, set the range and the radius of the chamfer on polyhedral
objects. Only the radius can be locally changed.
On NURBS objects, the radius can be set on the entire object.

24.2.1 Chamfer a volume


If the current object is a surface or volume and polyhedral, Amapi Pro has three chamfer
options. If the current object is a NURBS surface or volume, only the “Chamfer the edges”
mode will be available. Toggle from one to the other by using both the “Alt” and “Space-
Bar” keys or by clicking on the corresponding icon.

Option description Chamfer the edges Dice corner Peaks


Creates an arc on each Creates arcs on selected Gives a sharp aspect to
end of the selected points, then generates a a chamfered vertex.
edge, then generates a ruled surface between (Polyhedral only)
ruled surface between them.
them. (Polyhedral only)
Illustrations:

Object to be chamfered Object on which some Object with all vertices Object fully edge-chamfered
edges have been chamfered chamfered in dice corner but with a sharpened vertex
Editable parameters •Range (Polyhedral •Range (Polyhedral
only) (see details on only) (see details on
page 349) page 349)
•Radius (see details on •Radius (see details on
page 349) page 349)

A suitcase corner is a corner on which all the adjacent edges have been edge
chamfered.

To create a suitcase corner quickly, just click on a vertex of the current object.

Amapi ProT M 347


Of course, it is not possible to transform a dice corner into a suitcase corner.

24.2.2 Chamfer a polygonal line


Chamfering a curve, consists of replacing a point of the curve with an arc on which the
radius (see details on page 349) and the range (see details on page 349) will be set.

“C” curve that has not “C” curve on which a vertex has “C” curve of which all
been chamfered been chamfered vertices have been chamfered

The curves chamfer does not apply to NURBS curves.

24.2.3 Radius Global setting


The “Radius” parameter defines the radius value of the arcs associated with the chamfered
vertices.
The +/- keys allow you to set the radius quickly without entering a value in the parameter
palette.

Dice corner chamfer Dice corner chamfer


Radius 3 Radius 6

Edge chamfer Edge chamfer


Radius 1 Radius 3

348 Reference Manual


24.2.4 Radius local setting on polyhedral objects
Amapi Pro allows you to locally modify the radius/range values of the arcs that are
associated with the chamfered vertices. This setting does not apply to NURBS
objects.
To do this, click on the “Radius local setting on polyhedral objects” accessory icon. The
selection method is described in “The selection methods” paragraph (see details on
page 150).
The +/- keys allow you to set the parameter quickly, which avoids entering a value in the
parameter palette.

Edge chamfers Edge chamfers


with an identical radius with some modified radiuses

24.2.5 Range global setting on polyhedral objects


The “Range” parameter corresponds to the number of intermediate points defining the arcs
associated with the chamfered vertices. This setting does not apply to NURBS objects. The
higher the range, the smoother the chamfer. To set the range, enter a value in the parameter
palette (See “Editing the parameters” on page 162).

Dice corner chamfer Dice corner chamfer Dice corner chamfer


Range 0 Range 1 Range 2

Edge chamfer Edge chamfer Edge chamfer


Range 0 Range 1 Range 2

Amapi ProT M 349


24.2.6 Shape of the chamfer for NURBS edges
NURBS edges can be chamfered in various ways using one of the options below:

Linear Section: allows you to create beveled edges

Circular Section: rounded chamfer

Approximate Circular Section: Differs very slightly from the circular section

Interpolated Section: Uses the shape of the two surfaces to define an interpolation,
thus preserving the ideal contour.

24.2.7 Apply to all


This accessory allows you to chamfer all the current objects at the same time. It is
possible to apply some selection changes before validating.
The “Apply to all” accessory cancels all the chamfering operations already made on the
current object.

This accessory shortcut is the “A” key.

24.2.8 Additional Information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled as Chamfer (See
“Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

350 Reference Manual


24.3 Thickness/Offset
With the “Thickness/Offset” tool you will be able to “Give a thickness” to a curve
or a surface or “Create an offset copy” of the current object.

24.3.1 “Thickness/Offset” options


• The “Give a thickness” option consists to give a thickness to the curve or to the selected
surface.
• The “Create an offset copy” option creates an identical object offset from the original at
a given distance.
These two operations apply to polyhedral curves and surfaces and NURBS. In some cases, it
can apply to BREP volumes. Click on the icon corresponding to the desired option or press
both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.

Give a thickness Create an offset copy


Option description Gives a thickness Creates a clone object
to a curve, parallel to the current object.
a surface or a volume (See “The clones” on page 107)
Illustration

On a 3D curve

On a surface object
Editable parameters •Thickness * •Thickness *
•Number of points **
(Polyhedral only)

Amapi ProT M 351


* The +/- keys allow you to quickly tune the thickness without using the parameter palette.

Example of curve with a thickness of 2 Example of curve with a thickness of 4

** The “Number of points” parameter is available when applying a thickness to a curve.


It corresponds to the number of points which defines the sections.

Example of curve with a thickness of 4 points Example of curve with a thickness of 6 points

24.3.2 Changing the position of the thickness


This option allows you to change the location of the action (Inside/Outside or Above/
Below). To toggle from one to the other, click on the icon showing the desired action.

Options
Inside Outside

Object to be thickened Object thickened towards the Object thickened towards the
inside outside

352 Reference Manual


24.3.3 Surface options
If the current object is surface or volume, Amapi Pro will give you the choice between
several options to get an “Ideal”, “Angular” or “Exploded” shape.

Options
Ideal Angular Exploded
Option All the points belonging to The facets of the original The facets of the original
description the surface of the object are offset by the object are reproduced
thickened shape are at thickness value then identically and shifted of
equal distance from the dilated in order to obtain a the thickness value
original object. shape similar to the
original.

Surface to be
thickened
Available on Available with the
NURBS objects “Create an offset
only copy” option only

24.3.4 Additional information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):
• The “Give a thickness” option adds a DG level labeled Thickness.
• The “Create an offset copy” option creates a clone of the object and transmits its DG to it.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

In the steps where the Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are available:
• “From the graphic workspace” with the “+” or “-” keys.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Using this tool, create a vase with variable thickness, modifying only the inside or the outside
surface (the original object and its offset).

Amapi ProT M 353


24.4 Cut
The “Cut” tool works on the selected objects (See “The concept of selection” on
page 147). Several methods are available to cut one or more objects at the same time:

Boolean: Performs boolean operations


between curves, surfaces or volumes (see
details on page 355).

Punch or «Trimming»: Punching a surface


or a volume using a reference curve (see
details on page 357).

Extract: Extracts one or several facets of the


current object to make a new object (see
details on page 361).
(Polyhedral only)

Slices: Cuts a volume object into regular


slices (see details on page 362).
(Polyhedral only)

The cutting methods are proposed as options. toggle from one to the other by using both the
“Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys or by clicking on the corresponding icon.

354 Reference Manual


24.4.1 Cutting methods

24.4.1.1 Boolean
This “Cut” tool option computes the intersections between two operands such as
curves, surfaces or volumes. Then, it displays all the solutions resulting from this
operation. Select the one to be kept. The two objects can be indifferently Polyhedral or
NURBS (See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96). .
If the two original objects are NURBS objects, cutting will make a NURBS object whatever the
operating mode. If one of the two objects is polyhedral, cutting will make a polyhedral object.

Boolean operations on open NURBS surfaces can give erroneous results. Use these
operations only on closed volumes.

Tool usage
1) Select the first operand of the operation (object or group)
2) Pick up the tool
3) Click on the object or group of objects which will be the second operand.
4) Amapi Pro displays a first object. Use both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys (or use the +
- keys) to toggle from one option to the other to display all the possible solutions of the
operation.
5) As the expected result is displayed, release the tool or press the “Enter” key to validate
the operation and leave the tool.
An operand should not have intersection with itself. Objects of a group should therefore not
be intersected between them.

Options
“Boolean” tool example:
• The sphere is the operand #1 (the object selected Vol.1
before picking up the tool). It will be named Vol.1 if Surf.1
considered as a closed volume or Surf.1 if
considered as a surface.
• The cube is the operand #2 (the object selected after
picking up the tool). It will be named Vol.2 if
considered as a closed volume or Surf.2 if Vol.2
considered as a surface. Surf.2

Amapi ProT M 355


• Operations between volumes

Vol.2 minus Vol.1 Vol.1 or Vol.2 Vol.1 and Vol.2 Vol.1 minus Vol.2

• Operations between surface and volume

Surf.1 and Vol.2 Surf.2 and Vol.1 Surf.1 minus Vol.2 Surf.2 minus Vol.1

• Operations between surfaces

Surf.2 and Surf.1 Surf.2 or Surf.1*

*generates 4 surface objects

The boolean computing time on complex models is longer than on simple models.

356 Reference Manual


24.4.1.2 Punch
The punch option cuts a curve, surface or volume object
following the projection of a profile curve on this
object.
The two parts can be Polygonal or NURBS (See “Polygonal or
NURBS Models” on page 96).
Cutting NURBS volumes with the “Punch” option corresponds Object to be cut
to what is called the “Trimming”.
The punch profile can be an open or a closed curve which has
already been drawn or will be drawn into the tool (see details
on page 357).

Cut object

If the two original objects are NURBS objects, cutting will make a NURBS object whatever the
operating mode. If one of the two objects is polyhedral, cutting will make a polyhedral object.

The curve used as a punch on a NURBS volume must be a closed curve. If not the result can be
erroneous.

Drawing the profile


The punch profile can be an open or closed curve which Amapi Pro will project onto the
object to be cut. The operation can be made either from an existing curve or a curve drawn
into the tool.
• Punch from an already drawn profile
Draw a profile with a tool from the “Line drawing” palette (see details on page 277).
Select the element(s) to be “Cut”, pick up the tool and then click on the profile curve.
Amapi Pro immediately displays the object created during this operation.
Then, choose from the following options:
• Use both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys (or use the + - keys) to toggle from one option
to the other to display all the possible solutions of the operation (See “Cutting options”
on page 358).
• Release the tool or press the “Enter” key to validate the operation and leave the tool.
• Punch from a profile drawn in the tool
Select the element(s) to be “Cut” and pick up the tool. The “Line drawing” tools palette is
displayed.
Use one of them to draw the punch profile
(see details on page 277).

Amapi ProT M 357


Amapi Pro immediately displays the object created from this operation.
Then, choose from the following options:
• Use both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys (or use the + - keys) to toggle from one option
to the other to display all the possible solutions of the operation (See “Cutting options”
on page 358).
• Release the tool or press the “Enter” to validate the operation and leave the tool.

Direction of the profile projection


The punch profile must be a 2D (flat) and closed curve, which will be projected onto the
object to be cut, following the normal to the plane it is inscribed to.
If required, the projection axis could be set perpendicular to the current view plane (See
“View plane” on page 487). To do this, click on the icon in the control panel.

Cutting options
• Punching a volume or surface object
Amapi Pro computes all the possible intersections
between the current object and the profile curve Profile
projection
following its projection path. path
Use both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys (or use the Profile
+ - keys) to toggle from one option to the other to curve
display all the possible solutions of the operation. Object to
It is possible to control the cutting depth or the face be cut
to be cut (see details on page 359).
Press the “Enter” key to validate the operation and
leave the tool.

358 Reference Manual


Cutting options between the volume and the projection path

Interior volume Exterior volume Interior/exterior volumes

Cutting options between the surface and the projection path

Interior Surface Exterior surface Interior/exterior surfaces

Control the hole depth or the face to be cut


It is possible to control:
• The depth of the cut, when cutting a volume.
• The facets to be cut, when cutting a surface.

Amapi ProT M 359


This operation could be done using the “Stretch” tool.

Object cut with the The same object and The cutting depth line Object cut with the
“Punch” tool. the line allowing you to while setting it with the “Punch”
The object is drilled set the depth of the “Stretch” tool tool where the depth
from a face through the cutting in the “Stretch” has been reduced.
other one tool

After having made the cut, you will release the “Cut” tool. You will then pick up the
“Stretch” tool. You will then see the curve appear used for the cutting and a green axis repre-
senting the cutting depth. Note that it slightly exceeds the cut out object. To reduce the cut-
ting depth, simply take one of the ends of this axis and move it. The cutting is recomputed in
real time and you can thus visualize its exact depth. In the same way, you can orient the cut-
ting axis or modify the curve.

• Punch a curve
After validation, the number of objects is equal to the number of intersections between the
curve to be cut and the profile, plus one.

Curve to be cut
Cutting profile Curve cut into several curves

Particular case of the cutting on one point:


Click
Shift click

Click

Curve to be cut Curve cut in two parts


Cutting profile

360 Reference Manual


24.4.1.3 Extract
This “Cut” tool option allows you to substract one or
more facets of the current object to make a new object.
The newly created object becomes the current one.
The “facets to be extracted” selection can be made with an
available selection accessory (See “The selection methods” on
page 150).

To extract facets without removing them from the current object (duplication), use the tool
“Extract Facets” (see details on page 304).

This “Cut” tool option can be used to separate different parts of an object after modeling in order
to apply different materials.

This type of extraction does not apply to NURBS objects.

Amapi ProT M 361


24.4.1.4 Slices
This “Cut” tool option allows you to cut the selection into oriented slices. Select first
the start point, then the end point of the cuts. Set the slices interval with the + - keys
or by entering the value in the parameter palette.

Click

Click

In the steps where the Position or Dimension must be set, several methods are available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• “Using the Remote Control” (see details on page 162)
• With the “+” or “-” keys.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

362 Reference Manual


24.4.2 Additional information
The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled Cut (See
“Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

What about the objects used for the construction?


There are two cases:
When working using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on page 109):
The curves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be editable by
the tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will be automatically
transmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123).
When working without using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on
page 109): The curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after
releasing the tool. They can be shown again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” on
page 184).

Shortcuts: See the shortcut list available after starting the tool with any current option:
• Click on a surface or a volume; Amapi Pro will make a cut with a Boolean operation (see details on
page 355).
• Click on a curve: Amapi Pro will make a punch following an already drawn profile (see details on
page 357).
• Click on the current object: Amapi Pro will make a punch following a profile drawn in the tool (see
details on page 357).
• Click on the right mouse button: Amapi Pro will make a cut with the slice-cut option (see details on
page 362).

Amapi ProT M 363


24.5 Delete
This tool allows you to delete one or several elements (facet, edge or point) from the
selected objects (See “The concept of selection” on page 147). This deletion can be
made with or without facet reconstruction.

1) You can pick up this tool by having or not a current selection (Facets, Edges or
Points) (See “The concept of selection” on page 147).
2) You will begin or update the selection within the tool with the selection accessories (See
“The selection accessories” on page 148).
The deletion will be interactive.
3) Validate the action (“Enter” key) or release the tool to end the tool action.

Two deletion options are available;

With reconstruction

Without reconstruction

Amapi Pro will suggest options for the type of the current object and the entity to be deleted
(See “The current selection is a curve” on page 365) (See “The current selection is a
surface” on page 366).
.
The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool doesn’t work on objects including several DG
levels. You must collapse the DG before deleting an element (See “Collapsing the DG” on
page 118).

In the case of NURBS objects, only the edge and facet modes will be accessible since the points
are not entities displayed on NURBS. The suppression of NURBS edges will allow you to remove
the trimming curves of the NURBS surfaces. A NURBS surface represents a single face and thus
the removal of NURBS faces will remove the complete face.

364 Reference Manual


24.5.1 The current selection is a curve

Without reconstruction With reconstruction


Option description Keeps the “hole” made by the Creates a curve segment to close
deletion of the element(s). the “hole” made by the deletion of
the element(s).
Illustration I
on open curve
Point to be
deleted
Inactive

Edge to be
deleted I The deletion of only one edge “with
Inactive reconstruction” has no effect on the
curve.

Edges to be
deleted
Inactive

Illustration
on closed curve
Point to be deleted

Edge to be deleted

The removal of only one edge “With


reconstruction” has obviously no effect
on the curve.

Edges to be
deleted

Inactive

Amapi ProT M 365


24.5.2 The current selection is a surface

Without reconstruction With reconstruction

Option description Keeps the “hole” made by the Creates a facet to close the “hole”
deletion of the element(s). made by the deletion of the
element(s).

Deletion of only one facet


The deletion of only one facet “with
reconstruction” has no effect on the
object.

Facets deletion

Edges deletion

Point deletion

24.5.3 Additional information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): this tool is an editor-tool which can edit the first DG
level. The editor-tools carry out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at higher
levels. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The “Delete” tool doesn’t work on NURBS models. It is possible to transform a NURBS
model into a polygonal model. To do so, use the “Information” tool located in the Control panel
(See “Information” on page 188).
Attention! A polygonal model cannot be transformed into a NURBS model.

Use the most adapted selection accessory within the proposed ones (See “The selection
methods” on page 150)

366 Reference Manual


24.6 Tesselate
This tool subdivides the segments of a curve or the facets of a surface or a volume.
A distinction must be made between the Tesselation of polygonal objects and the
Tesselation of NURBS objects (See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96).
The tool and the Dynamic Geometry (DG)
• The tesselation on polyhedral object is a DG editor. This option carries out modifications of a
topological nature on the 1st DG level, its effects are reflected at the higher levels.
• The tesselation of NURBS objects changes the NURBS properties of the object.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

24.6.1 Tesselate a polygonal volume or surface


Choose between two groups of very different options:
• “Standard Tesselation options” (see details on page 367)
• “Customized Tesselation options” (see details on page 368)

24.6.1.1 Standard Tesselation options


The Standard Tesselation proposes several Tesselation modes.
Click on the icon showing the desired option or use both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to
toggle from one option to the other.

Select each facet to be subdivided. The selection can be made facet by facet (click on the
facet) or with the “Lasso” (See “The Personalized Lasso Selection” on page 153) quickly
available by right clicking the mouse.
Validate the tool by pressing the “Enter” key.

Rectangular Triangular Tesselation Diamond


Tesselation Tesselation
Illustration

Amapi ProT M 367


When clicking on the “Apply to all” accessory, Amapi Pro will perform the operation
on all the facets. Hit the “Enter” key to validate and start a new tesselation. The
shortcut for this accessory is the “A” key.

24.6.1.2 Customized Tesselation options


Customized Tesselation allows the user to determine the segment of each facet to be
subdivided. Amapi Pro proposes two possible interfaces to draw the segments. In both cases,
validate the action by pressing the “Enter” key.

Tesselation by segment Continued Tesselation Tesselation by slice


by segment
Option Select the exact position of This interface considers The user will have to only
description the ends of each segment that all the segments are click on an edge to
for each facet to be sub- adjacent. The user will position the cutting
divided. define the passing points section.
of the cutting line.
Illustration

Click 2 Click 2
Click 1 Click 1
Click 3 Click

Click 3
Click 4

368 Reference Manual


24.6.2 Tesselate a polygonal curve
Amapi Pro proposes two modes for curves Tesselation.
Click on the icon showing the desired option.

Middle segment tesselation Customized Tesselation


Illustration Amapi Pro adds a point in the middle Click on segments to add new points.
of each selected segment. Validate the tool action by pressing the
The selection can be done segment by “Enter” key.
segment (click on the segment) or with
the “Lasso” (See “The Personalized
Lasso Selection” on page 153) quickly
available by clicking on the right
mouse button.
Validate the tool action by pressing the
“Enter” key.

Clicks Clicks

Accessory If using the “Apply to all”


accessory, Amapi Pro will
apply the operation on all the
segments. The shortcut for this
accessory is the “A” key

Amapi ProT M 369


24.6.3 Tesselate a NURBS object
See “The NURBS models” paragraph on page 98 to learn more details about the NURBS
models
For NURBS objects, Amapi Pro proposes two Tesselation methods. Click on the icon
showing the desired option or use the both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from an
option to another.

“Standard NURBS Tesselation” (see details on page 370)

“Adaptive NURBS Tesselation” (see details on page 371)

In the both cases, some settings can be made : “Adding nodes and breaks management” (see
details on page 372)

24.6.3.1 Standard NURBS Tesselation


This is a constant parametric Tesselation because the number of subdivisions
depends on the “Range” parameter.

• For a NURBS curve, the tesselation range corresponds to the number of segments
generated between two nodal points.

• For a NURBS surface or volume, the tesselation range corresponds to the number of
intervals made by the intermediate lines generated between two nodal lines.

When creating a NURBS curve, surface or volume, Amapi Pro sets the tesselation range to 5
by default.

Tune the range with the + or - keys or by entering a value in the parameter palette.

Range U = 5 Range U = 2
Range V = 5 Range V = 3

370 Reference Manual


Range U = 5 Range U = 2 Range U = 10 Range U = 10
Range V = 5 Range V = 10 Range V = 2 Range V = 10

Default tesselation ranges


for a NURBS object (See
“The NURBS models” on
page 98)

24.6.3.2 Adaptive NURBS Tesselation


This Tesselation method is slower than the standard method (see details on page 370)
but it has the advantage of generating an optimal number of subdivisions. It can only
be applied to surfaces. You will have the possibility to modify the following parameters:

• Maximum chord height of a facet compared to the theoretical surface.


• Maximum angle in the UV space made by a polygon (in degrees).
• Maximum length of an edge in the 3D space.
• Minimum length of an edge in the 3D space.
• Width and height maximum ratio between the surfaces of the created polygons.
• Smaller subdivision in the UV space.
Each one of these values can act in complement to the others. Setting a value to 0 will cancel
the effect of this parameter. Therefore, one of the first two parameters should not be set to 0
in order to generate a result.
Some values can create very
long computing times. It is Constant
thus advised to test the val- Tesselation
ues one by one and to apply
modifications by reducing to
the default values.

Adaptive
Rang
Tesselation Rang

Amapi ProT M 371


24.6.3.3 Determination of the degree
The degree of a NURBS can be modified by editing the Degree field for a curve or Degree U
and Degree V for a surface.
(See “The NURBS models” on page 98).

24.6.3.4 Adding nodes and breaks management


• If the current object is a curve:
• Add a nodal point by clicking at the exact location where this node is to be added.
• To create a break, do a Shift-click on the node to be broken.

• If the current object is a surface or a volume:


A group of options allows you to select which nodal lines to work on. Click on the icon
showing the desired option or press the “Space-Bar” to toggle from one option to the
other.

Work on U and V

Work on U

Work on V

• If working both on U and V:


To add U and V nodal lines, place the cursor at the exact location where theses curves
will intersect and click.
Create a break both on U and V by doing a Shift-click on the node corresponding to
the nodal lines intersection to be broken.
• If working individually on U or V:
To add a nodal line, place the cursor on a point where the future line is to intersect
and click.
Create a break, by doing a Shift-click on the line to be broken.

372 Reference Manual


Click

Adding two nodal lines The two nodal lines (U and V)


(U and V) have been added

24.6.3.5 Inversion of the space of the U and V parameters of


a NURBS surface
It will sometimes be necessary to change the orientation of a NURBS surface. That can be
done thanks to these accessories:

Inversion of U

Inversion of V

Inversion of U and V

Amapi ProT M 373


24.7 Deform
This tool allows you to apply several kinds of deformations on the current selection
proposed as options (See “The concept of selection” on page 147).
They can be:
• either due to the moving, the orientation or the scaling of the control face of the “Set the
mesh of the control box” (see details on page 376).
• or depending on a parameter only.

Original object Bent object Twisted object Tapered object Spherized object

The different options of the “Deform” tool

The objects deformed with the “Edit the meshed control


box”, “Bend”, “Twist” or “Taper” option will have their
Dynamic Geometry replaced by a DG level corresponding
to a bounding meshed box called the meshed control box
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).
An object deformed by this tool will be transformed
following the actions made on this meshed control box.
The “Edit the meshed control box” tool will allow you to
deform the control box. The object will therefore undergo the effects of deforming the
control box. (See “The meshed control box editing accessories” on page 376).

374 Reference Manual


24.7.1 The options
The “Deform” tool proposes several possible deformations options. toggle from one to the
other by using both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys or by clicking on the corresponding
icon.
The tuner shows that the setting can be made by using the “+” and “-” keys or entering a
value in the parameter palette

Available
options

Edit the Bend Twist Taper Spherize


meshed
control box
Illustration

Option Allows you to allows you to allows you to allows you to allows you to
description stretch the bend the rotate the scale the spherize the
meshed control desired “Set the desired “Set the desired “Set the selection.
box (see details mesh of the mesh of the mesh of the Amapi Pro
on page 377). control box” control box” control box” displays a
Works face around the face. face. support-sphere
according to a selection (see details on (see details on on which the
similar principle geometric page 376) page 376) selection will be
to the tool center. (See “Action (See “Action projected.
“Stretch (See “Set the orientation orientation (see on
NURBS mesh of the options” on options” on page 376)
objects” (see control box” on page 377) page 377)
details on page 376)
page 254). (See “Action
orientation
options” on
page 377)
Editable • Move x •Angle •Angle •Ratio •Coefficient
parameter(s) • Move y between the defines the
control face projection
• Move z
size and the extension
original size •Radius
of the support-
sphere
Accessory (See “The •“Set the mesh •“Set the mesh •“Set the mesh
meshed control of the control of the control of the control
box editing box” box” box”
accessories” on (see details on (see details on (see details on
page 376) page 376) page 376) page 376)

Amapi ProT M 375


Original Object Object Spherized
object slightly spherized strongly spherized object

Spherized option using example

24.7.2 The meshed control box editing accessories


The “Edit the meshed control box”, “Bend”, “Twist” and
“Taper” options replaces Dynamic Geometry by a DG level
corresponding to a meshed control box. The object itself
will be transformed following the actions made on this
meshed control box (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on
page 109).
The “Edit the meshed control box” tool and its accessories
allows you to deform the control box.
The tool works on a similar principle to the tool “Stretch NURBS objects” (see details on
page 254). Its accessory functions are described below.

Set the mesh of the control box


The “Set the mesh of the control box” accessory will allow you to modify the rows
and degrees of the meshed control box.
The range corresponds to the number of meshes in x,y and/or z. This setting allows you to
work more or less precisely. This cursor shows that this can be done by using the “+”
and “-” keys of the numeric keypad or by entering the values in the parameters window.
The degree is related to the number of points of control influencing the volume at a given
point. It defines the number of nodal points. The higher the degree, the less the influence of
the control points and thus, the higher the smoothing on the volume. (see details on
page 101).

376 Reference Manual


Minimum meshing of the control box:
• Range: 2 x 2 x 2.
• Degree; 1 x 1 x 1.

Default meshing of the control box


• The default range is 3 x 3 x 3.
• The default degree is 2 x 2 x 2.

The value of the range must be strictly higher than the value of the degree.

Mold the control box


This accessory makes it possible to move a control box’s selected points so that the
points located in a specific area of influence will move with a certain inertia. The
object will undergo the effects of deforming the control box. (See “Mold” on page 382).

Scale the control box


This accessory modifies the size of the control box either by preserving its propor-
tions, or by deforming it vertically or horizontally. You will be able to set a scaling
percentage, as well as a dimension, a surface or a volume to be reached. The object will
undergo the effects of deforming the control box. (See “Scale” on page 248).

Rotate the control box


This accessory applies a rotation to the control box, around an axis perpendicular to
the working plane and by default through its geometric center. You will be able to
either control the rotation angle, or to carry out a rotation by applying a constrain by points
alignment. In both cases you will have the possibility to customize the center as well as the
rotation plane. The object will undergo the effects of deforming the control box. (See
“Rotate” on page 244).

24.7.3 Action orientation options


These options allows you to toggle the action direction (X,Y or Z). They
are available in the tools working on the meshed control box. Click on
the icon showing the desired option or press the “Space-Bar” to toggle from one option to
the other. In each case, Amapi Pro will highlight the two faces which can be the action
control face.

Amapi ProT M 377


24.7.4 Additional information
The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):
• The “Bend”, “Twist” and “Taper” options...
• Replaces the object Dynamic Geometry by a DG level corresponding to its “Set the mesh of the
control box”, labeled Mesh control box.

• Add a DG level corresponding to the deformed object, labeled Deformation.


• The “Spherize” option creates a DG level corresponding to the deformed object, labeled
Deformation.
• The “Edit the meshed control box” option belongs to the list of editor-tools able to edit the 1st
DG level. Its effects are reflected at higher levels.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

This tool works on selections relating to only one object: If the current selection is applied to
several objects, Amapi Pro will refuse access to the tool.

In the steps where the Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Dimension.
• With the “+” or “-” keys for setting a Number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

The rotations are made on the orthogonal plane which orientation is the most perpendicular to
the eye - target point axis (See “Viewpoint” on page 137).
To change the rotation plan, change the viewpoint (See “The Navigation” on page 135).

This tool uses Dynamic


Geometry properties.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)”
on page 109)

Original object Obtained result after Obtained result


made from a deformation (with the Bend after deformation
circle extrusion option) of the geometry level (with the Bend
along a profile corresponding to the profile option) of the
object highest
geometry level.

378 Reference Manual


24.8 Bend
The “Bend” tool deforms the selection along a profile curve.
Amapi Pro proposes two methods;

• “Bending along an existing profile” (see details on page 379),

• “Bending along a profile drawn with the tool” (see details on page 379).

24.8.1 Bending along an existing profile


Draw a profile curve with a tool from the “Line drawing” palette (see details on page 277).
Select the element(s) to “Bend” before picking up the tool and then select the profile curve
with a simple click. Amapi Designer immediately displays the bent selection.

Bending profile Object to be bent Bent object

24.8.2 Bending along a profile drawn with the tool


Select the element(s) to be bent before picking up the tool. The “Line drawing” (see details
on page 277) tools palette is displayed. Use these tools to draw the bending profile.

Amapi ProT M 379


Amapi Pro immediately displays the bent selection as the drawing is validated.

Torsion profile while drawing

Object to be bent Bent object

“Hand free” drawn profile The scene


in the “Bend” tool after the tool validation

24.8.3 Additional information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): the tool adds a DG level labeled Bend.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

The size of the profile shape has no effect.

The bending is made following the projection of the selected profile on the working plane.
That is to say this tool works in two dimensions.
Thus, it is important to be exactly on the same plane as the profile curve.
So, it is possible to perform successive bendings in different planes (See “Scene / orthonormal
base toggling” on page 171).

380 Reference Manual


It is obvious that to bend an object, this
object must be defined by several points
for a curve or several intermediate
sections for a surface. Amapi Pro cannot P= Bending
properly bend a cylinder made up of only profile
one extrusion segment.

Cylinder #1 to be Cylinder #2 to be
bent, made up of bent, made up of
several segments only one segment

Cylinder #1 bent Cylinder #2 bent


along the P profile following the P profile

It is not possible to bend:


• Several objects at the same time (except if they are grouped)
• A selection of several different objects.

What about the objects used for the construction?


There are two cases:
When working using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on page 109):
The curves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be editable by
the tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will be automatically
transmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123).
When working without using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on
page 109): The curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after
releasing the tool. They can be shown again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” on
page 184).

Amapi ProT M 381


24.9 Mold
This tool allows you to pull the current selection (see details on page 382) so that the
points located in the influence area (see details on page 383) are moved with some
inertia (see details on page 384).

24.9.1 Selection to pull


There are two cases:

• The current selection, before picking up the tool, is an object.


In this case the user will select a point to be pulled.
This will be the only point on which the inertia doesn’t apply (See “Inertia” on
page 384).

• The current selection, before picking up the tool, is a part of the object.
In this case the user will select a point within the selected points. All the selection will be
moved without any inertia: it will not be deformed (See “Inertia” on page 384).

Original object Mold object. Mold object.


No points are selected The button was selected
before picking up the tool. before picking up the tool.
The upper point of the Only the cork got the
bottle was moved. mold effects, but the
The button and the cork button was moved
got the mold effects. without deformation.

382 Reference Manual


24.9.2 Influence area
The influence area is the area inside which all the points receive mold effects. There are two
options to increase or to reduce the influence area:

By adjacency; the “adjacency level” parameter allows you to geometrically control


the size of the influence area.

With a radius of influence; the “radius of influence” parameter allows you to


topologically control the size of the influence area.

In both cases, the “Alt” “Page up” and “Alt” “Page down” keys will increase or decrease the
size of the influence area

Original object Mold object with a small Mold object with a greater
influence area influence area
(limited to the top half (limited to the top portion
portion of the cork) of the cork)

Amapi ProT M 383


24.9.3 Inertia
“Mold” tool creates inertia on all the points located in the influence area (See “Influence
area” on page 383). It is proportional to the distance from the selection to be pulled.
The points close to the main selected point receive a high inertia coefficient, the points far
from the main selected point receive a small inertia coefficient.
The selection to be pulled has no inertia and follows the exact cursor movement (See
“Selection to pull” on page 382).

The “Alt” “Page up” and “Alt” “Page down” keys will increase or decrease the inertia
coefficient.

Original object Top portion of the cork Top portion of the cork Top portion of the cork
mold with a high mold with a low inertia mold with a very low
inertia coefficient coefficient inertia coefficient

24.9.4 Additional information


The Mold tool works on NURBS models as on polygonal models. But on a NURBS model the
operation is carried out on the points of the control polygon and not on the points of the object
itself. The object will be deformed depending on the points of the control polygon movement.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool is an editor-tool which can edit the first DG
level. The editor-tools carry out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at the
higher levels. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

384 Reference Manual


24.10 Bump/Soften
This tool allows you to work on the surface bump of the current selection (See “The
concept of selection” on page 147).
This tool can either:
• Bump the selection by moving the points of a surface randomly.
• Soften or Stress the perturbations of a surface.
Use the +/- keys to tune the amplitude of the action before validating.

Bump Soften-Stress “Relax” Soften-Stress “Mid-


method mid” method
Illustration
Original
object

Soften Stress
Option This option moves the points This option uses the This option uses the
description of a surface or a curve on “Relax” method to “Mid-mid” method to
both sides to give it some soften or stress the soften or stress the
random surface bump. The perturbations of a perturbations of a
amplitude of the deformation surface or a curve. surface or a curve.
will remain within the
specified range(see on
page 386).
Editable • Maximum amplitude •Level (number of times to iterate)
parameters •Minimum amplitude •Coefficient (algorithm weight)
A negative coefficient increases the surface
The +/- keys allow you to bump, whereas a positive coefficient softens it
set these two parameters
quickly. The +/- keys allow you to set these two
(see on page 386) parameters quickly
Accessories •New iteration • Freeze boundary vertices
Amapi Pro will If the current object is a surface, click on
launch a new this icon to leave out its edges of the
computing operation each softening process (it keeps them sharp).
time this icon is selected.
The surface appearance will
be modified each time.

Amapi ProT M 385


Original surface Original surface Original surface Original surface
and and and
“Bumped” surface “Bumped” surface “Bumped” surface

Maximum amplitude =10 Maximum amplitude =10 Maximum amplitude =0


Minimum amplitude =10 Minimum amplitude =0 Minimum amplitude =-10

Bumping a surface

Original surface “Stressed” surface “Softened” surface


Coefficient = -0.10 Coefficient = 0.20

Stressing/Softening a surface

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): the tool adds a DG level labeled height field (See
“Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

This tool works on a selection of only one object. If the current selection is on several objects,
Amapi Pro will not give access to the tool.

In the steps where the Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are available:
• “From the graphic workspace” with the “+” or “-” keys for setting a number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

386 Reference Manual


25
Assembly palette

This tools palette contains the tools used to place and orient the objects:
Icon Tool name Description See

Allows you to create one or several copies of the current selection. Amapi Pro
“Duplicate” offers several methods of duplication.
page 388

“Symmetry” Creates a mirror image of the current selection. page 398

“Close” Lets you close the current selection, such as a curve or an opened surface. page 400

This tool offers several options to weld objects or points. If these options
“Weld” generate overlapping points, Amapi Pro keeps only one of them (other points page 403
are deleted).

This tool is used to apply a translation to the current selection along a vector,
“Snap/Align” the ends of which are defined by the user.
page 406

This tool is used to lay a facet of the selected object onto a facet of another
“Lay on” object (center on center). page 408

“Unfold” This tool is used to create a 2D flat unfolded version of a 3D model. page 409

This tool allows you to deformation of an object by mapping it onto a surface


“Wrap” (grid, cylinder or sphere).
page 413

This tool displays the dimensions of an object. Amapi Pro allows you to
“Measurements” display three types of dimensions: length, angle and volume/surface/ page 415
circumference.

“Decimate” This tool allows you to reduce the complexity of an object. page 420

Amapi ProT M 387


25.1 Duplicate
The “Duplicate” tool allows you to create one or several copies of the current
selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147). Amapi Pro has several
methods of duplication:

25.1.1 The methods


toggle from one to the other by using both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys or by clicking on
the corresponding icon.

“Single copy”: Makes one copy of the


selection (see details on page 389).

“Multiple copy”: Makes several copies of


the selection with a copy shift and/or
rotation (see details on page 390).

“Copy on support”: Duplicates the


selection along a path or on the facets of a
surface or a volume (see details on page 392).

388 Reference Manual


25.1.1.1 Single copy
This option allows you to duplicate an object or
a group of objects.
Click on the object to be copied.
The bounding box of the copy follows the cursor. Set
its position in the scene. The position setting can be
done with a mouse click in the graphic workspace or by
entering the coordinates of the geometric center in the
parameter palette. Amapi Pro will suggest to do a new
copy. Press the “Enter” key to validate the operation
and leave the tool.

The “Single copy” proposes to clone the copies


(See “The clones” on page 107).

The validation (by releasing the tool or pressing the “Enter” key) ignores the current copy (when
the bounding box position is not set).

Amapi ProT M 389


25.1.1.2 Multiple copy

Use
This “Duplicate” tool option allows you to make several copies of the selection with
a copy shift, rotation and/or a scaling ratio. This option works with parameters
settings along several steps:
1) Setting the Number of copies (data or “+ or -” keys) and validation.
2) Setting the Offset and validation.
3) Setting the Rotation and validation.
4) Setting the Scale ratio and validation.

No of copies = 5 No of copies = 5 No of copies = 5

Offset step in x = 4 Offset step in x = 0 Offset step in x = 0


Offset step in y = 4 Offset step in y = 4 Offset step in y = 4
Offset step in z = 0 Offset step in z = 0 Offset step in z = 0

Rotation step in x = 0 Rotation step in x = 0 Rotation step in x = 0


Rotation step in y = 0 Rotation step in y = 20 Rotation step in y = 0
Rotation step in z = 0 Rotation step in z = 0 Rotation step in z = 0

Scaling ratio in x = 100 Scaling ratio in x = 100 Scaling ratio in x = 90


Scaling ratio in y = 100 Scaling ratio in y = 100 Scaling ratio in y = 90
Scaling ratio in z = 100 Scaling ratio in z = 100 Scaling ratio in z = 90

Examples of object duplication.

The “Multiple copy” gives an option;

“Clone” the copies (see details on page 107).

The “Multiple copy” gives the accessory “Reference point” (see details on page 391).

If’ “n” copies are set in the “Multiple copy” option, “n” copies will be added to the selection.

390 Reference Manual


Reference point
This is this point from which the
offset and the rotation of each copy
will be computed.
The default reference point is the center of
the selected objects bounding box. To
change it, use the “Reference point”
accessory and then select the point of the
scene which will be the new reference point. Reference point
No of copies = 4 Rotation step in x = 0
Rotation step in y = 20
Offset step in x = 0 Rotation step in z = 0
Offset step in y = 4
Offset step in z = 0 Scaling ratio in x = 100
Scaling ratio in y = 100
Scaling ratio in z = 100

Amapi ProT M 391


25.1.1.3 Copy on support
Use this tool to duplicate the selection along a path or on the facets of a surface or a
volume the copies will lie on.

Use
1) The duplication support can be either a curve, a surface or a volume.
• A curve support (or path) can be drawn with the “Line drawing” tool before selecting
the “Duplicate” tool or while using the “Duplicate” tool.
• A surface or a volume used as duplication support must be built before selecting the
“Duplicate” tool.
2) Select the elements to be copied (See “Selection” on page 147).
3) Pick up the “Duplicate” tool in the assembly palette.
4) Select the “Copy on support” option.
5) It is possible to draw a duplication support path with the tool by using the accessory
“Draw a path with the tool” (see details on page 396). Otherwise, go to the next step.
6) Click on the duplication support.
• If the support is a curve: the copies are created on the path so that their reference
points (see details on page 393) are located on each point defining the curve.
• If the support is a surface: the copies are placed on the support so that their reference
points (see details on page 394) are located on the center of each facet of the support.
7) If needed, change the proposed options:
“Orientation of the copies” (see details on page 393).

“Clone” the copies (see details on page 107)

“Control of the facet-copy size ratio” (see details on page 396).

“Reference point” (see details on page 396)

8) Eventually control:
• the size of the copies (see details on page 395)
• the rotation of the copies (see details on page 395)
9) Release the tool or press the “Enter” key to validate the operation and leave the tool.
The number of copies will be equal to the number of points of the path or to the number of
facets defining the support (surface or volume).

392 Reference Manual


It is possible to draw a duplication support path with the tool by using the accessory “Draw
a path with the tool” (see details on page 396)

Orientation of the copies


• The support is a curve:
Selection
to be copied

Support

Example of a selection to be copied onto a curve support

Keeps the Rotates the copies Rotates the copies Rotates the copies Rotates the copies
orientation of the to position the x to position the y to position the z following the
original. axis of the original axis of the original axis of the original Frenet triangle
on the normal to on the normal to on the normal to
the curve. the curve. the curve.

•Size (see details •Size (see details •Size (see details •Size (see details •Size (see details
on page 395) on page 395) on page 395) on page 395) on page 395)
•Rotation (see •Rotation (see •Rotation (see •Rotation (see •Rotation (see
details on page 395) details on page 395) details on page 395) details on page 395) details on page 395)

Amapi ProT M 393


• The support is a surface:

Selection Support
to copy

Example of a selection to be copied onto a surface support

Keeps the orientation of Rotates the copies to Rotates the copies to Rotates the copies to
the original. position the x axis of position the y axis of position the z axis of
the original on the the original on the the original on the
normal of each facet of normal to each facet of normal to each facet of
the support. the support. the support.

x y z

•Size (see details on •Size (see details on •Size (see details on •Size (see details on
page 395) page 395) page 395) page 395)
•Rotation (see details on •Rotation (see details on •Rotation (see details on •Rotation (see details on
page 395) page 395) page 395) page 395)

394 Reference Manual


Controlling the size of the copies
If the support is a curve
Amapi Pro can scale the copies so that the
size of the copies increases or decreases
progressively between the first and the last copy.
The first copy position is on the first point of the
curve. Set the size ratio between the first and the
last copy. The tuning can be done by using the +
or - keys, or by entering the ratio in the parameter
palette.

If the support is a surface


Set the size ratio between the first and the last
copy. The tuning can be done by using the + or -
keys, or by entering a value in the parameter
palette.

Rotation of the copies


Give a rotation movement to all the copies by
entering a value in the parameter palette.

Reverse the copies


The copies are oriented so as to
position one axis (x,y,z) of the
original on the normal of the support (see details
on page 393).

The “Reverse the copies” option allows you to


reverse the orientation of the normal.

Amapi ProT M 395


Control of the facet-copy size ratio
If the support is a surface, Amapi Pro has Selected facet-copy couple

an accessory to control the size ratio of


each facet/copy pair.
The “Control of the facet-copy size ratio”
accessory asks you to select the facet/copy
couple to define a size ratio. This size ratio will
be automatically assigned to all the facet/copy
couples.

Selected facet-copy couple

Reference point
The reference point, displayed with the ( ) sign, defines the position of the copies
onto the support. The default reference point is the center of the selected objects
bounding box.
• If the support is a curve: the copies will be positioned on the path so that their reference
points will be located on each point defining the curve.
• If the support is a surface: the copies will be positioned on the support so that their
reference points are located on the center of each facet of the support.
To change it, use the “Reference point” accessory and then select the point of the scene
which will be the new reference point.

Draw a path with the tool


The “Line drawing” tools palette allows you
to draw a path with the tool.
Amapi Pro will display the copies just after the drawing validation.

396 Reference Manual


25.1.2 Additional information
The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool keeps the DG properties of the current object
and transmits them to the generated objects (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

The copies are automatically grouped. They can be ungrouped with the tool “Ungroup” in the
control panel (see details on page 186).

The orientation of the object on a support facet depends on the orientation of the normal of
this support facet (See “Information” tool, section “Functions” (see details on page 189)).

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are
available:
• “From the graphic workspace”
• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.
In this case, set the cursor positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a number.
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Amapi ProT M 397


25.2 Symmetry
Use the “Symmetry” tool to create a mirror image of the current selection (See “The
concept of selection” on page 147).

Do the operation following one of the proposed options. toggle from one to the other by
using both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys or by clicking on the corresponding icon.

25.2.1 Symmetry from an orthogonal plane


This option creates a mirror image from an
orthogonal plane on which the faces of the
bounding box are oriented.
To do it, click on the desired face.
Release the tool or press the “Enter” key to validate
the operation and release the tool.

25.2.2 From an orthogonal plane passing by a point


to be selected
This option creates a mirror image from an orthogonal plane passing by a point to be
selected by the user.
Press the “Space-Bar” to toggle between Horizontal / Vertical plane.

Validate the operation by pressing the “Enter” key or by releasing the tool.

398 Reference Manual


25.2.3 Clone the generated objects
The “Symmetry” tool can clone the objects it generates. (See “The clones” on
page 107).

25.2.4 Additional information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool keeps the DG properties of the current object
and transmits them to the generated objects (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

The copies are automatically grouped. They can be ungrouped with the tool “Ungroup” (see
details on page 186) in the control panel.

The cursor is movement is done on the orthogonal plane which orientation is the most
perpendicular to the eye - target point axis (See “Viewpoint” on page 137)
When setting a point in the three dimensions, the mouse movement modifies only 2 out of 3
displayed values (x, y and z).
There are two possibilities to change the third value:
• Change the viewpoint (See “The Navigation” on page 135))
• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

In the steps where the Position must be set, several methods are available:
• “From the graphic workspace”: “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162)
In this case, set the cursor positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).
• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Amapi ProT M 399


25.3 Close
The “Close” tool allows you to close the current selection such as a curve or an
opened surface (See “Open / closed objects” on page 94).
The interface is slightly different depending on the current object type:

• “Close a polygonal surface” (see details on page 400)

• “Edit the polylines closings” (see details on page 400)

• “Edit the joint and opening of a grid-structure object” (see details on page 401)

25.3.1 Close a polygonal surface


Amapi Pro highlights (in white) the Click
openings that can be closed. Click on
these openings then release the tool or
press the “Enter” key.

Polygonal object Polygonal object


before closing after closing

This kind of closure is not editable.

25.3.2 Edit the polylines closings


Amapi Pro can edit the opening/closing segment of a curve.
• The open segment is highlighted in white.
• The closed segment is highlighted in red.
Switch from one state to the other by clicking on it, then release the tool or press the “Enter”
key.
This kind of closure is editable, that is to say that a curve closed with the “Close” tool can be
opened again.

400 Reference Manual


25.3.3 Edit the joint and opening of a grid-structure
object
Amapi Pro can edit the joints and the openings of a “Grid structure” (see details on
page 484) object.

A “Grid structure” object may or may not be closed in U and/or in V:

Grid structure Grid structure Grid structure Grid structure


not closed closed in U closed in V closed in U and in V
(Cylinder) (Torus)

• It is possible to close the upper and/or lower openings of a grid structured object joined
in U only.
• It is possible to close the left and/or right side(s) openings of a grid structured object
joined in V only.

Grid structure Grid structure


joined in U joined in V
and closed and closed

• The open joint is highlighted with a thin white line.


• The closed joint is highlighted with a thin red line.
• An opening is highlighted with a thick white line.
• A closure is highlighted with a thick red line.

Switch from one state to the other (open/close) by clicking on it then release the tool or press
the “Enter” key.

This kind of closure is editable.

Amapi ProT M 401


25.3.4 Additional information
It is possible to click on the “Apply to all” accessory, to generate automatically all the
facet closures corresponding to the highlighted openings. This accessory shortcut is the
“A” key.

This tool is different from the tool “Extract Facets” with the option “Automatic creation of
facet closures” (see details on page 304).
• The “Extract Facets” tool creates a new object closure.
• The “Close” tool closes the current object.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool is an editor-tool which can edit the first DG
level. The editor-tools carry out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at higher
levels. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

402 Reference Manual


25.4 Weld
The “Weld” tool has several options to weld objects or points. If these options
generate overlapping points, Amapi Pro keeps only one of them (other points are
deleted). Refer to the description below to understand how to use these options.

25.4.1 The options


Proposed
options

Weld objects Weld points onto Weld points close


an object to each other

Option Replaces the selected objects by only Move the selected Move the closest
description one which is the sum of both. points toward the points toward their
There is no visible transformation geometric center of geometric center.
displayed. But the difference is the selection. The + and - keys
fundamental when a modeling operation The “One by one” allow you to quickly
is made (see illustration below). selection accessory tune the distance at
The “One by one” selection accessory is is the default option. which the two points
the default option. Other accessories Another accessory are considered to be
can be used (see details on page 150). can be selected (see close.
details on page 150).

Illustration Lasso

Model made from Object made from


several not welded several welded
objects objects
Before welding Before welding

Scaling of the tray Scaling of the points


object. corresponding to the
In this case, only the tray
tray is deformed The entire object is
deformed After welding After welding

Editable •Distance:
parameter distance at which
two points are
considered to be
close.

Amapi ProT M 403


25.4.2 Weld points of distant objects
Special case: successively using the “Weld points onto an object” and “Weld points close to
each other” options.

This sphere and cube are welded Welding points belong to the Result obtained after welding.
to make only one object. object.

25.4.3 Point selection when using weld points


It will be sometimes necessary to weld several groups of points between each other in the
same operation without leaving the tool. To do this in the weld points mode, it is necessary
to quickly change the reference point.
The reference point is the point displayed in red after the first operation of selection or weld-
ing. All the clicked points are then welded to the reference point. To disable this, just click
on it. It is then possible to select any other point which will then become the reference point.

25.4.4 Weld NURBS objects


Welding two NURBS surfaces creates a different object depending on the type of surface
and their relative position.
If two surfaces have edges which are close or adjacent, they are welded onto only one sur-
face by connecting their closest edges.
In all the other cases, Amapi Pro creates a dynamic geometry containing a BREP linking the
faces to be welded.

404 Reference Manual


25.4.5 Additional information
It is not possible to:
• Weld closed curves (See “Open / closed objects” on page 94).
• Weld open curves if they don’t have a common end (See “Open / closed objects” on page 94).
• Weld the points close to each other of grouped objects (See “Group, Ungroup” on page 186).

The “Weld” tool with “Weld objects” option must be distinguished from the “Group” tool
(see details on page 186).
• A group of objects:
• can have a hierarchy (sub-group notion)
• keeps all the points of each object.
• can be ungrouped at anytime with the Ungroup tool
• is recognized thanks to its entire bounding box.
• An object made from welded objects:
• doesn’t have overlapped points just after welding.
• cannot be ungrouped (but with Crtl-Z).
• is recognized thanks to its partial bounding box.

The “Weld” tool with “Weld points close to each other” option must be distinguished from
the “Decimate” tool (see details on page 420) which reduces the complexity of a surface
selection with respect to the general shape of the original object.

It is possible to click on the “Apply to all” accessory. This carries out the operation on all
the displayed entities, then automatically quits the tool.
This accessory shortcut is the “A” key.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool has a different behavior depending on the
desired option.
• The “Weld points onto an object” and “Weld points close to each other” options are able to edit the
first DG level. They carry out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at higher
levels.
• The “Weld objects” option add or insert a DG level labeled Weld Objects
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

Amapi ProT M 405


25.5 Snap/Align
The “Snap/Align” tool is used to apply a translation to the current selection along a
vector, the ends of which are to be defined by the user (See “The concept of
selection” on page 147).

25.5.1 Use
The user will select in the following order:

• The starting point of the translation vector.


• The ending point of the translation vector.
It can either be:
• selected in the scene.
• defined by entering its coordinates in the parameter palette.
(See “Editing the parameters” on page 162).

A movement constraint can be applied to the translation (See “Align” on page 406).

After each translation, Amapi Pro will suggest a new translation. To validate the operation,
press the “Enter” key or release the tool.

25.5.2 Align
The Horizontal / Vertical constraints options allows you to proceed to precise alignments.
Press on the “Space-Bar” to toggle between Horizontal / Vertical.

Translation Translation with horizontal Translation with vertical


without constraint constraint constraint

Legend: Current Translation Moved


selection vector selection

406 Reference Manual


25.5.3 Some illustrated examples
Current
selection This example shows the
most frequent use of the
Translation “Snap/Align” tool.
vector The goal is to move a
selected object to snap one
Moved of its points on another point
selection of the scene.

Current
selection
Translation
vector
Moved
selection

Current
selection
Translation
vector
Moved
selection

Current
selection
Translation
vector
Moved
selection

25.5.4 Additional information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):
This tool is an editor-tool able to edit:
• The first DG level by carrying out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at
higher levels.
• A shape located at any DG level. In this case, the tool will not work on the current selection but on the
entire shape.
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

Amapi ProT M 407


25.6 Lay on
This tool is used to lay a facet of a selected object (See “The concept of selection” on
page 147) onto a facet of another object (center on center).
First select the facet to be laid onto (from the current object), then select a facet of another
object of the scene.
Amapi Pro proposes by default to lay the lower face of the bounding box onto the current
object. The user will be able to indicate another facet to be laid onto before indicating the
receiving facet belonging to another object of the scene.
Click

Click
1- The deep dish is the current 2- Then click on the internal
object. Click on the external side bottom face of the flat dish.
of the bottom face of the deep
dish.

3- The deep dish is laid onto the


flat dish.

Two options allow you to toggle the direction of the action (normal direction / normal
reverse direction). Click on the icon showing the desired option or press the “Space-Bar” to
toggle from one option to the other.

Normal direction Normal reverse direction

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): this tool can work at any DG level. The effects will be
reflected at higher levels
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

408 Reference Manual


25.7 Unfold
Use the “Unfold” tool to create a 2D unfolded flat version of a 3D model.

3D model 2D flat unfolded


with its cutting edges model

The model to be unfolded must be the current object.


By default, Amapi Pro selects the edges which will be the cutting edges and the starting
facet.
In some cases, there will be a specific need which doesn’t match the default options.
However, Amapi Pro allows you to:
• “Select the cutting edges” (see details on page 410).
• “Select the starting facet” (see details on page 411).
Once these (optional) setting(s) are made, the unfolding can be done (see details on
page 412).

Amapi ProT M 409


25.7.1 Select the cutting edges

25.7.1.1 Specific edges for the cutting edges


The user has the possibility to select the individual edges along which the object will
be cut. The selection can be made “one by one” or with the “lasso” (See “The
selection methods” on page 150). To toggle from one selection mode to the other, click on
the right mouse button.
If there are not enough edges selected to unfold the shape correctly, Amapi Pro will
automatically select additional edges.

2D flat unfolded model


with default cutting edges

2D flat unfolded model


with custom cutting edges

410 Reference Manual


25.7.1.2 Deselecting edges
By clicking on this icon, all the edges selected as cutting edges will be deselected.

25.7.2 Select the starting facet


By default, Amapi Pro selects a starting facet to unfold the object.
However, the user can select a facet as the unfolding starting facet. To do so, click on
the icon to select the starting facet.

2D flat unfolded model


with default starting facet

Amapi ProT M 411


2D flat unfolded model
with custom starting facet

25.7.3 Unfold
Before starting the unfolding operation, the cutting edges (see details on page 410) or
the starting facet (see details on page 411) might have been selected.
If not, Amapi Pro will select the cutting edges and the starting facet on its own.
The unfolding operation starts when the user clicks on the icon. The current object
remains intact, the unfolded version is displayed on the horizontal plane.

25.7.4 Additional Information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates a new object with only one DG level
labeled as Polygonal volume (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

412 Reference Manual


25.8 Wrap
The “Wrap” tool allows you to deform an object by mapping it onto a surface (grid,
cylinder or sphere). It is possible to control the dimensions of the shape and other
parameters such as the altitude, the width and the threshold.

25.8.1 Options
Click on the desired option or press on both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from
one to the other.

On a grid On a Cylinder On a Sphere

Illustration

Editable •Width (shape) •Height (shape)


parameters •Height (shape) •Diameter (shape) •Diameter (shape)
•Altitude (maxi)* •Altitude (maxi)* •Altitude (maxi)*

•Threshold •Threshold •Threshold


(see details on page 414) (see details on page 414) (see details on page 414)
•u0 •u0 •u0
•u1 Spread •u1 Spread •u1 Spread
(see details on (see details on (see details on
•v0 page 414) •v0 page 414) •v0 page 414)
•v1 •v1 •v1
•v1 •v1 •v1

Accessories •Threshold •Threshold •Threshold


(see details on page 414) (see details on page 414) (see details on page 414)

*The altitude is the distance between a point of the object and the mapped shape. The points located
onto the shape are considered to be at an altitude of zero and the most distant points are at a maximum
altitude. One can say that the maximum altitude corresponds to the thickness of the object.

Amapi ProT M 413


25.8.2 Spread management
By default, Amapi Pro maps the object on the entire surface of the shape (maximum
spreading). To tune the spreading, press the “+” or “-” key or enter the projection
coordinates - (u0,u1) and (v0,v1) - in the parameter palette.

Projection on a sphere with a decreasing spreading

25.8.3 The Threshold accessory


Once the projection is made, the altitude (facet-shape distance) can be set with the
“threshold” tool to define a distance under which the facets will be deleted. This
threshold is defined as a percentage of the maximum altitude. To tune the threshold, press
the “+” or “-” keys or enter a value in the parameter palette.

Projection on a grid with an increasing threshold

25.8.4 Additional information


The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled as Projection
(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

At all the steps where values, such as “set size” or “set number”, must be set. Two methods
can be set:
• “From the graphic workspace” with the “+” or “-” keys for the “Spread” parameters.
• By entering a value in the Parameter palette (see details on page 163) for the other parameters

414 Reference Manual


25.9 Measurements
Use the Measurements tool to display the dimensions of an object.
Amapi Pro allows you to display three types of dimensions: length, angle and
volume/surface/circumference (see details on page 416).

The dimensions are displayed only when the “Measurements” tool is in use. However, the
dimensions are automatically updated as soon as the object is modified.
If the object topology changes, Amapi Pro will not be able to keep this dimension and will delete
all the measures.

16 cm Volume: 4095.68 cm3


Area: 1555.72 cm2

12.20 cm
87.5 °

21.70 cm

The measurements are saved with the object.

The measurements can be printed or not from the printing preferences “Preferences” (See
“Printing preferences” on page 474).

Amapi ProT M 415


25.9.1 The measurement tools
There are several measurement tools which can be selected by clicking on their
corresponding icon, or use both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys keyboard shortcut.

“Distance” (see details on page 416)

“Angle” (see details on page 417)

“Circumference/ Volume / Surface” (see details on page 418)

25.9.1.1 Distance
The “Distance” tool measures the distance between two points. They can be selected
by a simple click.
Amapi Pro proposes three distance measurement modes between two points:
• the absolute distance measurement between these two points,
• the distance measurement between the points projection on the horizontal axis,
• the distance measurement between the points projection on the vertical axis.
A shortcut can be used to toggle from one mode to another, either by using the switching
axis icons located in the “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206), or by pressing the
“Space-Bar”.

Absolute Distance Horizontal Projection Vertical Projection


(default mode)

Absolute distance measurement Distance measurement between Distance measurement between


between two points. the points’ projection on the the points’ projection on the
horizontal axis vertical axis

Once the measurement is made, move the cursor to position the dimension and click on the
mouse button.
It is possible to move a dimension by using the “repositioning the dimension” (see details on
page 418) accessory.
It is possible to delete a dimension by using the “Deleting a dimension” (see details on
page 418) accessory.

416 Reference Manual


25.9.1.2 Angle
Use the “Angle” tool to measure the angle made by two adjacent edges by selecting
their extremities. They are selected by simple clicks:
• 1s t click: on the end of a segment of the angle
• 2n d click: on the vertex of the angle
• 3r d click: on the end of the other segment of the angle

The Amapi Pro default display is the inner angle, but the outer angle can also be selected. A
shortcut can be used to toggle from one mode to another, either by using the switching axis
icons located in the “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206); or by pressing the
“Space-Bar”.

Inner Angle (default mode) Outer Angle

1s t click
225°
2n d click
135°

3r d click

Once the measurement is made, move the cursor to position the dimension and click the
mouse button.

It is possible to move a dimension by using the “repositioning the dimension” (see details on
page 418) accessory.
It is possible to delete a dimension by using the “Deleting a dimension” (see details on
page 418) accessory.

Amapi ProT M 417


25.9.1.3 Circumference/ Volume / Surface
To display this information, just click on the object. The kind of information
displayed depends on the selected object (See “The Types of objects” on page 91):

If the object is… Amapi Pro displays…

A closed volume • A volume


• An area

A surface (open volume) • An area


• A circumference (the perimeter)

An open or closed curve • A circumference (a length).

Once the measurement is made, move the cursor to position the dimension and click on the
mouse button.

It is possible to move a dimension by using the “repositioning the dimension” (see details on
page 418) accessory.
It is possible to delete a dimension by using the “Deleting a dimension” (see details on
page 418) accessory.

25.9.2 The dimensions-manipulating accessories

25.9.2.1 repositioning the dimension


It is possible to move a displayed dimension by clicking on this icon.
Just click on the dimension to be repositioned before moving the cursor. The
dimension will follow the cursor. Then click to set the new location of the dimension.

25.9.2.2 Deleting a dimension


One or several dimensions can be deleted by clicking on this icon. Then, just click on
the dimension to be deleted.

25.9.2.3 Deleting all the dimensions


All of the displayed dimensions can be deleted by clicking on this icon.

418 Reference Manual


25.9.3 Additional information
It is not possible to compute the volume of a NURBS surface.
However, it is possible to transform it temporarily into a polygonal object to allow the computing
of its volume.
(See “Transform a Polyhedral model into a NURBS model /a NURBS model into a Polygonal
model” on page 105).

Amapi ProT M 419


25.10 Decimate
This tool allows you to reduce the complexity of an object (See “The concept of
selection” on page 147). It uses a polygon simplifier which operates on polygonal
objects only.

Amapi Pro computes and displays the surface as a mesh made up of triangular facets.
The “Decimate range” parameter represents the percentage of remaining polygons from the
initial model. A range of 0.3 means that the simplified model will contain 30% of the
original number of polygons.

Object before decimating

Percentage = 90% Percentage = 50% Percentage = 20%

Object with a decreasing percentage of decimation

About Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool collapses the DG of the object (See “Dynamic
Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

There are two methods to tune the parameters:


• “From the graphic workspace”, with the “+” or “-” keys.
• By entering a value in the Parameter palette (see details on page 163).

Because it uses a polygon simplifier, this tool works on polygonal surfaces only (See “Polygonal
or NURBS Models” on page 96).

420 Reference Manual


Rendering Room
“Rendering” is the operation consisting in computing and displaying the scene. To do
so, it uses software algorithms to simulate lighting and realistic materials. The image
thus obtained can be saved as a file.

The Rendering room is divided into specialized zones, that will allow you to work on:

• “Materials”: allows you to set and apply materials on objects (see details on page 453).

• “Lighting”: allows you to locate and set light sources (see details on page 461).

• “Rendering parameters”: allows you to set the parameters for rendering (see details on
page 465).

In rendering mode, the central graphic workspace will show the interactive preview of the
scene. You will appreciate the effect of a lighting or the way a material interacts on its
environment while setting it up.
A series of icons allows you to launch a preview or a rendering before saving an image. (See
“Previewing and rendering” on page 451).

To use the “Rendering” room, click on the icon: .

422 Reference Manual


Amapi ProT M 423
424 Reference Manual
26
Previewing and rendering

A large graphic workspace is


reserved for the interactive
preview of the scene, in
rendering mode. This allows
you to appreciate the effect of a
lighting or of a material into its
environment while setting it
and before saving it.

When the user launches a


rendering display, Amapi Pro
computes and displays the
scene, by using software
algorithms depending on

• The object’s topology as


defined in the Modeling room (See “Modeling room” on page 237).

• The material applied to each object (See “Material editor” on page 432).
Amapi Pro applies a default material to the objects, if not specified.

• The current lighting (See “Lighting” on page 435).

• The viewpoint (See “Viewpoint” on page 137).

Amapi ProT M 425


26.1 The rendering commands
When clicking on the “Render the scene” icon, the final rendering computation is
launched, including all parameters.
This button allows you to Save the image in a file. Select the output format (PICT,
BMP, PNG, JPEG, GIF or TIFF), the file name and the destination folder.
At any time, a new preview display can be launched by clicking on this icon.

26.2 Additional functions


The user can navigate in the scene to view it from any viewpoint, by using the keyboard
shortcuts (See “The keyboard navigation” on page 142).
An “Edge smoothing” slider allows you to specify the break angle between two adjacent
facets.
A null value generates flat rendering, a 180° angle value smooths all edges.
This icon allows you to toggle between Perspective and Orthographic display (see
details on page 176).

Amapi Pro allows you to work in simple-view or in multi-view mode (see details on
page 178)
The Control panel displays the icon corresponding to the current display mode.
Click on it to display the list of the possible configurations. Then, click on the icon
showing the desired display mode.(See “The display modes” on page 180).
The “Move” tool (see details on page 242) allows you to move the objects or the
light sources (see details on page 438).
The “Rotate” tool (see details on page 244) allows you to rotate the objects or the
light sources (see details on page 438).
Use the “Hide” tool to make some objects of the scene invisible and the “Show” tool
to make them visible again (see details on page 184).

The “Isolate” tool allows you to work with the current selection without having the
surrounding objects displayed (see details on page 185).

426 Reference Manual


27
Materials

The “Material” editor allows you to make the scene more realistic by giving a "material"
appearance to the surface of objects.
A material defines the appearance of the surface with a simulated material.
A large graphic workspace is used for the interactive preview of the scene in rendering
mode. This allows you to appreciate the effect of lighting or the way a material interacts on
its environment while setting it up (See “Previewing and rendering” on page 425).
The editor is divided into two zones:

• “Material catalog” (see details on page 428)


Amapi Pro contains a library of existing materials, arranged by theme: Wood, Stones,
Metals... You can choose the one that will be the most appropriate for the current
selection.
Just “Drag and Drop” a thumbnail to the graphic workspace in order to apply the desired
material to the current selection.
In this way, you can also save a material you have just set up so that you can use it later.

• “Material editor” (see details on page 432)


The editor allows the user to change or tune a new material.

Amapi ProT M 427


27.1 Material catalog
The material catalog is the management system for materials.
You will find it at the top of the Rendering room. It looks and works just like “The Catalog”
file management system (see details on page 443).
Amapi Pro contains a library of existing materials (“.ash” suffix), arranged by themes:
Wood, Stones, Metals... Each material-file is displayed in a thumbnail showing the material
and its name.
Choose the most appropriate one.
Drag the thumbnail corresponding to the desired material toward the current object.
The inverse operation is applied in order to save a material you have set to be reused later:
just click on an “empty” cell in the catalog.
You can change the file order in the catalog, regardless of their order in the directory. Your
custom organization is then automatically saved for later.

Current file Trash


thumbnail.

Page Favorites directory Current directory


scrolling

Open a directory

428 Reference Manual


27.1.1 Open a directory
Click on the icon “Open a directory” (of the catalog) to open a dialog box in which
you can select the directory you need. Amapi Pro displays the contents of the
directory in the catalog. It becomes the current directory, and its path is displayed near the
icon.
Each material-file is displayed by a thumbnail showing the material and its name.

You can also open a favorites directory (See “Managing the favorites directory” on page 431).

27.1.2 Browsing the pages of the catalog


The display of the thumbnails as well as files is done page per
page. Scrolling through the pages replaces the thumbnails of
the current page by the thumbnails of the next or the previous page. To change the page:
1) Use the “Page up”, “Page down” keys of the keyboard.
2) Enter a page number: a counter shows the current page number. Click on it to enter the
page number to be displayed. Press “Enter” to validate and view this page.
3) Use the page scrolling buttons: click on the right arrow to increment the page number.
Click on the left arrow to decrement.

27.1.3 Deleting a file from the catalog


Use the “Trash” icon to delete files from the catalog. Use the "Drag and Drop"
method to delete:
1) Click and hold the thumbnail corresponding to the file to be deleted.
2) Move the thumbnail onto the “Trash” icon .
Release the mouse button.
The location of the thumbnail is now empty.

This operation erases the file on the hard disk, it cannot be undone.

Amapi ProT M 429


27.1.4 Applying a material
You probably found the material you need while browsing through the catalog. Drag the
thumbnail corresponding to the desired material onto the current object.

27.1.5 Saving a new material in the catalog


You can save a material you have just set in the current directory, to use later.
Proceed as follows:
1) The current object must have the material on it to be saved applied on itself (See “The
concept of selection” on page 147).
2) Scroll around the catalog’s pages to find an “empty” cell (See “Browsing the pages of
the catalog” on page 429).
3) Click on the empty cell.
4) Amapi Pro records the material in the directory corresponding to the catalog. A
thumbnail showing the material appears in the cell: it also becomes the current material.

There is no reason to record a material in the catalog if you don’t plan on using it later.

27.1.6 Organizing the catalog


The file organization in the catalog is saved regardless of the way it is organized in the
system directory. A custom organization will be automatically saved in the directory as a list
named “catalog.lst”. To do this, use the "Drag and Drop" method:
1) Click and hold the thumbnail corresponding to the file to be moved.
2) Move the cursor toward an empty cell, or scroll the catalog’s pages until you find an
empty cell (See “Browsing the pages of the catalog” on page 429).
3) Release the mouse button.
If by mistake the “catalog.lst” file has been deleted; it will be automatically rebuilt, but the
customized filing will be lost.

The former versions of Amapi Pro, saved this list in a file named “CAT.LIST”; if it exists, it will not
be deleted but not updated either. Only “catalog.lst”will be updated.

430 Reference Manual


27.1.7 Managing the favorites directory
Some slots are available to store the path of favorites
directory. Each location is pointed at by an icon
showing if the space is free or not. These icons can be used to save the favorites directory.
Each icon can have two states:
Free location
Filled location
When the cursor is slid onto one of these icons, a tooltip indicates the corresponding
favorites directory.

Adding a favorite
It is possible to record the current directory as a favorite.
Open the directory to save it as favorite (See “Open a directory” on page 429) then click on
one of the free icons ( ). It will then be displayed as a filled space ( ).

Opening a favorite
A tooltip will indicate the corresponding favorites directory when sliding the cursor over the
icon. Open the directory with a simple click on the corresponding icon. Amapi Pro will
display the directory content in the catalog.

Deleting a favorite
To delete a favorite from the list, you will use the "Drag and Drop" method:
1) Click on and hold the thumbnail corresponding to the favorite to be deleted .

2) Move the thumbnail toward the “Trash” .


3) Release the mouse button.
The location is now free .

Amapi ProT M 431


27.2 Material editor
A material is defined by a specific set of parameters including:
the ambient color, the diffuse color, the shininess, the
transparency, the reflection and the refraction. The material editor
allows you to set the different parameters defining the material
that you will use to edit the current material object.

27.2.1 The editable material

27.2.1.1 Selected object / editable material


The material editor is used to edit the current material-object.
A thumbnail displays the selected object, followed by the name
of the object.
The material applied to the object is the editable material. Its
name is displayed in an editable area.
The material editor proposes refining the current material
parameters.

To edit a material, the user must select an object on which the


material to edit is applied.

The object selection is done by clicking in the graphic workspace


or by selecting an object’s name in the objects list.

27.2.1.2 Creating a new material


The “New” button creates a new material, which is a copy of the
current material. This new material becomes the editable material.

27.2.1.3 Delete a material


The “Delete” button deletes the current material. Amapi Pro will assign a default material to
the current object. This new material becomes the editable material.

432 Reference Manual


27.2.2 Editing

27.2.2.1 Ambient color


The ambient color is the color of the object in the darkness (in complete darkness, only the
ambient light is used. If the ambient parameter is set to none, the object is not visible). The
setting can be made either by clicking in the sampling circle, or using the slider or in the
editable area (See “Preferences” on page 451).

27.2.2.2 Diffuse color


The diffuse color is the color that the object reflects when lit by direct light (daylight or
artificial light). This color is mixed with the ambient color. The setting can be made either
by clicking on the sampling circle, or by using the slider in the dialog box (See
“Preferences” on page 451).

27.2.2.3 Shininess
The shininess is the capacity of an object to reflect the light. The shininess is defined by the
color, the intensity and the size of the halo of the reflected light.
For instance, a polished surface has a small and intense reflection, even though a matte
surface has a large and weak reflection.

The Specular (Intensity and Color)


The specular sets the color and the intensity of the reflection of an object. The setting can be
made either by clicking on the sampling circle, or by using the slider or in the editable area
(See “Preferences” on page 451).

The Spread (Shininess)


The spread sets the size of the reflection. The setting can be made by using the slider or in
the editable area.

The Falloff (Eccentricity)


The falloff defines how the reflection is diffused along the surface of the object. The setting
can be made by using the slider or in the editable area.

Amapi ProT M 433


The Filter
The filter controls the influence of the color of the lighting on the color of the reflection
(tuned by the specular). If the filter is set to the minimum, the reflective color is the same as
the light color. Conversely, if the filter is set to the maximum the lighting has no influence
(the reflection has the color defined by the specular).
The setting can be made by using the slider or in the editable area.

27.2.2.4 Reflection
The surfaces can reflect surrounding colors. The reflection defines the ratio between the
reflected lighting and the incident lighting (when lighting a surface). The setting can be
made by using the slider or in the editable area (See “Preferences” on page 451).
It is time-consuming to compute reflections because ray-tracing is used in the
computation.

27.2.2.5 Transparency
Transparency is the ability of a material to let light shine through it. The more transparent a
surface is, the more the light that shines through it. A black color indicates that a material is
not transparent, while a white color indicates that a material is completely transparent.
The setting can be made by using the slider or in the editable area (See “Preferences” on
page 451).

27.2.2.6 Refraction
The propagation of a light beam through a translucent or transparent material is determined
by refraction. Light beams will be sent to a greater or lesser extent depending on the material
they go through, as each material has a different refractive index.
The setting can be made by using the slider or in the editable area (See “Preferences” on
page 451).
Note that these settings take effect only if the material contains transparency settings.
It is time-consuming to compute refractions because ray-tracing is used in the
computation.

27.2.2.7 Density
This parameter sets the number and the size of the patterns of a textured material.
For instance: as you increase the size parameter of a tiling texture applied to the floor of a
room, you will see the size of the tiles decrease and their number increase. The setting can
be made by using the slider or in the editable area.

434 Reference Manual


28
Lighting

Lighting is the propagation of rays of light originating from a


natural or artificial light source. There are three types of light
sources: “Sun”, “Bulb” or “Spot”. Light source tools are
grouped in the Rendering editor room.

The preview window allows you to see a real-time preview of


your settings.
The “Move” and “Rotate” tools allow you to set the position
of each light source.
(See “Previewing and rendering” on page 425).

Amapi ProT M 435


28.1 The different light sources
28.1.1 Sun
The sun produces a light diffused uniformly onto the entire scene.
You can define its color and have it produce a solid drop shadow if you wish (See “Set a
light source” on page 437).

28.1.2 Bulb
The bulb is a directional light. You can specify its orientation, the area where you want a
dim light or the color of the diffused light.
You can have the light produce a solid drop shadow if you wish (See “Set a light source” on
page 437).

28.1.3 Spot
The spot is a specific source of lighting which sends a direct light beam. You can specify the
beam direction, light cut-off and fall-off, the area where you want a dim light, and its color.
You can have the light produce a solid drop shadow if you wish (See “Set a light source” on
page 437).

28.2 Create a light source


To create a light source, do the following:
1) Click on the button corresponding to the desired type of light (“Sun”, “Bulb” or “Spot”).
2) The light source follows the cursor movement. Move it toward the graphic workspace.
3) Set the light position in the desired place in the scene. Amapi Pro gives it a name. It
becomes the current light.
Now, you can set the different settings (See “Set a light source” on page 437).

436 Reference Manual


28.3 Select a light source
To select a light source, do the following:
• click on it in the graphic workspace
• select its name in the list of lights.
Amapi Pro displays the selected light source in a text area.

28.4 Set a light source


Depending on the light source you choose, you can perform several settings:

“Sun” “Bulb” “Spot”

Diffuse color x x x

Shadow x x x

beam radius x

attenuation x x

Repositioning x x x

orientation x x

The light source to be set must be the current light source (See “Select a light source” on
page 437).

28.4.1 Diffuse color


The setting can be made either by clicking in the sampling circle, or using the slider and/or
an editable area (See “Preferences” on page 451).

28.4.2 Shadow
You can determine whether or not the light produces a solid drop shadow on the lit objects.

Amapi ProT M 437


28.4.3 Cut-off
The “Spot” cut-off controls the angle of the light beam.
The setting can be made by using the slider and/or an editable area.

28.4.4 Attenuation (dimming)


The attenuation defines the light reduction of propagation area for a “Bulb” or a “Spot”.
This distance can be set by using the slider and/or an editable area.

28.4.5 Repositioning
The “Move” tool, located at the bottom of the graphic workspace, allows you to
reposition the light source.

28.4.6 Orientation
The “Stretch” tool, located at the bottom of the graphic workspace, allows you to
change the “Sun”, “Bulb” or “Spot” orientation.

28.5 Delete a light source


To delete a light source, do the following:
1) Select the light source to be deleted (See “Select a light source” on page 437).
2) Click on the “Delete” button.

438 Reference Manual


29
Rendering parameters

The user can set some parameters for the final rendering:

29.1 Anti-aliasing
This function to keep the object's colored outlines from being
“jagged”
Select the Anti-aliasing level (between 0 and 3).
Use of Anti-aliasing will increase the rendering time.

29.2 Shadows
Check this box to compute and the display the shadows (See
“Shadow” on page 437).

29.3 Background

Background color
The background color setting can be made either by clicking in the sampling circle, or by
using the slider and/or an editable area (See their using mode on page 451).

Amapi ProT M 439


Background image
Check the “Background image” box if you want to display a background image in the
rendered image. Clicking on the “Browse” button will open the dialog box where you can
select the desired background image.
Invisible in the modeling room, this image is displayed together with the final rendering.

29.4 Environment
Check this box if you want to add an environment image to be reflected on an object in the
scene.
Clicking on the “Browse” button will open the dialog box where you can select the desired
background image.
Invisible in the modeling room, this image is displayed with the final rendering.

29.5 Fog
A slider allows you to set a coefficient which will define the density of the fog.

29.6 Image format


Allows you to set the image size in pixels.

440 Reference Manual


Catalog room
30
The Catalog

The catalog is the Amapi Pro’s file manager.


Using a graphical representation, it quickly and easily allows the user to store and
retrieve Amapi Pro documents like in a library.

Each file can be previewed thanks to its associated thumbnail image which shows the model
and its name. A model in the catalog can be loaded in the current scene by pointing out its
thumbnail image. Conversely, you will be able to save the current scene in the catalog.

The file organization in the catalog is saved independently of the way it is organized in the
system directory. Files can thus be organized in a logical manner and automatically keep
their layout.

The catalog allows import/export operations.


The catalog makes it possible to manage all Amapi Pro format files with the.a3p suffix. It
also makes it possible to visualize and open Amapi Designer a3d format files. However, the
files will be always saved with the Amapi Pro format. To export to the Amapi Designer for-
mat, it will be necessary to use the export menu.

In most cases, using the catalog is more efficient than using the system file manager.

The catalog will be opened by clicking on this icon at the top right corner of the screen.

Amapi ProT M 443


Current
file
thumbnail

Trash

Pages Open a
scrolling directory
Rebuild the
Current file catalog
information
in the Import
directory
Export

favorites directory Current directory

30.1 Open a directory


Select a directory to use it as the current directory. Amapi Pro will display the
desired directory content in the catalog. The path is displayed near the icon.
A preview of each Amapi Pro file is displayed in the Thumbnails.
A directory can also be opened from the favorites directory (See “Managing the favorites
directory” on page 447).

30.2 Browsing the pages of the catalog


The display of the thumbnails associated with the files is
done page per page. Doing a page scrolling replaces the
thumbnails of the current page by the thumbnails of the next or the previous page. To change
the page:
1) Use the “Page up”, “Page down” keys of the keyboard.

444 Reference Manual


2) Enter a page number: a counter shows the current page number. Click on it to enter the
page number to be displayed. Press Enter to validate and see this page.
3) Use the page scrolling buttons: Click on the right arrow to increment the page number.
Click on the left arrow to decrement.

30.3 Edit the information of a file


Each thumbnail image is associated with the file’s name. If you click on one of them, the
associated file becomes the current file. Then Amapi Pro displays its name, its size, its
creation date and an associated comment in an editable palette (See “Editing the parameters”
on page 162).
The modification of one of these parameters causes the automatic saving of the file.

30.4 Deleting a file from the catalog


Use the “Trash” icon to delete files from the catalog. The deletion will be done
using the "Drag and Drop" method;
1) Click and hold the thumbnail corresponding to the file to be deleted.
2) Move the cursor toward the “Trash” icon .
3) Release the mouse button.
The location is now empty.

This operation erases the file on the hard disk, it cannot be cancelled.

30.5 Deleting the entire scene


To delete the entire current scene, click on the Trash icon of the catalog. Everything
is deleted, even the hidden objects!

This action can be undone, by Crtl-Z or clicking on the icon.

By deleting the scene, all the objects of the scene will be deleted, even hidden objects.
(See “Hide, Show” on page 184)

Amapi ProT M 445


30.6 Importing a file from the catalog into
the scene
To import a file into the current scene, use the "Drag and Drop" method:
1) Click on and hold the thumbnail corresponding to the scene to be imported.
2) Move the cursor toward the graphic workspace
3) Release the mouse button.
The scene appears in the graphic workspace
The imported scene is merged with the current scene. That is to say that all the objects of the
imported scene are added to the current scene. The imported objects are displayed at the exact
location they were in the original file.

30.7 Saving the scene in the catalog


Saving the current scene in the catalog consists of saving it in the current directory in the
Amapi Pro format. Do the following:
1) Scroll the catalog’s pages to find an “empty” cell. (See “Browsing the pages of the
catalog” on page 444).
2) Click on the empty cell.
3) Amapi Pro records the file in the directory corresponding to the catalog. A thumbnail
showing the scene appears in the cell; it becomes the current file. Modify its information,
such as its name (See “Edit the information of a file” on page 445).

30.8 Organizing the catalog


The file organization in the catalog is saved independently of the way it is organized in the
system directory. A personal organization will be automatically saved in the directory as a
list named “catalog.lst”. To do this, use the "Drag and Drop" method:
1) Click on and hold the thumbnail corresponding to the file to be moved.
2) Move the cursor toward an empty cell.
Or scroll the catalog’s pages until finding an empty cell (See “Browsing the pages of the
catalog” on page 444).
3) Release the mouse button.

446 Reference Manual


If by mistake the “catalog.lst” file have been deleted; it will be automatically rebuilt, but the
personalized filing will be lost.

The former versions of Amapi Pro, saved this list in a file named “CAT.LIST”; if it exists, it will not
be deleted but not updated. Only “catalog.lst”will be updated.

30.9 Managing the favorites directory


Ten slots are available to store the path of favorites
directory. Each location is showed by an icon
showing if the location is free or not. These icons can be used to save the favorites directory.
Each icon can have two states:
Free location
Filled location
When the cursor is over one of this icon, a tooltip will indicate the corresponding favorites
directory.

Adding a favorite
It is possible to record the current directory as a favorite.
Open the directory to save it as favorite (See “Open a directory” on page 444) then click on
one of the free icons ( ). It will be displayed as a filled location ( ).

Opening a favorite
A tooltip will indicate the corresponding favorites directory when putting the cursor over the
icon. Open the directory with a simple click on the corresponding icon. Amapi Pro will
display the directory content in the catalog.

Deleting a favorite
To delete a favorite from the list, you will use the "Drag and Drop" method;
1) Click on and hold the thumbnail corresponding to the favorite to be deleted .

2) Move the cursor toward the “Trash” icon .

Amapi ProT M 447


3) Release the mouse button.
The location is free .

30.10 Rebuilding the catalog


The catalog displays a thumbnail associated with each file of the directory. This
thumbnail is a preview of a scene screenshot which helps you to identify the file. It
is automatically created for each file saving through the catalog with the same name, but
with a “.png” suffix.
If some preview files are missing, click on the rebuild catalog icon to rebuild all the missing
thumbnails.
On PC, the versions older than Amapi Pro v7 saved the thumbnails in a file with a “.2d” suffix;
these files will not be deleted, but they will not be updated. Only, the “.png” files will be updated.
On Mac, the versions older than Amapi Pro v7 saved these thumbnails in a resource of the.a3d
file. Because the more recent Amapi Pro versions are creating “.png” thumbnails, it would be
better to perform a catalog reconstruction at the first opening of each directory.

The catalog reconstruction updates the corresponding “catalog.lst” file which manages the
personalized organization of the catalog.
For more details, see paragraph “Organizing the catalog” (see details on page 446).

30.11 Import
An Import icon is available when the catalog is open. It is similar to the File Import
menu. (See “Import” on page 229).

30.12 Export
An Export icon is available when the catalog is open. It is similar to the File Export
menu (See “Export” on page 231).

448 Reference Manual


Preferences
31
Preferences

31.1 Preferences editor


The preferences editor allows you to customize the interface, the display modes, or some
application behaviors, depending on your needs or preferences.
The “Alt-P” shortcut opens the editor.

The preferences can be displayed as follows:

• Check boxes:
Enabled option
Disabled option

• Sliders:
The setting can be made by moving the slider’s cursor or by entering a value in the data
window on the right-hand side of the slider.

• Color sampling circle:


Click on the color sampling circle to display the color setting palette.

• Editable data window:


Allows you to enter the required information (text or numbers).

Amapi Pro allows you to automatically save or not the preferences.


’“Preferences editor”> “User interface”> “Miscellaneous”> “Automatic saving of preferences” (see
details on page 456).

Amapi ProT M 451


31.1.1 User interface

Generic

Interface themes
Amapi Pro offers several interface themes corresponding to various users’ profiles. The user
will test them and select one which will work best for him.
• Pro (default)
• Default
• Gradient
• Immersive
• Classic with tools palettes
Each theme has its own preference presets which will replace the current values. After
changing theme, it will always be possible to manually set all the preferences through the
preferences editor.

Pro interface theme Classic interface theme

Gradient interface theme Immersive interface theme

452 Reference Manual


Classic with tools palettes interface theme

See the “Ergonomics” (see details on page 13) paragraph to learn more about each of these
interfaces.

Full screen
Full screen display (default): Amapi Pro is displayed on the full screen. The system bar
menus are hidden.
Window display

Language
Amapi Pro is able to communicate in several languages. During its first use, it asks the user
to set the language he or she prefers using. However, it will be possible to change it, by
using the preference editor.
The following languages are available:
• English (default)
• French
• German

Views / Multi-views
The Control panel displays the icon corresponding to the current option. Click on it to
display the list of the possible configurations. Then, click on the icon showing the
desired configuration.

(See “Simple-view / Multi-view” on page 178).

Amapi ProT M 453


Gradient background
Gradient enabled: the background colors in the interface windows are gradient.
Gradient disabled (default): the background colors in the interface windows are flat.

Polygonal/NURBS toggling (default nurbs mode)


Default NURBS mode:
Enabled (default): Amapi Pro creates NURBS objects by default.
Disabled : Amapi Pro creates Polyhedral objects by default.
The construction mode must be defined as the curves, surfaces or volumes drawing
begins.
Amapi Pro has a global default working mode.
The construction mode can be changed while using a tool (local changing mode).
• The local toggle will be made by clicking on the toggle-icon that is displayed as an
option by the tools that allow the two construction modes.
• The global toggle will be made in the preferences editor “Polygonal/NURBS toggling
(default nurbs mode)”. The Crtl-B keyboard shortcut can be used too.
A global toggling while using a tool also makes a local toggling mode.

Palettes display

Buttons to represent the palettes


Enabled: Amapi Pro displays buttons showing the palettes.
Disabled: Amapi Pro does not display buttons representing the palettes.
The “Tools palette” (see details on page 456) interface is especially adapted to 3D modeling
since it simulates the natural movement of the designer in front of his table or the model
maker in front of his workbench.
Amapi Pro will display only one tools palette at a time, placing at your disposal only that
group of tools which are useful. The “basic toolkit” is be permanently displayed.
You have two methods to switch from one tools palette to the other:
• by simply “sweeping” the cursor from the right hand side of the screen out of the graphic
window and then by bringing it back towards the center of the screen.
• by clicking on one of the number sequences of the tools palette (if you chose to display
buttons representing the tools palettes).
“Construction Palette”
“Modeling palette”
“Assembly palette”

454 Reference Manual


Optional palettes display support area
The optional palettes display support area can be hidden to make them floating.
“Manage the optional palettes display” (see details on page 168).
Information panel enabled (default): displays optional palettes.
Information panel disabled: optional palettes are floating.

Control panel display


The Control panel is displayed at the bottom of the screen. It gives access to a variety of
modeling aids for a better use of Amapi Pro (See “The Control panel” on page 167).
Some of them can be accessible from keyboard shortcuts.
The Control panel can be hidden to make more room for the graphic workspace.
Show the Control panel (default).
Hide the Control panel

Tools options and accessories display support area


Amapi Pro displays the tools options and accessories into a reserved area located above the
graphic workspace (See “The tools options and accessories” on page 83).
But they can be displayed as a floating palette to make more room for the graphic
workspace.
Enables the options and accessories area (default).
Floating options and accessories palettes.

Sub-tools floating palette display


Several tools display a sub-tools palette such as “Surface and volume primitives” (see details
on page 258) and “Line drawing”(see details on page 277).
Amapi Pro gives the choice between two display modes:
Sub-tools floating palettes display (default).
The Sub-tools palettes are displayed in the tools palettes area.

Amapi ProT M 455


Toolbox
The tools proposed in the modeling room have been split into
three tools palettes (see details on page 237) :
• The Construction palette
• The Modeling palette
• The Assembly palette
With each one of these principal tools palettes, a “Basic
ToolKit” is added and is always available.
Amapi Pro proposes several possible interfaces with regards
to accessing the modeling tools:
“Toolbox” Interface (default).
“Tools palette” Interface.

“Tools
Read the “Two interfaces” (see details on page 79) paragraph palette”
Interface
to learn more information about each interface.
“Toolbox”
Tooltips display Interface

Enables the tooltips display (default).


Disables the tooltips display.

Miscellaneous

Right-handed palettes display


Amapi Pro displays the tools palettes (See “The Tools palettes” on page 78) at the right-hand
side of the screen. Some people, such as the left-handed persons, might choose to display the
tools palettes on the left-hand side of the screen.
Displays the tools palettes on the right-hand side of the screen (default).
Displays the tools palettes on the left-hand side of the screen.

Maximum undo levels


Sets the successive maximum undo levels (Ctrl-Z).

Automatic saving of preferences


Automatic saving of preferences enabled (default)
Automatic saving of preferences disabled

456 Reference Manual


View Informations display
It is possible to decide whether or not to display information in the upper left-hand corner of
each view (See “Simple-view / Multi-view” on page 178)
Display the point of view name (default).
Do not display the point of view name.

Display the number of frames per second


Display the number of frames per second (default).
Do not display the number of frames per second.

Display the file name


You are allowed to display or to not display the file name in the upper top left corner of the
current view (See “Simple-view / Multi-view” on page 178).
Display the file name (default).
Do not display the file name.

Grey inactive tools icons


Grey inactive tools icons (default).
Do not grey inactive tools icons.

Display time
Display time (default).
Do not display time.

Display the 3D view border


Display a line around the graphic window (default).
The graphic window is not marked.

Magnetism effect
Magnetized dialog boxes (default).
Not magnetized dialog boxes.

Display the Assistant palette


Display the assistant palette (default).
Do not display the assistant palette.
(See “The assistant palette” on page 206)

Amapi ProT M 457


Colors
The majority of the user interface colors can be modified. Click on the sample of color circle
to display the colors palette. The default colors depend on the selected theme.

Editor’s colors
You will be able to personalize the colors of the editor's windows such as the preferences
editor, the shortcuts editor...

Colors of the palettes


You will be able to personalize the colors of the floating palettes, the tool options palettes
and the windows of the software messages.

458 Reference Manual


31.1.2 Graphic environment
The user will work in the orthonormal base visualized as three gradated axis.
The working plane, on which the modeling will be done, is defined by the two axis most
parallel to the current view plane.
To create points in 3D the user will be allowed to use a 2D mouse (or equivalent) only. He or
she will have to change the viewpoint to change the working plane (See “The Navigation”
on page 135).
The orthogonal planes visualization will help for the orientation in the 3D graphic
workspace.
(See “The graphic environment” on page 87).

Orthogonal planes
Some preferences allow you to customize the display.

Display the floor


Enabled (default).
Disabled.

Checker plane
Enabled the plane is checkered (default).
Disabled.

Translucent Checker plane


Enabled the checkers on the plane are translucent (default).
Disabled.

Antialias on grid texture


Enabled (default).
Disabled.

Grid size
The dimensions of the plane(s) can be customized. The setting can be made by moving the
slider’s cursor or by entering a value in the data window on the right-hand side of the slider.

Amapi ProT M 459


Number of columns of the grid
The number of columns can be customized. The setting can be made by moving the slider’s
cursor or by entering a value in the data window on the right-hand side of the slider.

Number of rows of the grid


The number of rows can be customized. The setting can be made by moving the slider’s
cursor or by entering a value in the data window on the right-hand side of the slider.

Display the tree grids


Enabled.
Disabled (default).

Display image on XY plane


Enabled.
Disabled (default).

Image on XY plane
Select the image to display.

Display image on XZ plane


Enabled.
Disabled (default).

Image on XZ plane
Select the image to display.

Display image on YZ plane


Enabled.
Disabled (default).

Image on YZ plane
Select the image to display.

Grid color
Click on the color sampling circle to display the color setting palette.

460 Reference Manual


Center of grid axis color
Click on the color sampling circle to display the color setting palette.

Orthogonal planes color


Click on the color sampling circle to display the color setting palette.

Rulers

Quarter axis (half-axis)


Amapi Pro suggests two possible representations of the rulers.
Half-axis enabled: only the half portion of the axis that is in use is displayed.
Half-axis disabled: the entire axis is displayed (default).

Quarter axis gradation


Amapi Pro offers two possible representations of the rulers.
Gradation limited to the half part of the axis that is in use (default).
Gradation on the entire axis length.

Local gradation
Amapi Pro propose two types of gradation for the rulers.
Gradation activated locally.
Gradation disactivated locally (default)

Coordinates display
Amapi Pro asks if you would like to display the cursor coordinates along the rulers.
Display the cursor coordinates.
Do not display the cursor coordinates (default).

Display 2D axis (2D Trihedron)


The trihedron is a miniature representation of the orthonormal base that facilitates the orien-
tation in the graphic workspace.
Display the trihedron in the bottom left hand corner (default).
Do not display the trihedron.

Display 3D axis (3D Trihedron)


The trihedron is a miniature representation of the orthonormal base that facilitates the orien-
tation in the graphic workspace.

Amapi ProT M 461


Display the trihedron in the center of the graphic workspace (0,0,0) (default).
Do not display the trihedron.

Axis (Trihedron) size


The setting can be made by moving the slider’s cursor or by entering a value in the data
window on the right-hand side of the slider.

Origin of the ruler


The origin of the ruler default position is the center of the grid and called “the ground”. It
can be changed at any time during the modeling process.
It can be set by using the tool “Orthonormal base origin” (see details on page 173)
located in the Control panel.

Alignment guides
The “Alignment guides” tool allows you to temporarily constrain the cursor movement dur-
ing the construction of 3D points (See “Alignment guides” on page 196).

“Alignment guides”

“Alignment guides” Disabled

“Alignment guides” Enabled

Alignment angles
Allows you to assign particular values to the angles the alignments guides will be displayed
at. Attention, when modified, this modifies the values of the eight following angles.

Angles 1 to 8
Values of the angles that the alignment guides will be displayed at. These values can be set
manually. Attention, the use of the "Alignment Angles" field redefines these angles auto-
matically.

462 Reference Manual


Cursor

Snapping
This option allows you to specify whether the cursor should be snapped on the virtual grid
defined by the orthonormal base gradations.

A cursor that is not magnetized moves freely in the scene.

A magnetized cursor is snapped to the intersection points of the grid.


See “Snapping” (see details on page 174) for more information.

Cursor-parameter display
If enabled, the parameters follow the cursor movement and are very easy to view. But,
unlike the parameter palette, the cursor-parameter doesn’t allow editing (See “To check the
parameters” on page 161).
Enables the cursor-parameter display (default).
Disables the cursor-parameter display.

Navigation Animation
(See “The Navigation” on page 135)

Animated direct viewpoint changing


Amapi Pro offers to animate the direct viewpoint changing to help the user determine the
best orientation.
Camera animation enabled (default)
The camera animation speed can be set.
Camera animation disabled
(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142).

Animated direct viewpoint changing speed setting


This option allows you to set the speed of the direct viewpoint changing animation. The
maximum camera animation time can be set. Amapi Pro will interpolate the number of
images needed for the allowed time.

Amapi ProT M 463


Mouse rotation navigation speed step setting
This option allows you to set the observer’s eye rotation step around the scene, while using
the mouse (See “Rotate around the scene” on page 141).

Mouse panoramic navigation speed step setting


This option allows you to set the observer’s eye panoramic movement from the scene, while
using the mouse (See “Pan the scene” on page 141).

The animation follows the cursor direction


About “Rotate around the scene” (see details on page 141), gives you two possibilities:
The animation follows the cursor direction (default).
The animation follows the cursor opposite direction.

MicroScribe

AutoPlot
Allows you to continuously digitize by moving the point of the digitizer on the surface. In
this mode, when the stylus has covered the distance defined by the Distance AutoPlot
parameter, a point is automatically created.

Autoplot Distance
Defines the distance between two points created in AutoPlot mode.

Scale
Scale factor applied to all the points drawn by the Microscribe.

464 Reference Manual


31.1.3 Scene display
Amapi Pro has many options to help display the scene in a manner best suited to the user’s
requirements and/or facilitating operation. The user can personalize the display of each
element of the scene as well as the selection in progress. However, some types of display
need a fairly long display time. That is why Amapi Pro offers several display optimization
functions.

Entities display
Different entities are handled while modeling: points, edges, facets or objects (See “Entity”
on page 94).
Amapi Pro offers several display options that allow you to highlight one or another kind of
entity.
Depending on the manipulation to be made, select the display mode that best highlights the
entities you're working on. It can be changed at any time during the modeling. Most of them
are accessible through the Control panel (see details on page 167).

Give a different color to each object


This option allows you to give colors to objects that are not selected:
Give a different color to each new object: enabled (default).
The color of each new object is picked in a predefined color table.
Give a different color to each new object: disabled.
All the objects have the same color (See “Edges color” on page 467).

Default color
This preference will enable you to personalize the color of the objects. It will be taken into
account if you chose not to give a different color to each object (see above).

Objects display mode (Real time rendering mode)


Amapi Pro offers several display modes to best highlight the entities you're working on.
The “Wireframe” mode displays only the edges of the objects. Because this mode
doesn’t display facets, it has the advantage to show the entire object without having
to navigate the scene. It is possible to select the elements which would be hidden in
a non-wireframe mode.

The “Lit Wireframe” mode adds a light effect to the “Wireframe” mode.

Amapi ProT M 465


The “Flat Solid” mode gives a more realistic appearance to the objects by
displaying their facets.
The “Flat Solid and edges” mode adds the edges display to the “Flat Solid” mode.

The “Smoothed Solid” mode corresponds to the “Flat Solid” mode on which a
smoothing has been applied. This is the most realistic mode.
The “Smoothed Solid and edges” mode adds the edges display to the “Smoothed
Solid” mode.
These options can also be accessible through the Control panel (See “The display modes” on
page 180).

Selection transparency level


Transparency allows you to select the elements which would not be visible (and not
selectable) if the display was in solid mode (See “Objects display mode (Real time rendering
mode)” on page 465).
This option will be effective in the following situations:
• The “Transparency effect” (see details on page 470) option is enabled.
• The selectable entity is an edge or point (See “The selectable entities” on
page 149).
The “Selection transparency level” option allows you to tune the transparency level.
The setting can be made by moving the slider’s cursor or by entering a value in the data
window on the right-hand side of the slider.

Simplified display
This option allows you to limit the display simplification of the objects.

Do not simplify the scene display.

Simplify the display of the objects not selected.

Simplify the display of the selected objects.

Simplify the display of all the objects of the scene.


(See “Simplified display” on page 177).

Perspective
This option allows you to toggle on one of the two display modes of the scene:

466 Reference Manual


The Conical Perspective (default)

The Orthographic view to see the scene without perspective.


In some cases, this display mode can provide a clearer visualization of the scene or
facilitate some manipulations.
This option is also be accessible through the Control panel (See “Perspective” on page 176).

Edges color
This preference allows you to set the color of the edges.

Points color
This preference allows you to set the color of the points.

Point sizes
This preference allows you to set the size of a point.

Size of the centers of the objects


The user can specify the size of the mark showing the center of the objects.

Current selection display


The current selection consists of marking a set of items before applying an action on them
(See “The concept of selection” on page 147).
Amapi Pro allows you to display the scene. This option is to help meet the user’s
requirements and/or facilitate the operation.

Color of selected objects


This preference allows you to display the current object(s) with a fixed color to distinguish
them between the objects that are not selected.
Display the current object with another color: enabled (default)
Display the current object with another color: disabled

Color of the selected object


This preference allows you to customize the color of the selected objects.

Amapi ProT M 467


Edge colors of the selected BREP
BREPs have two types of edges:
• edges and cuttings representing selectable edges
• the isoparametric curves which are for visual help only
These two types of edges are displayed with different colors on selected objects.

editable edges isoparametric curves

Edge and face colors of the selected BREP


In faces selection mode, BREPs faces can be selected individually. It is possible to set the
colors for the edges and for the isoparametric curves of the selected faces.

Display the bounding box


The bounding box is the smallest way in which to contain an object or a group of objects. It
appears when the object is selected.
Display the bounding box: enabled
Display the bounding box: disabled (default)

Center display
The user can choose to display or not the geometrical center of a selected object.
Enable the display of the center
Disable the display of the center (default)

468 Reference Manual


Display the edges
Display the edges: enabled (default)
Display the edges: disabled
Amapi Pro will not use this option if the current display mode shows the edges (See
“Objects display mode (Real time rendering mode)” on page 465).

Display the points


The user can choose to display or not the points of the selected object(s).
Display the points: enabled
Display the points: disabled (default)

Point sizes
The user can personalize the size of the representation of the points of selected objects.

Color of the bounding box (control shape)


The bounding box is the smallest way in which to contain an object or a group of objects. It
surrounds the selected object(s) (see details on page 482). Its color can be customized.

Color of the selected but not editable entities


This preference allows you to customize the color of the selected but not editable entity
(facet, edge or point).

Color of the selected editable entities


This preference allows you to customize the color of the selected editable entity (facet, edge
or point).

Entity highlight display (facet, edge or point)

Entity highlighted when flying over it


Amapi Pro offers to highlight an entity when the cursor flies over it.
Highlights an entity when the cursor moves over it: enabled (default)
Highlights an entity when the cursor moves over it: disabled

Entity color highlight


This preference allows you to customize the color of the highlighted entity not yet selected.

Amapi ProT M 469


Latency of the highlighting of the detected entities
• Object latency highlighting
• Facet latency highlighting
• Edge latency highlighting
• Point latency highlighting

Edge colors of the detected BREP


The BREPs have two types of edges:
• edges and cuttings which represent selectable edges
• isoparametric curves for visual help only
These two types of edges are displayed in different colors on the detected objects.

Edge and face colors of the detected BREP


In faces selection mode, BREPs faces can be selected individually. It is possible to set the
colors for the edges and the isoparametric curves of the detected faces.

Color of the highlighted and already selected entity


This preference allows you to customize the color of the highlighted and currently selected
entity.

Display editing

Color of the Deformation box and of the NURBS Control box


This option allows you to customize the color of:
• “Set the mesh of the control box” (see details on page 376)
• The NURBS Control box (See “The NURBS models” on page 98).

Transparency effect
This preference lets you decide whether or not to give a transparency effect to the selected
objects.
If this option is activated, it will be effective in the following situations:
• When selecting edges or points
The transparency allows you to select the elements which would not be visible (and not
selectable) if the display was in solid mode (See “Objects display mode (Real time
rendering mode)” on page 465).
The selected object will be displayed with a transparency effect if:
• The “Transparency effect” option is enabled (see details on page 470).

470 Reference Manual


• The selectable entity is edge or point (See “The selectable entities” on
page 149).
The “Selection transparency level” option (see details on page 466) allows you to tune
the transparency level.
• When editing an object with several Dynamic Geometry levels
The transparency allows you to display the Dynamic geometry level corresponding to
the finished object while an intermediate level is edited. This kind of display has the
advantage of making manipulation particularly efficient (See “Dynamic Geometry
(DG)” on page 109).
The user can set the “Transparency level when editing DG” (see details on page 471).

Display “with transparency effect” (default)

Display “without transparency effect”

This is effective when a “solid” display mode has been selected (See “Objects display mode
(Real time rendering mode)” on page 465).
This option can also be accessible through the Control panel (See “Transparency of the
selected object” on page 181).

Transparency level when editing DG


This preference allows you to adjust the transparency value of the Dynamic geometry level
corresponding to the finished object while an intermediate level is edited.
The setting can be made by moving the slider’s cursor or by entering a value in the data
window on the right-hand side of the slider.
This set up is effective only if a display mode with transparency effect has been selected.
(See “Transparency effect” on page 470).

Tools feedback color


This preference allows you to customize the feedback color of several tools.

Advanced display options


When displaying complex scenes, the display time or the density of some objects can
obstruct the manipulation. To fix this, use the following options:

Fast transparency
Fast transparency: enabled.

Amapi ProT M 471


Fast transparency: disabled (default)

Buffer region
Buffer region:
Amapi Pro uses the previous object’s display computation to speed up the display in real-
time.
Do not use the previous display (default)

Advanced occlusion culling


Occlusion culling enabled:
Amapi Pro uses the 3D graphic board occlusion culling system which avoids displaying
the objects not in the field of view (See “Viewpoint” on page 137).
Occlusion culling disabled (default)

Clipping objects

Fast edges
Line display method which improves display times (depending on the type of graphics card)
Active.
Disable (default).

Refresh method
• Refresh method extended to all views (default).
• Refresh method limited to the current view.
Amapi Pro uses this option when the Muti-view mode is selected (See “Simple-view /
Multi-view” on page 178).

Regular OpenGL mode display


Regular OpenGL mode display enabled (default).
Regular OpenGL mode display disabled.
Some OpenGL extensions can cause display problems with some graphic boards. This
mode does not use such extensions.

Hidden lines
Hidden lines enabled (default): uses a special filling mode based on a “stipple pattern”. It
can simulate the transparency on some graphic boards.
Hidden lines disabled.

472 Reference Manual


Background image
Enabled.
Disabled (default).

Background image file


The user can indicate a file to be used as the background image of the scene.

Anti-aliasing
Anti-aliasing enabled (default).
Anti-aliasing disabled.
(See “Anti-aliasing” on page 481)

Clipping (Front/back cut out)


Useful in the case of very small objects.

Lighting
The lighting corresponds to the propagation of luminous rays. It is directly related to the
effect obtained when rendering. By selecting the actual lighting, several parameters can be
customized.

Actual lighting
Actual lighting enabled (default)
If so, the following parameters can be customized.
Actual lighting disabled.

Use a global specular on objects


Enabled (default)
Disabled.

Specular power (spread) (actual lighting)


The spread sets the size of the reflection.

Global light
The default values of the two global lights can be configured by adjusting their associated
colors.

Amapi ProT M 473


31.1.4 Printing preferences
Drawing options
• Draw all lines
• Draw hidden lines
• Draw hidden lines «fast»

Scale
This parameter is a scale factor, it allows you to control the printing size.
The values must be within: ]0,1000].

Points per inch


This parameter controls the printing quality.
The values must be within: [150,3000].

Print measures
Print measures
Do not print measures

31.1.5 Import / Export


The preferences editor allows you to customize the import/export files. See paragraph
“Import / Export” (see details on page 229) to find the list of the imported or exported
formats.

31.1.6 Units
Relative coordinates
By default, Amapi Pro works in relative mode (see details on page 486). The modeling
requirements can force the user to work in absolute mode (see details on page 481). To
toggle from one to the other, you can check the “Relative coordinates” option.
Relative coordinates (default)
Absolute coordinates

474 Reference Manual


Length units
Amapi Pro allows you to change the length unit at any time of the modeling. To do so, select
the unit from the following list:
• None
• mm
• cm (default)
• m
• inch
• numeric inch

Angle unit
Amapi Pro allows you to change the angle unit at any time of the modeling. To do so, select
the unit from the following list:
• Degree
• Radian

Precision
Amapi Pro allows you to control the units precision. To do so, specify the number of digits
after the decimal point to be displayed.
The setting can be made by moving the slider’s cursor or by entering a value in the data
window on the right-hand side of the slider. The default precision is “2”.

Working scale
This preferences editor allows you to set a working scale. The setting can be made by
moving the slider’s cursor or by entering a value in the data window on the right-hand side
of the slider.

Predefined scale factor


This preferences editor allows you to select a working scale from the proposed list.

Amapi ProT M 475


31.1.7 NURBS preferences
The default tesselation can be configured for object creation and export. This makes it possi-
ble to easily set a mode of very precise tesselation adapted to the constraints of the recipient
of the exported file while conserving a rapid display with a less precise tesselation.

Tesselation

Default range of the curves


Default tesselation range used by all the tools for NURBS curves.

Remove confusing tesselation points


Eliminates confusing points generating by tesselation. Lets you clean up the final topology.

Default tesselation mode


Default tesselation mode used during object creation and display:
• Constant subdivision of the parameters (default)
• Crack-free adaptative tesselation
The following values are active only for the tesselation mode which uses them. (See “Tesse-
late” on page 367)

Default range in U and V


Default tesselation range used by all the tools for NURBS surfaces. Only for tesselation by
constant subdivision (See “Tesselate” on page 367)

Default UV maximum angle

Default maximum chord height

Default maximum width/height ratio

Default smallest UV subdivision

Default minimal/maximal 3D edge length


Parameters of adaptive tesselation by default (See “Tesselate” on page 367).

476 Reference Manual


Try to create quadrangles
Generally, the adaptive tesselation creates triangles. Sometimes it is preferable to obtain
quadrangles.

Tesselation for exporting


This parameter makes it possible to select the tesselation to be used to export files in polyg-
onal format:
• Uses the tesselation parameters of the objects
• Constant subdivision of the parameters
• Crack-free adaptive tesselation
If the first value is selected, the objects will be exported with the same tesselation as that
used for display. If not, the parameters will be used as described in the preceding paragraph.

Amapi ProT M 477


31.2 Shortcuts Editor
The shortcuts editor allows you to customize the keyboard shortcuts to use the Amapi Pro
functions.

How to edit a shortcut?


1) The editor left hand side lists the different tools palettes of Amapi Pro.
Click on the name of the one which contains the desired tool, to edit the corresponding
shortcut.
2) The editor displays the icons corresponding to the tools of the selected palette. Each of
them is followed by an editable text area.
Click in the text area corresponding to the shortcut to implement or to change.
3) Press the key (or combination of keys) that will be the new shortcut.
4) Click on the “Validation” button to validate the modifications and close the editor.

478 Reference Manual


Appendix
480 Reference Manual
32
Glossary

Absolute (mode) In absolute mode (in opposition to the relative mode) the
position of a point is computed by comparison with an
origin point. The default is fixed by convention at the center
of the plane (x,z).
(See “Relative (mode)” on page 486)

Aliasing Undesirable visual effect (often called “jaggies”) which


appears when rendering curves at angles other than 0, 45, or
90 degrees. Also visible on polygon edges, particularly with
high contrast scenarios. See also anti-aliasing.

Ambient (Color…) Color of the object in ambient lighting (without shadows).

Anti-aliasing Filtering techniques used to reduce or eliminate aliasing


effects. See aliasing

Bitmap A bitmap image is an image which is defined by pixels (as


opposed to vectors)

BREP A BREP (Boundary Representation) is an object made up of


one or more NURBS surfaces and with topological connec-
tions corresponding to the edges or intersections of these
surfaces. A BREP can be open or closed.
(See “BREP: «watertight» surfaces and volumes” on
page 103)

Amapi ProT M 481


Bounding box The smallest parallelepiped which can contain an object or a
group of objects. It appears when the object is selected. The
bounding box is displayed either partially if the selection is
an object or completely for a group of objects.
The preference editor allows you to disable its display
(“Preferences editor”> “Scene display”> “Current selection
display”.

Boolean An operation based on logical algebra that can calculate the


intersection of two objects, as well as their union, exclusion,
and more.

Brightness Brightness is the property of an object to reflect light. The


parameters controlling brightness are: the specularity, the
spread, the falloff, and the filter. Example: a polished
surface has a narrow and intense reflection. A matte surface
displays a wide and faint reflection.

Camera The tool used to set the viewpoint, view direction, and
orientation.

Catalog The Amapi Pro file manager (See “The Catalog” on


page 443).

Clone Clones are strictly identical objects which refer to only one
and unique geometry. A transformation done to one of them
will be automatically applied to all of its clones.
(See “The clones” on page 107).

Composite (curve) A composite curve is an object made up of a series of


several lines with a connection at each extremity.
Different from connected curves (see details on page 482).

Connected (curves) Connected curves are several curves, where each curve has
one end located at the same position in 3D space as the first
point of the next curve.
Different from composite curves (see details on page 482).

Control shape (See “Bounding box” on page 482)

482 Reference Manual


Control panel The Control panel is displayed at the bottom of the screen. It
provides access to a variety of modeling aids for a better use
of Amapi Pro. (See “The Control panel” on page 167)

Coons (surfaces…) A modeling technique based on a set of connected 3D


curves forming the boundaries of an interpolated surface.

Coplanar Points, segments or flat surfaces located in the same plane.

Current selection “To Select” consists of marking a set of items before


applying an action to them (See “Entity” on page 94).
All the tools have an effect on all selected elements (we call
this the “current selection”). See “Selection” (see details on
page 147).

Deformation box The objects modified with the “Deform” tool replaces
Dynamic Geometry by a DG level corresponding to its “Set
the mesh of the control box” (see details on page 376).

Dialog Box Window that allows the user to answer questions or select
options.

Diffuse (Color…) What the object reflects when lighted by direct lighting
(daylight or artificial light)

Entity An entity is the element type. It can be an object, a facet, an


edge or a point (See “Entity” on page 94).

Facet A flat surface delimited by geometric edges (straight lines or


curves), usually a triangle or a quadrilateral. Also called
polygon.

Field of view The region of space that the eye can perceive when looking
at a target point.

Filter Controls the influence of the color of light on the color of its
reflection (defined by the specularity)

Format Structure of the data used to save a file on the hard drive.
There are numerous types of file formats.

Amapi ProT M 483


Dynamic Geometry This allows you to edit a surface not from the surface
wireframe but from the construction curves, which then
become the control curves of the surface. The surface is
automatically regenerated when you edit the curves (like the
NURBS control polygons). Each object of the scene retains
its building steps. You can, thanks to Dynamic Geometry,
edit the construction curve of every step of construction.
Amapi Pro will then rebuild the resulting shapes
automatically (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on
page 109)

Falloff Defines the way reflection is diffused along a surface.

Grid Intersection of lines evenly spaced out in two or three


dimensions.

Grid structure An object with a grid-structure (Quad mesh), built from


(Quad mesh) deformed mesh. This grid can be open or closed. The
different ways of closure can be:
• The curves are closed in U or in V (Cylinder).
• The curves are closed in U and in V (Torus).

Hidden facets Facets of a model that are hidden by other objects in the
current viewpoint.

Hidden lines Edges or lines of a model that are hidden by other objects in
the current viewpoint.

Incident light The way the light strikes an object. The resulting color of
the object depends on the incident light and the intrinsic
object color

Interface Communication facility between the computer and its


peripherals or between the user and the software.

Interpolation Mathematical technique used to define a curve, in that the


curve must pass through all its control points (unlikely in the
approximation technique)

Layer A layer is a system used to classify objects. The Scene


Manager is the tool used to manage this system. Objects can
be assigned to layers.

484 Reference Manual


Lighting Lighting is the propagation of rays of light coming from a
natural or artificial light source

Luminance Reflected or emissive light intensity of a surface in an given


direction

Mapping (image) The mapping of an image (texture map) on a surface


(describing a volume or not). There are different types of
mapping depending on how the image is projected onto the
object, and on the interaction between the projection and the
surface of the object. For example, planar, spherical,
cylindrical…

Material A material defines the appearance of a surface. It’s color,


specular aspect, transparency coefficient,...

Navigation Techniques for moving and positioning the Viewpoint (See


“The Navigation” on page 135).

Non planar facets A facet whose points do not lie on the same plane.

NURBS A NURBS (Non Uniform Rational B-Spline) model is a


parametric curve or surface defined by control points. The
curve or surface is automatically interpolated to give a
smoothed shape. This shape is not editable. While moving
the points of the “control” shape, the smoothed curve or
surface aspect will change. This kind of model is very often
used in CAD/CAM because it allows you to create exact
surfaces. (See “The NURBS models” on page 98)
The NURBS model is not be overlapped with polygonal
model (see details on page 486).

NURBS control box A NURBS is controlled by “control shape”. This shape is


editable by the editor-tools. The object deformation will
follow the control shape modifications (See “The NURBS
models” on page 98).

Eye The eye is the location the scene is viewed from.


(See “Viewpoint” on page 137)

Amapi ProT M 485


Palette The tools of the modeling room have been dispatched in
specialized groups of tools called “Tools palettes” (See “The
Tools palettes” on page 78).

Phong (model of…) Phong Shading method using normal interpolation for each
point of a shape. It doesn't pick up into account indirect
lighting, such as the reflection of other objects.

Polygonal (model...) A Polygonal model is defined by a set of editable points


depicting the object topology (See “The Polyhedral models”
on page 97).
It is not be overlapped with NURBS model (See “NURBS”
on page 485).

Pulldown menu Menu appearing when the user presses a key or clicks on a
button and disappearing once the selection is made.

Radiance Determines the light generated by an object’s surfaces,


independent of any external light source.

Reflection Reflection Surfaces reflect to some degree the surrounding


colors. The reflection determines the ratio between reflected
light and incident light (in the case of a lit surface).

Relative (mode) The position of a point as defined relatively to the position


of the previously entered point. See also absolute mode (See
“Absolute (mode)” on page 481)

Rendering Rendering is the process of computing and displaying a


scene. Computations are based on predefined algorithms
that pick up into account: the geometry of the objects
(modeling), the materials applied to those objects (metal,
marble, wood, etc.), the lighting, the camera view and
finally, the interaction that all those elements may have
between each other (shadows, reflections, etc.).

Room A room contains a set of tools used to make the similar kinds
of operations. Rooms include modeling, material editing,
and organizing the catalog.

Scene A scene consists of objects created in the same work space

486 Reference Manual


Selection accessories Amapi Pro has two kinds of selection accessories:
• “The selectable entities” (object, facet, edge or point).
• “The selection methods”.
(See “The selection accessories” on page 148).

Smoothing Allows the user to control the number and size of facets
defining a surface or the number of segments defining a
curve. The higher the smoothing value, the smoother the
object will look.
Amapi Pro proposes several smoothing modes.

Spread Specifies the size of the reflection of a light source on an


object.

Specular color Specifies the color and intensity of the reflection on an


object.

Target point Point the eye is looking at.


(See “Viewpoint” on page 137)

Tool Each room contains its own functions called “Tools”.


The Modeling room tools are divided into specialized tool
groups. They are called “Tools palettes” (See “The Tools
palettes” on page 78).

Tools accessories “Tool accessories” are additional functions included in tools


(See “Tool accessories” on page 85).

Tool options “The tool options” are tool operating or computing methods
(See “The tool options” on page 84).

Transparency Surface property defining the quantity of incident light


transmitted through the surface of the object.

View plane The view plane is perpendicular to the eye - target point
axis.
The view plane of the current view is projected onto the
screen

Amapi ProT M 487


Viewpoint The viewpoint defines the observer’s eye. It is defined by
the eye position, a target point defining the viewing
direction, and the field of view.

Working plan The “working plane” is the plane on which the modeling
will be done. It is defined by the two axis the most parallel
to the current view plane

488 Reference Manual


33 Basic toolkit 241
• Move 242
• Rotate 244
• Scale 248
B

Index • Stretch 252


Bend 379
Booleans 354, 355
Break (Nodal) 188
BREP 103
• Dissociate the faces of a... 188

Numerics Browsing the Catalog 444


Bulb 436
2D Drawing 277
Bump/Soften 385
3D Digitizer 163, 233

C
A
Cancel 215
Align 406
Catalog 197, 443
Alignment 196 • Browsing the Catalog 444
Alignment guides 196 • Browsing the pages 444
• Delete a file from the catalog 445
Ambient color 433 • Delete the entire scene 445
Angle 417 • Edit files information 445
• Export 448
Arc 284 • Import 448
Assembly 241 • Importing a file from the catalog into
the scene 446
AutoPlot 235
• Managing the favorites directory 447
Axis toggling 193 • Open a directory 444
• Organizing the catalog 446
• Rebuilding the catalog 448
• Saving a scene in the catalog 446
catalog.lst 430, 446, 447

Amapi ProT M 489


Chamfer 347 Cursor-parameters 161
Circle 281 Curve
• Composite 91
Circumference 418
• Simple 91, 92
Clones 107
Curves 292
Close 210, 400 • Connected 91
• A grid structure object 401
Cut 215, 354
• A polygonal surface 400
• Booleans 354, 355
• Edit the polylines closures 400
• Extract 354
Color 433 • Punch 354
• Editor 458 • Slices 354
• Interface 458
Cutting NURBS (Trimming) 357
• Palettes 458
Cylinder 267
Cone 266
Constraints 191, 221
• Advanced 194
• Alignment guides 196
• Axis toggling 193
Construction 257, 339, 387 D
Control panel 167
• Alignment Guides 175 Decimate 420
• Group, Ungroup 186 Deform 382
• Information 187
Degree (NURBS) 101, 290, 293, 342
• Objects display 180
• Orthonormal basis origin 173 Delete 216, 364, 445
• Perspective 176
Diffuse color 433
• Scene / orthonormal basis toggling
171 Directory 444
• Simple-view / Multi-view 178 Display modes 180
• Simplified display 177
• Snap 174 Dissociate the faces of a BREP 188
• Working in the view plane 169 Distance 416
• Working with or without Dynamic
Geometry 183 Dodecahedron 269

Copy 215 Double-Sweep 321

Copy on support 392 Duplicate 388, 392


• Copy on support 392
Cube 260 • Multiple copy 390
Current selection 147, 483 • Single copy 389
Cursor 208 Dynamic Geometry
• Behavior of the tools regarding the DG

490 Reference Manual


128 Entity
• Browsing the palette 116 • Edge 94
• Collapsing the DG 118 • Facet 94
• Displaying mode 125 • Object 94
• Editing the DG level 123 • Point 94
• Manipulating DG 115
Ergonomics 13
• Renaming a shape 116
• Selecting the working level 116 Export 212, 231, 448
• Showing/Hiding a level 117 Extract (Cut) 354
• The concept 109
• The different levels of completion 126 Extract Facets 304
• The intermediate levels finishing 127 Extract Lines 300
• The palette 115 • Extraction of openings 301
• The shapes hierarchy 111 • From existing points 300
• The tree 111, 189 • Object edges 301
• U and V curves of a grid structure 302
Eye 137

E
Eccentricity 433
Edit
F
• 3D Digitizer 163 Face
• File information 445 • Back 179, 219
• Joint and opening of a grid structure • Front 179, 219
object 401
• Parameters 162 Facets
• Polylines closures 400 • Concave 345
• Convex surfaces 345
Editing 214
• Cancel 215 Falloff 433
• Copy 215 Favorites Directory 444
• Cut 215
• Delete 216 File
• Paste 215 • Close 210
• Redo 214 • Export 212
• Select All 216 • Import 212
• Undo 214 • Merge 210
• Validate 214 • Open 210
• Printing 212
Editor • Quit 213
• Material 427 • Save as 211
• Shortcuts 478

Amapi ProT M 491


File manager 58, 443 • PC 7
Filter 434 Interface theme
• Classic 14
• Classic with tools palettes 16
• Immersive 15
• Pro 14
Interpolated curve 289
G Isolate 185
Gradations 88
Graphic environment 87
Graphic workspace 18
Grid (primitive) 273
Grid structure (Quad Mesh) 106
K
• Edit 401 Keyboard 17
Group, Ungroup 186

L
H Lasso
Helix 295 • Personalized 153
• Rectangular 153
Help 205
• Cursor 208 Lay on 408
• Tooltips 208 Layers 197, 198
• Delete 199
• Lock 200
• Merge 199
• Move an object toward... 200
• Receiver 199
I • Show/Hide 199
Light sources 436
Icosahedron 268 • Bulb 436
Import 212, 229, 448 • Spot 436
• Sun 436
Information 187
Lighting 435
Installation 7
• Macintosh 9 Line drawing 277

492 Reference Manual


• Arc 284
• Circle 281
• Curve 292
N
• Helix 295
Navigation 136
• Interpolated curve 289
• Have a panoramic view 144
• Polyline 286
• Keyboard 142
• Rectangle / Square 279
Zoom 145
• Reverse curve points 299
• Make a direct viewpoint change 142
• Symmetry 298
• Pan the scene 141
Lines 277 • Rotate around the scene 141, 143
• View All 139
lst 446
• View Detail 140
lst (calatog.lst) 430 • View selection 142
• Viewpoint 137
• Zoom 140
Nodal break 188
Nodal point 372
M Nodal sequence (NURBS) 101
NURBS 98
Macintosh 9
• Create a ... 103
Mapping on plane 90 • Transform a NURBS model into a
Polygonal model 105
Material 427
• Transform a Polygonal model into a
• Applying a ... 430
NURBS model 105
• Catalog 428
• Editor 432
• The room 427
Measurements 415
Memo-Select 158
Merge 210 O
MicroScribe 163, 233 Objects 91
Move an object 242 • Clones 107
• Out of any tool 243 • Curves 91
• The tool 242 • Display 95
• Entity 94
Multi-view 178 • Grid structure (Quad Mesh) 106
• NURBS 96
• Open / Closed 94
• Polygonal 96
• Polygonal or NURBS models 96
• Surfaces 92

Amapi ProT M 493


• Types of objects 91 • Table of key actions in parameters edit
• Volumes 92 mode 166
Objects display 180 Paste 215
Objects name 92 PC 7
Octahedron 268 Perspective 176
Offset 351 png 211, 448
Open (file) 210 Polygonal 96, 97
Open / Closed (object) 94 Polyline 286
Optional palettes 168 Previewing and rendering 425
Origin of the orthonormal basis 88 Printing 212
Orthogonal planes 90
Orthonormal basis
• Graphic environment 88
• Origin 173

Q
Quad Mesh 106
Quick Tour 13
P Quit 213

Palette
• Construction 257, 339, 387
• Navigation 136
• Tool palettes 78
Panoramic view 141 R
Parameters 161
Record the current viewpoint 138
• Check the parameters 161
• Edit parameters Rectangle 279
3D Digitizer 163
Redo 214
• Editing the parameters 162
Remote control 162 Reflection 434
Using the mouse 162 Refraction 434
Validating or Canceling a data
input 165 Rendering 421
• Moving between parameters fields • Parameters 439
164 • Previewing 425
• Palette 161 • Save 426
• Rendering 439 Requirements 7, 9

494 Reference Manual


Reverse curve points 299 • Selection accessories 148
• Selection methods 150
Room 77
• Catalog 441 Shininess 433
• Rendering 421
Shortcuts editor 478
Rotate 244
Simple-view 178
• By a given angle 244
• To align 245 Simplified display 177
Rotate around the scene 141 Slice 354
Slider 164
Smooth 340
• Break control 344
• Convex surfaces 345
• Partial smoothing 345
S • Polygonal surfaces 341
• Tension control 343
Save 211
Snap 406, 419
Save as 211
Snapping 174, 192
Scale 248 • On particular points 192
Scene management • On ruler graduation 192
• Scene graph 201 Soften/Bump 385
Scene/orthonormal basis toggling 171 Specular 433
Screen 18 Sphere 260, 263
Searching for 217 Spot 436
Select All 216 Spread 433
Selectable entities 149 Square 279
Selection 147, 483 Stretch 252
• Cursor 159 • An object with a deformer control box
• Default selection mode 157 255
• Edges 149 • Following the normal 253
• Extend/Restrict the selection 155 • NURBS objects 254
• Facets 149 • With attraction 382
• Memo-Select 158
• Objets 149 Sun 436
• Personnalized 153 Surfaces 336, 418
• Points 149 • Coons 331
• Rectangular Lasso 153 • Gordon 334
• Select 1 over n 155 • Ruled 324
• Select by angle 156
• selectable entities 149 Surfaces and volumes primitives 258

Amapi ProT M 495


• Cone 266
• Cube 260
• Cylinder 267
U
• Dodecahedron 269
Undo 214
• Icosahedron 268
• Octahedron 268 Unfold 400, 409
• Sphere 263 Ungroup 186
• Tetrahedron 268
• Text 274
Sweep 307
• Extrude 307
• Sweep 307
Symmetry 298, 398 V
Validate 214
View
• All 139
• Detail 140
T • selection 142
View plane 137, 169
Target point 137
Viewpoint 137
Tesselate 367 • Delete 139
• A NURBS object 370 • Eye 137
• A polygonal curve 369 • Target point 137
• A polygonal volume or a surface 367 • View plane 137
Tetrahedron 268 Views 178
Text 274 Volume 418
Thickness / Offset 351
Tool 80
• accessories 85
• How to finish the tool action ? 80
• How to pick up a tool ? 80
• How to use a tool ? 80 W
• When taking a tool ? 80
Weld 403
Tool palettes 78
• Weld objects 403
Transparency 181, 434 • Weld points close from each other 403
Trash 429, 445 • Weld points close to each other 403
• Weld points on an object 403
Trimming 357
Working plane 89
Tuner-cursor 208

496 Reference Manual


Wrap 413

Z
Zoom 140

Amapi ProT M 497


498 Reference Manual
Amapi ProT M 499
500 Reference Manual

You might also like